Home

Mrs S Boyle Psion Teklogix Incorporated C/o RFI

1. B uss P2 mu SWITCHED 98153 TP429 Se E 5V_TETHER_PWR o L9 96350 200MA FH12 125 0 5SH m 1A SV 1 ESSEN E YY e GND RXD SCN TRIG 2 m2 OUTB 8 LN lil OUT7 FTT BLM10A121SPT Caso R294 as a ia 7 i YY V2 2 F Si ees 97296 C320 M e e e DV POWER TS SCH 10N a30 gu 10K0 97871 1 OUTS 6 BLM21PG221SN1 NA 15 97634 0 063W 100N e REENEN 16V FDV303N E B 1 Neen 25V 350MW 1 5 eu 2 CONTROL IN qm 3 4 S 5 7 96980 4 F A vid E e e EN oc 4 Y 5V POWER 9000933 Ki i C316 rpg SP3223EEY 9 Treat TETHER_POWER_ON 1 n BLMIOAT2ISPT pam 1 mem Tem tL sa 1 enD L8 96350 200MA Ee 100N 1 aig vec E C318 R120 e dera 15 y 36 r een 97320 a 028 CYY 6 J ap d FE cR 7 A Rite oe TP422 gt TP423 e USB TXD SCN_DATA x e co 15 oo63w 97320 FDV303N BLMIOA121SPT AS TP393 MN 16V TP396 Da Ja Wd 25V 350m 1 TM 4 i H Se E 97871 0 0 12 ran EE m y TP394 dis jose ee bad m e TP428 2 415 C2 97871 No 1 gt Ri me ES ew En i GND TP385 16V 1 100N TP395 GND TETHER POWER e e H gt 1 1 2 1 1K00 10K0 gt 9003430 x 15 100 100 i Si EXT SCNR ENA 5V 2 TP384 C2 v e 16V a 1P397 E pe ti j 10 2 e GND 3
2. A B TRACEWIDTH SYS PWR IN e e e e e e e R399 1 1 1 1 1 97453 VIN 12 amp 15V NOM s m e e c TP270 K TP271 9003428 9003428 9003428 9003428 9003428 0 063W Ee PEAK RIPPLE 1 75A 100 100 100 100 100 1 15 4 SAMEASSVRAE IN NORMAL OPERATION 2 Hox 2 10 2 Hox 2 so 2 ao 50v EN 50v 50v 50v e yn 8 e TRACEWIDTH 25 e e ane gt C68 Cit e e e INSTALL TO DISABLE BURST MODE 2 9005432 1 54054 POWER GND NET 4U7 1U0 10 10 S ute ey 16V TS LTC3728EUH 3000983 1 at 4 rop ava out TRAGEWIDTHEOS e Aus aus LDO gt 04 2 oe 21 Exrvcc sv rer 20 e einen ayes R100 10 TP326 TP274 D29 2 D31 2 E 9000540 16V 94543 94543 Geck Ir ops TP276 1 MBR0530T v MBROS3OT V 4 EL gt 0 25W gt 3 3V 5V PWR SUPPLY Te ERN E S 20 R593 97232 v 26 FDS6912A 1 2 dE Se o 1 2 Q48 e Wy e 28 24 22R1 9002932 5 e uM BOOST e xi 0 063W 30V 6A o u O49 weer 3002935 Ri51 Mount Parallel Sens Resistors Together 1 95621 t 300 9000540 E e be E S2 sv 2 50 e E 5A MAX 6A ABS PEAK 1 EX TRACEWIDTH 100 RIPPLE 12mV C48 FDS6912A 100 2 100 1 2 BACKUP 3 0V 1 95621 e e o e VW e e e e e e e e 100N Qs DR127 100 420 2 Gare 1 DoS Tem pu
3. c D B zu STANDBY 5V STANDBY TP494 a e 32KHZ TX B 3V3 STANDBY bus E R201 a R211 GE 97296 97296 t0ko 10K0 case 5V_STANDBY aen 0 063W 97871 3 cc GND E E 100N 1 s 5 s mo BUS 215 R323 a ra m re Hee JE Je vec mee GE E e TP482 100R MTG TAB z 63MW 3 e DS Y ss TP483 1 e O K8D_IRQ S 2 e e z e e EE 32KHZ TX A i e el azkhz RX A GND us2 580 9000515 KBD INT B NC7SZ125P5X 8 e e er KBD_INT_B e e e K8D INT A Gr KEDINTA Kg nl no a TXRX SOL T7 TXRX SDA 9002950 ae GND 3V3 STANDBY ISLGI21LIB T Te y e el KEYBOARD DETECT IN VIN our 7 33V STANDBY 2 6 wwe ost 1 aa SWITCHED ZEXT KYBD DETECT e e 4 EN om e gees gwD rau ees C290 C289 0288 0287 C284 C283 C282 C281 C280 AT sv swircHED 1 7371 1 7371 1 97371 1 97371 1 Smp 00 S71 1 oni mann 97am ay STANDEY Yip 100P 100P 100P 100P 100P 100P 100P 100P 100P TO 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 9002950 EL COMMAND ova surco EET ms 21 SV 2 sov 2 sov 2 sv 2 SW 2 SV 2 sov 2 5o 2 50v y GND lan mL e S7 7 7 7 7 lt 7 y d Y ano 3 vine oure Z GND e 4 EN our GND 1 5 9NB Oh 3 KEYBOARD DETECT our EXTERNAL KEYBOARD INTERFACE E e GREG 9002950 0279 3V3 STANDBY 5V SWITCHED ISL6121LIB T ss i 97371 SYSPWR 100P 32KHZ e 5 e BOO sy e C143 F SYSPWR VIN our e e 2 so 1 Sen m 100N 3 vine om e Ed 215 ee e zl ew nE TP134 vec 2 1V r
4. c A B TP142 1 HEATER POWER gt e e e e 1 C103 C19 1 95621 9003428 100N 10U 420 w par 2 110 2 97296 gen SE 0063W EX WwW i 137 s ef 7 a a23 TP144 1 97634 9002936 FDV303N FDS6675 Tez 25V 350MW 30V 11A 1 d e o TP145 Jr n MLB HEATER EN gt e e MLB HEATER POWER 1 D f e Ro 97320 gt 100K NS WE E 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ae R335 ben L R337 L R338 R339 R340 L R351 R341 R372 R371 R354 R353 R352 _ R389 R386 R385 R384 R380 R402 R40 R400 R394 R393 R407 R406 AOS R404 mos R418 mar mam R409 Raos R425 R422 R42 R420 R419 R430 R429 R428 R427 R426 R434 R433 L R432 R431 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 lt 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 lt 4K70 4K70 lt 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 x 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97208 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97
5. 24 2 3 Calibrating The Touchscreen c esou llle 24 2 4 Resetting The 8525 Vehicle Mount llle 24 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 13 c 18 Nov 2004 A k z d e Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Preparing The 8525 For Operation 2 1 Preparing The 8525 For Operation Typically 8525 vehicle mounts are configured at the factory and arrive ready for use Although the 8525 is equipped with an internal Compact Flash a PCMCIA slot and SD I O slot these slots are not intended for user modification If a device needs to be changed or added in these slots contact qualified Psion Teklogix personnel Refer to Appendix A Support Services And Worldwide Offices for the service number closest to you 2 2 Powering Up The 8525 And Configuring The Radio 2 2 1 Switching The 8525 On To switch the 8525 on e Press the lt ENTER ON gt key A splash screen displaying the Psion Teklogix logo and the Windows CE NET logo appears When Windows CE has successfully loaded the startup desktop is displayed KI Note The screen may go blank for a few seconds after the splash screen loading bar reaches the end This is part of the normal Windows CE NET cold boot process The desktop is displayed after a few moments 2 2 2 Configuring An IEEE 802 11 Radio Installed In The 8525 The most common 802 11b settings are configured as defaults However there are some fields that must be completed including t
6. Range Backlight Ctrl Panel see text The Display Properties dialogue box is displayed where you can adjust the appearance backlight and contrast of your 8525 display A N Important The Display Properties dialogue box options are described in detail beginning on page 68 Display Properties Background Appearance Bluetooth ETE Device i it fe minutes y 2 is fe minutes y Mouse When using external power keep the backlight always ON Remove Storage Stylus System Teklogi Total Recall Volume amp Start Tekterm contaran Tay Properties Figure 6 5 Display Properties uto Nov 2004 pa D e O Chapter 6 Tekterm Application More Parameters 6 15 More Parameters The More Parameters sub menus contain the Tekterm parameters and can only be accessed with the proper security password either a Supervisory or a Teklogix password Refer to Security Settings on page 160 for details Warning Parameters should not be altered without a clear understanding of how they operate Parameters that are incorrectly set can increase response time or cause communication difficulties Generally parameters are configured for each site during installation e Atthe startup Display menu type a to display the Parameters menu 01 Parameters Range More Paramete
7. Range gt Cont Nxt Fld Y Y N Append Enter Y Y N Append FO Y Y N Mixed AIAG N Y N Rjct if Alpha N Y N Beam Lockout N Y N Cont Nxt Fld This parameter only applies to string entry data When enabled set to Y this parameter allows bar codes that are longer than the field length to continue in the next field If ContNxtField is disabled set to N OFF data will flow into the next field Append Enter When enabled set to Y Append Enter causes an ENTER code to be appended to the bar code The ENTER code completes the entry of the bar code and moves the cursor to the next field Append FO When enabled set to Y this parameter causes an FO code to be appended to the bar code The F0 code completes the entry of the bar code data C 18 Nov 2004 x e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 205 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Fields Mixed AIAG When this parameter is enabled set to Y AIAG labels are always accepted and processed even if mixed with keyboard input The AIAG label can replace the partially entered keyboard data If this parameter is disabled AIAG labels are rejected if field entry is in progress Rjct if Alpha When the cursor is in a numeric field and Rjct if Alpha is enabled set to Y bar codes containing alphabetic characters are rejected Beam Lockout When enabled se
8. C 18 Nov 2004 x e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 183 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Xmit Modes Softkeys are function keys that have been programmed to perform specific actions in your application These keys are identified through softkey labels reverse video labels that are displayed at the bottom of the screen These softkey labels can be reconfigured using the menu attached to the Label F1 F10 parameter To edit a label Position the cursor in the appropriate function key field within the Label menu and type a new name preferably one that describes the corresponding key s function KI Note The number of allowable characters in a softkey label is dynamically calculated based on the screen size and the number of softkeys the unit supports Colour Override KI Note This menu is available only if the 8525 is equipped with a colour display 06 Colour Override Range Foreground Black see text Background Vhite see text Foreground And Background When Colour Override is set to Y the colours chosen in this menu are displayed in the ANSI sessions These colour settings will override the Default Colours set from within the View Manager menu Refer to Default Colours on page 175 for details The allowable values are Red Green Yellow Blue Magenta Cyan White and Black 6 20 1 3 Xmit Modes 05 Xmit Mod
9. CIS Data Psion Teklogix Inc RA1001 Narrowband Radio DSP 0 3 FPGA Ox1B i Default all Parameters Figure 5 28 Narrow Band Information The Power information in this screen indicates the power of the radio installed in the unit 0 5 or 1 0 W The Serial Number is the identifier for the radio and is used by the protocol when the Auto Radio Address parameter is enabled The CIS Card Information Structure Data is manufacturer information describing the PC Card installed in the 8525 DSP x x FPGA OxNN indicates the firmware revision of the radio s DSP x x and FPGA OxNN where x x and NN represent actual revision numbers Statistics Screen e Tap on the Statistics button to display the Protocol Statistics screen These statistics are updated every second while the dialogue box is displayed EXE x Protocol Low Level l cq100 chi sc 0 a c 18 Nov 2004 I Y 7 Zero Statistics 86 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Info Tab Figure 5 29 Protocol Statistics The following table provides a brief description of these statistics Statistic Description Channel quality See the description of the Channel Switch Speed parame eq ter in the channel tab for more information on how cq affects channel switching see Channel Switch Speed on page 90 ch Current channel Monitor state of RF Lin
10. Typel 1 ANSI Titlel 1 parts Settings 1 Typel 8 None Titlel 8 Settings 8 Range None ANSI see text see text AN Important These applications will become active only after E e chao A made in the Application screen are saved by pressing F4 the SAVE key c 18 Nov 2004 I e o Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 175 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application ANSI Settings Type And Title Up to eight applications can be entered in this parameter The Type field indicates the type of session you will be running The Title parameter should be completed with a name that is meaningful to the operator e The available options for the Type field are TESS ANSI and None Use the lt RIGHT gt or lt LEFT gt arrow key to scroll through the options e The Title field needs a name that is meaningful to the operator In addi tion TESS and ANSI applications require unique titles so that several different sessions of TESS and ANST can operate simultaneously These titles will appear in startup Display Menu Each session will have its own set of parameters e To display the Settings menu for your application position the cursor on Settings and press F1 the NEXT key KI Note Before you can access the Settings menu you must first complete the Name and Type fields
11. 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 Z 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW Gau 63MW eau eau 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW oun 63MW 63MW 63MW 6aMW 63MW sau sau sau 63MW 63MW 63MW au 63MW G3MW 63MW au 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW eu eu ua G3MW ua ua ua ua 63MW A 1 g 1 2 1 2 am 2 1 d 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 e e 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R534 R533 R532 R531 RS30 R529 R528 R524 RS23 RS22 R521 R520 pe L pe pe pe pes L R514 RSI3 L RSI2 R511 RS 0 R509 R508 ASO7 RS06 ASOS R504 R503 RS02 Aso R500 R499 ms R497 R496 Res R494 R493 R492 R490 R489 R488 R487 R486 R485 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 lt 4K70 4K70 lt 4K70 lt 4K70 lt 4K70 4K70 4K70
12. 94 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Power Tab Test Polling Values Tapping on this button allows you to test the suitability of the polling values you ve assigned before they are saved to memory 5 5 7 4 Power Tab 20d xl Info Channel Protocol Power Radio JY Enable Power Saving Idle Poll Limit Power OFF Time Figure 5 36 Power Tab Enable Power Saving When this parameter is checked o power saving is enabled Idle Poll Limit EL Note The Idle Poll Limit parameter is only used when Enable Power Sav ing is enabled N This parameter determines how many transmit opportunities base station polls with available response windows must be consecutively skipped before the 8525 places the radio into power down mode for power saving The allowable range for this parameter is from 1 to 200 The default value is 10 Lower values cause the vehicle mount to enter power saving mode qui extending battery life but reducing 8525 responsiveness Higher value responsiveness but decrease battery life c 18 Nov 2004 I d e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 95 Chapter 5 Configuration Radio Tab Power Off Time This parameter determines the amount of time in seconds the 8525 radio stays in power down mode when a power down period has been initiated Power Off Time is only used when the Enable Power Savin
13. Eis ER wiew Advance gt Fy i EI B o 2 5 Serial Cable USB Cable PTXWLAG on COM2 Start TekTerm Network Connections gt i bdl Figure 5 45 Creating A GPRS Connection 4 Inthe Make New Connection dialogue box choose Dial Up Connection Enter a name for your GPRS network connection File Edit View RAR aa x E Type a name for the connection a MAU Make New Seralc GPRS network Connection on CO Select the connection type Dial Up Connection Virtual Private Network PPTP O Direct Connection Q Virtual Private Network L2TP PPP over Ethernet PPPoE Start TekTerm J amp Network Connections Figure 5 46 Setting Up The Connection 104 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration The Bluetooth GPRS Phone 5 Tap on the Next gt button to display the Modem dialogue box ee El es A GPRS network Make New Serial Ca Connection on CON Select a modem Hayes Compatible on COM1 Haves Compatible on COM1 Hayes Compatible on COM2 Start TekTerm Jj Network Connections i r Figure 5 47 Setting Up The Modem 6 Inthe dropdown menu labelled Select a modem choose the name of the modem with which you want to connect and then choose the Configure button to display the Device Properties dialogue box The 8525 communicates with your phone and retrieves the parameters for the Device Properties di
14. e Use the stylus to tap on the Windows Start button in the taskbar to display the Start Menu Tap on Set t ings gt Control Panel e 18 Nov 2004 h D e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 63 The Control Panel folder contains icons used in the setup of your 8525 File View zl x Z CH H OD LA 9 sg amp FG Bluetooth Certificates Date Time Dialing Display Internet IPv6 Keyboard Device Options Support V e sh 3 2 I e Mouse Owner Password Power Regional SE Settings CH om amp Ae L Remove Storage System Teklogi Total Recall Volume amp ee fh er ede Stat Ir Control Panel B r ail E Figure 5 Control Panel 5 4 Control Panel Icons The Windows CE NET Control Panel provides a group of icons that allow you to customize and adjust settings on your 8525 AI Date Time Date Time Allows you to set the current Month Date Time and Time Zone on your unit A Display Changes the appearance window colour scheme on the unit desktop This Display applet can also be used to adjust the backlight level gt Keyboard Keyboard Toggles character repeat on and off and specifies delay and rate for repeated characters It also allows you to adjust the keyboard backlight threshold and intensity Additional tabs also allow the configuration of macros and scanner key remapping JO Volume amp Sound Volume amp Allows you to adjust the volume of th
15. Bluetooth Device Start TekTem ppcontolPanel Delay Properties Figure 5 3 Display Contrast Properties This option allows you to change the background colour or add an imag 68 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 5 Mouse Z KNone Tile image on background Remove Storage Stylus System Teklogix Total Recall Volume amp 18 Nov 2004 o e Chapter 5 Configuration Display Appearance 5 5 1 2 Display Appearance In the Display Properties dialogue box open the Appearance tab Display Properties o Background Appearance Backlight Bluetooth Device Mouse Remove Storage Stylus System o bional Active Window Item B Dialog Box Text Desktop y Teklogi Total Recall Volume amp TA ha yg yp A Stat fTekTerm 2 Control Panel 3 Display Properties X i PAUL Figure 5 4 Display Appearance Properties This dialogue box allows you to customize the display colour scheme 5 5 1 3 Display Backlight The backlight is activated for a configurable amount of time when the 8525 is in use key press scanner trigger or data received from the host The Display Properties dialogue box in the Control Panel allows you to specify the intensity of the backlight along with how long the display will maintain the specified intensity EL Note Keep in mind that this option m
16. CM A fF daan fe ILIO LER Tested By Phil Mantle Checked By Alex McKay eebe Se ee Ez Va ier o COS WE a E i i Report Copy No PDF01 Issue Date 05 November 2004 Test Dates 14 September 2004 This report is issued in Adobe Acrobat portable document format PDF It is only a valid copy of the report if it is being viewed in PDF format with the following security options not allowed Changing the document Selecting text and graphics Adding or changing notes and form fields Furthermore the date of creation must match the issue date stated above This report may be copied in full The results in this report apply only to the sample s tested VA 18 Nov 2004 RFI Global Services Ltd Pavilion A Ashwood Park Ashwood Way Basingstoke Hampshire RG23 8B Telephone 44 0 1256 312000 Facsimile 44 0 1256 312001 Email info rfi global com Website www rfi global com Registered in England and Wales Company number 2117901 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD TEST REPORT S No RFI EMCE1 RP46573JD02A Page 2 of 30 Issue Date 05 November 2004 Test Of Psion Teklogix Inc Vehicle Mount Terminal Model 8525 To 95 54 EC 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII This page has been left intentionally blank VA 18 Nov 2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD TEST REPORT S No RFI EMCE1 RP46573JD02A Page 3 of 30 Issue Date 05 November 2004 Test Of Psion Teklogix Inc Vehicle Mount Te
17. Figure 1 4 RA2020 Label EU PSION Teklogix Inc This product contains Cc N553 Psion Teklogix Model RA2020 FCC ID GM3RA2020M IC 2739D RA2020 TOSHIBA Model SD BT2 FCC ID CJ6MSDBO1 IC 248H MSDBO1 OFFICE USE Figure 1 5 RA2020 amp SD BT2 Label FCC IC Australia New Zealand PSION Teklogix Inc This product contains Psion Teklogix Model RA2020 amp ff 4 0681 n Figure 1 6 RA2020 amp SD BT2 Label EU 18 Nov 2004 A k n 4 0 10 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Regulatory Labels PSION Teklogix Inc Th s product contains TOSHIBA Model SD BT2 FCCID J6MSDBO1 1C 248H MSDBO1 C ose D FE CN553 OFFICE USE Figure 1 7 SD BT2 Label EU FCC IC Australia New Zealand C 18 Nov 2004 A S e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 11 c 18 Nov 2004 A k z d e Basic CHECKOUT 2 1 Preparing The 8525 For Operation llle 15 2 2 Powering Up The 8525 And Configuring The Radio 15 2 2 1 Switching The 8525 On 2 2 llle 15 2 2 2 Configuring An IEEE 802 11 Radio Installed In The 8525 15 2 2 3 Assigning An IP Address 21 2 2 4 Name Servers I ab ee ee 22 2 2 5 Advanced PEaTUTES i dos geet eee od ane Sa we ptg 23 2 2 5 1 Rearranging Preferred Networks 23 2 2 5 2 Deleting A Preferred Network 23 2 2 5 3 Changing Network Properties
18. Touchscreen passive stylus or finger operation signature capture Keyboards 3 integrated keyboard formats ABC 10 Function Keys Qwerty 10 Function Keys Azerty 10 Function Keys 68 key PC like format green EL backlight ergonomic dedicated function keys e Indicators and Controls internal 95 dBA beeper with volume control 4 indicators RX TX API SCAN PWR CHG RFID Applications for future release tethered readers writers Future addition e Internal Expansion Slots one SD I O Multimedia Card slot one Type II Compact Flash two Type II one Type III PCMCIA slot s long range 900 MHz PC card RFID reader writer multi protocol support C 18 Nov 2004 e 6 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Features easy access to slots via sealed end cap External Ports One Tether port with one RS232 serial port decoded scanner printer undecoded scanner port USB host port One Port with DB9 plug RS232 One Port with High density socket one RS222 serial comm port 1 USB device port 2 USB host ports e Power Management Internal power supply 10 90VDC designed for forklift power 12 6V Li Ion standard battery for brown out Advance Smart Battery Built in fast charger week real time clock backup SNMP MIB 2 support for future release Remote software download Remote WLAN managemen
19. field and type a Unicode value for the highlighted key KI Note To add a shifted state lt SHIFT gt and or lt CTRL gt tap the checkbox next to SHIFT Pressed and or CTRL Pressed to select V the shift state you want to assign Removing Unicode Values e Inthe Unicode Mapping tab highlight the item you want to delete and tap the stylus on the Remove button C 18 Nov 2004 x e 76 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Scancode Remapping 5 5 2 6 Scancode Remapping A scancode is a number that is associated with a physical key on a keyboard Every key has a unique scancode that is mapped to a virtual key a function or a macro Scancode Remapping allows you to change the functionality of any key on the keyboard A key can be remapped to send a virtual key e g VK F represents the F key V amp RETURN represents the lt ENTER ON gt key etc perform a function e g turn the scanner on change volume contrast etc or run a macro There are three different tables of scancode mappings the Normal table the Blue table and the Orange table The Normal table defines unmodified key presses the Blue table defines key presses that occur when the BLUE modifier is on the Orange table defines key presses that occur when the ORANGE modifier is on The default mappings of these scancodes can be overwritten for each of these three tables using the Scanc
20. mil 1 0 to 25in 2 5 to 64cm 20mil 1 0 to 35in 2 5 to 89 cm 55mil 6 0 to 60in 15 to 152 cm High Density decoded 3mil 10 to 2in 25to5 1 cm 4mil 1 0 to 3in en 5mil 0 8 to 3 8in 75mil 0 6 to 45 in 10mil 0 2 to 5 5 in 0 5 to 14 cm 25 minimum c 18 Nov 2004 65 D E 55 X o Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 249 Chapter 8 Specifications Internal Lithium lon Battery Ambient Light Immunity Electrical Operating voltage Operating current nominal Idling current low power mode Environmental Temperature Rating Humidity Shock at 23 C Vibration Water and Dust Decoding Capabilities Auto discriminates between Safety Regulatory Electrical Emissions Laser Classification 8 5 Internal Lithium lon Battery Not user accessible Technology Artificial light 1200 ft candles Sunlight 8000 ft candles 4 VDC to 14 VDC Undecoded 75 mA 5 VDC Decoded 100 mA 5 VDC lt 50 uA 5 VDC Operating 22 to 122 F 30 to 50 C Storage 40 to 158 F 40 to 70 C 5 to 95 NC Withstands multiple 6 foot drops to concrete Meets MIL STD 810E IEC529 rating IP54DW UPC A E EANS 13 JAN8 13 P2 P5 Code 128 EAN add ons Code 128 MSI Plessey Code 39 Interleaved 2 of 5 Code 39 Full Ascii Standard 2 of 5 Code 93 Codabar Complies to Gost R TUV UL cUL Complies to FCC A EN55022 B BCIQCNS13438 AS NZS3548 VCCI B CDRH Class 2 I
21. Conn Tab esp es e o moo OR ee 103 5 6 4 The Bluetooth GPRS Phone 103 3 7 Total Recall x 4 0 oem a Rm Ae Be ee See a Wo Sa 109 5 7 1 Creating A Backup Profile cells 109 5 7 2 Restoring A Profile s i lt s rec mre si creara k ve tms 112 3 8 IPVO SUDDORL a Ae eer paea EE n AE te E ere RE A a i ee 113 5 9 Scanner Properties Setup croco ere e e e 114 5 9 1 Scanner Options se se eam a ea ee 114 25 9 2 Bar Codes e s ra et ebb dome Ee e aiaa AE m odes 117 9 9 2 1 Code 39 Set ngs s sos o ew ew EE S 118 5 9 22 Code 128 Settings 120 3 9 2 3 BAN 13 Settings os eom o ES RR 121 59 2 44 BAN 8 s oo AU EU o Udo S E OX RR RR Rs 122 5 9 2 5 UPC And EAN Settings 123 5 9 2 6 UPCA Settings 2 2 llle 123 5 9 2 UPC B Settings a os ee ode be bot wee ew Ee 124 5 9 2 8 Codab i i eos boe exo Rm we 124 5 9 2 0 Code 03 o e u e udo eoo a Re Em RC e 124 592 10 Code bdo uis eo ah eae ni vere ee ED e 125 59 2 11 Interleaved20f3 saten ye e len 125 5 9 2 12 MSI Plessy s o o m o Rome E eoe 126 25 9 2 15 Discrete LOL e a mx a 126 5 9 2 14 IATA OFS uos oe Reb qox Es 127 5 9 3 Translations 127 C 18 Nov 2004 e 62 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Remote Desktop Connection 5 Remote Desktop Connection Remote Desktop Connection is an 8525 application used to connect to a Windows Terminal Server so that y
22. Q25 cid JTP676 eo AAA e 93037 AM e 2 1 MMBTA403LT TP355 100N R34 e i 115 13K0 tev 2 eat a Ben 4 2L sasaa 1 2 R20 e o LMC7215IM5 Y MBROS30T 1 80V 500MA 0 TP3S1 D2 2 NP A 0 063W S 94543 WER y MBRO530T V 30V_500MA 1 e o f e RTC SUPPLY 2 1 30V 500MA MBR0530T 1 Cii26 8000906 SS aE 10430 2 25V W c23 TP345 ran SS rau m asv 20 MBR0530T T 1 25V 1 30V 500MA e Ak CEP CR L25 97661 10U TP347 T TP342 5v aso 5V TETHER 20 BH SR 9000501 1 BSS84 T adt e e e e x y L e e e E o SLFGO2BT 100M1R3 FEET 1 cto 9003430 E a Xr os 088 2 10 97320 A 94543 100N u51 97862 C22 D39 cat iev 100K EM MBR0530T Nol E ee S 1 om 1 97764 2 ed 1 97764 R98 a 30V 500MA 15 S 0 063W 2 a Ww p Sech 9000585 100 er 100 97320 d A PN pre 4P7 120 bap 120 100K XE Se S 2 225P 2 av 2 25V 0 063W e e 5 un sw TP343 baid ZS 3 7j SHDN 1 3 TP348 end ii fe R38 S 97863 27 82K5 0 063W e H P 024 di Le 97634 FDV303N Me 25V 350MW e e 3 1 saw i EF y CONVERTER_ENABLE gt o pt 1 8 Now 2004 n 2 f gt C 43 A 1 ENRTURES Same Re6 Se RAWN Maa 97320 NGT 2003 PSION TEKLOGIX NI 0 063W KD L s A ANALOG MUX SUPPLY Gg 2 x d SCHEMATIC 5250 A BOARD GD MUX SUPPLY SUPEBCAP CHARGER ROJENE SR epes a 008014 E ECONS prer 2 FIN FE SHEET OF REL DATE 15 22 B c D
23. To lt MI2 gt These keys are displayed in blue print across the top row of alpha keys and the first two alpha keys in the second row on the keyboard To access a macro key press the lt BLUE gt key followed by the appropriate alpha key For example on a Qwerty keyboard e Press BLUE lt Q gt to access macro key M1 e To access M2 press BLUE lt W gt and so on 6 3 Changing The Screen Font Size To cycle through the available screen fonts e Press lt CTRL gt ALT lt F gt 6 4 Panning The Screen Contents If the content of a screen is too large to fit in the margins of the 8525 display the content can be panned or shifted to bring the information outside the margins into view Normally the Arrow keys move the cursor around the screen in the direction of the arrow pressed However if you lock the BLUE key on you can pan the entire contents of the screen H Panning relies on the values set in the Use Increment X Increment and Y Increment parameters to determine the number of columns spaces and rows lines the screen contents shift e In the More Parameters menu position the cursor on View Manager and press F1 e First enable the Use Increment parameter set it to Y X Increment determines the number of columns spaces the screen pans when the BLUE key is locked on and the LEFT or RIGHT arrow key is pressed e 18 N
24. button Figure 2 8 on page 22 is the window from which you choose the Configure button e Tap on the Name Servers tab E PTXWLAGS46B1 Settings IK IP Address Name Servers Make New S LIP Address Connection Name server addresses may be Primary DNS automatically assigned if DHCP is enabled on this adapter Secondary DNS You can specify additional WINS or DNS resolvers in the Primary WINS space provided Secondary WINS amp Stat TekTerm J amp Network Connections B 2 9 Name Servers Tab 22 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Advanced Features 2 2 5 Advanced Features To display the Advanced Wireless Settings dialogue box e Tap the Advanced button in the Wireless Information tab This window lists the available preferred networks Ele Edit View A Advanced Wireless Settings Qa E Ia m Y Use Windows to configure my wireless settings Make New Serial Cable Windows will connect to these preferred networks Connection on COM2 qwertyui Properties Le x Automatically connect to non preferred networks Networks to access all available Start TekTerm Network Connections PrxwLacsacBei i oa Figure 2 10 Advanced Settings 2 5 Rearranging Preferred Networks The 8525 attempts to connect with the networks listed in this dialogue box in sequence beginning at the top of the list If
25. eA 146 6 8 2 Sending Data To The Hoer 147 6 8 3 Psion Teklogix Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent Keys 147 6 8 4 Block Mode Local Editing sn 148 6 8 5 Working With Sessions aooaa 149 The Radio Statistics Screen oaoa a 150 6 9 1 802 10 Stats creen o a so cre cerana ria rart aa 151 6 9 2 Exiting The Radio Statistics Screen 152 The Tekterm Startup Display Menu 153 Working With Menus aaau aaa 153 6 11 1 Using The Touchscreen To Navigate Through Menus 154 6 11 2Using The Keyboard To Navigate Through Menus 6 11 3 Saving Changes To Parameters AE 6 11 4 Retrieving Default Parameter Values Ss Resetting The 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer The Parameters Menu E LO 6 13 1 Security Settings Display Options o ee aceae o o o e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Contents 6 15 More Parameters apical RR GU eG we ds 161 6 16 Radio Parameters 2 o e e 161 6 17 System Parameters ae sg ecoa en 163 6 17 1 Keyboard ec ge a PR ws 164 OU LZ ZAUGIG s or erreur de eom stes eite Sue are S 165 6 17 3 Power Mgmt Ctrl Panel 167 6 17 4 User Permissions 2 uds S Roe ts la 167 6 17 5 Alto Salle coria Sage V koX up udo a wa ae 168 6 18 Scanner Control Panel 168 6 19 View Manager s seen Be b e ex A Os 169 6 19 1 Split Scree s ko o RR OR YOUR REP weg 170 6 19 2 Custom Charac
26. menu e Type the letter a or e Tap the stylus on the Parameters item KI Note To return to the Display Menu press F2 the Previous key 6 11 Working With Menus The 8525 offers two ways to navigate menus and choose values you can eitl the keyboard or you can select items by tapping a stylus on the screen There are four types of parameters numeric Y N alpha and string entry MA menus have sub menus attached to them and others utilize a Control Panel dialogue box to make adjustments c 18 Nov 2004 D h a amp a o T Dean AY Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 153 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Using The Touchscreen To Navigate Through Menus Important Depending on the method you use when working with menus N review either Using The Touchscreen To Navigate Through Menus on page 154 or Using The Keyboard To Navigate Through Menus on page 155 6 11 1 Using The Touchscreen To Navigate Through Menus 6 11 1 1 Sub Menus The character appearing to the right of the menu item indicates that it has a sub menu Displaying Sub Menus To display a sub menu e Double tap the stylus on the menu item with the sub menu you want to display Returning To The Previous Menu e Ifthe softkey labels are visible at the bottom of the screen tap the stylus on the PREV previous softkey label e If the softkey labels are not visible you ll have to
27. 00 00 00 00 To change values e Press the UP or lt DOWN gt arrow key to highlight a function key e Press the TAB key to move through the string of values e Either type new values or press the LEFT or RIGHT arrow key to change the values 180 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual C 18 Nov 2004 x e Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Screen Arrow Key Remap In ANSI the arrow keys have a default string associated with them to move the cursor in the direction of the arrow The Arrow Key Remap table allows the arrow key character sequences to be redefined r 07 Arrow Key Remap Up Arrow 1B 5B 41 00 00 Down Arrow 1B 5B 42 00 00 Right Arrow 1B 5B 43 00 00 Left Arrow 1B 5B 44 00 00 To change arrow key values e Press the UP or DOWN arrow key to highlight an arrow key e Press the TAB key to move through the string of values e Either type new values or press the LEFT or RIGHT arrow key to change the values 6 20 1 2 Screen rF 05 Screen W Rangen of Pages 4 0 16 of Rows 24 4 60 of Cols 80 80 or 132 Default Font 16x30 see text 80 col Font 16x30 see text 132 col Font 16x30 see text Video see text Label F1 F10 see text Colour override N see text of Pages This parameter defines how many pages are acc
28. 13 14 15 16 GND Signal Ground USB HOST PORT 3 PLUS For connecting external devices such as keyboards mice printers USB HOST PORT 3 NEGATIVE For connecting external devices such as keyboards mice printers GND Signal Ground 17 CONSOLE RXD Console Port RS 232 Receive Data Internal us only 18 CONSOLE TXD Console Port RS 232 Transmit Data Internal use only 19 GND Signal Ground B 2 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Appendix B Port Pinouts DB 26 Auxiliary Port Pinout vi Signal And Description 20 CONSOLE TXD SEL Transmit data Select selects whether the PCON or PXA 255 CPU is sending data out the CONSOLE TXD pin Internal use only 2 MOTION DETECT Alternate input blanks the screen for the period that this pin is grounded usually implemented via extra wires in the Unit input Power cable 22 AUXILIARY ID External device Identity Input Pin 23 NO CONNECT 24 PCON PROGRAM Input used to program Peripheral Controller nternal use only 25 NO CONNECT 26 NO CONNECT Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual c 18 Nov 2004 E a e B 3 APPENDIX L USB SETUP APPLICATION C 1 USB Setup The USB Setup application PN 1000997 is used to update a Windows PC so that it can connect to a Psion Teklogix 8525 System Requireme
29. 18V NOM 40V 3A TRACEWIDTH 150 IMAX 6A TRACEWIDTH 150 TRACEWIDTH 150 A DOPO DC POWER IN e TRACE WIDTH 150 e Di oui 2 t i Py e EE 2 GND af 2 al is DC PWR IN Le FL3 1 3 F co aes 1 C36 3 D50 GND 9003428 Dc 9003433 9000550 GNU 4 e WY 10U ht 2U2 MMBZ52488LT1 9002936 TP752 2 80 20 MO sl am 1 18V 225MW FDS6675 GNU 5 e Aus 50V el AN 50V 30V 11A a 9000989 6A f s BAT POS CT e NFEGIPT222Z1E9 1 e e e 7 e TRACEWIDTH 100 SMBUS CLK F e TRACEWIDTH 100 ah oU VEA MANN gt BAT ID po e GND c37 C151 9 e C153 T 1 9003433 1 97371 SMBUS DATA 1 97371 2U2 100P TP131 10 100P 110 15 BAT NEG e 15 A 2 50 2 SV 2 5o 1 48045 1021 NA NA e 9002940 se7 w o BUS a R9 io 97331 301K 0 063W C149 TS 0154 oe u CHA TPAAT bk 97371 1 97371 HA TP749 15 d 15 L43 96350 200MA 1 x ST I s 2 sv rey OV o 85V e TRACEWIDTH 10 CYYY 1 2 26 SOL BLMIOA121SPT R132 I wy v R311 97248 TP445 97224 100R TP750 10RO 0 062W Lu 96350 200MA 1 EN e TRACEWIDTH 10 f x e 1 SS N BLM10A121SPT TP481 TP751 L42 96350 200MA 1 e TRACEWIDTH 10 e 1 2 12C_SDA s EXTERNAL POWER INRUSH LIMITER 97248 100R 0 063W EOS HEATER POWER X e e 1 C42 0470 E 5V SWITCHED 9003428 95621 SC 100 100N 2 80 20 120 HS 50v 50V e d l e 1 HEATER_POWER 2 HEATER_POWER a Sm TP509 EX 3 0060W ony 3V3_SWITCHED A an 2 4 Qu N TP513 TP512 e R387 1 93037 BEEPER TP507 e TP508 e eren 5 uto 1K00 e ud 1 E 5 NC7SPOBP5X d 0 063W 3
30. 2 50 TP INSTALLED 10 99 TPDN T 1 TP INSTALLED GND e TREO 108 ays eraNDEY UN 101 TP DIN So 104 103 TPDOUT e GND au e HEATER INSTALLED 108 105 TP_DOUT 8 HEATER INSTALLED TP DOUT 10 107 TP cs T e GND GND Trey DTB PU DRIM m 109 TP CS SE Ge NGC TPS 3 3 SWITCHED 112 111 TP817O TENSTALLE HEATER POWER 43 3 SWITCHED TP mo Uds e 114 119 TP mo HEATER POWER TP mo m 146 EE HEATER POWER GND e m 117 5 TP339 0 na ep BUS TP832 12 119 e GND GND e 7 HEATER POWER gt 7 C430 cast 956211 95621 C102 100N 100N 9003428 120 120 100 2 mz Su 2 80 20 EN o e Nez eg 18 Nay 2004 IGNATURES DATE Doux AUG 4 NGTT 2008 PSION TEKLOGIX IN si MISSISSAUGA ONTARIO PME ME SCHEMATIC 8525 30 MAIN BOARD SDIO DTBCONNEGTORS ROJENE NS ST z 008014 E Som prer FIRE SHEET OF REL DATE 12 22 B c D c D B VBAT_MAIN_IN gt TP201 1 RI7 2 1 SSES SES e TRACEWIDTH 150 e Ave TRACEWIDTH 150 e CHRG PWR IN Ke TP216 TP253 0R039 11 iw TRACEWIDTH 150 1 1 TRACEWIDTH 150 e
31. 3 3 2 5 5 3 5 4 5 3 3 5 4 2 4 2 2 CF_3V3EN CB wg CF SLOT q Au uez 8S8go utrgpsstrtttrge heeteotzrfzrff hg9s9gss ESESSLSRESESRe He SEER RES SREB Zee CF 5VEN 50 2 Z2 zox ZS SS SS z SS ES SS k SES SS SS EECHER B6l0_Y2 2 QFE 222 925722255 EECH EECH 25 mE 8 2 go ag Sd 40 g g00g0 4 e S 21 Bio voi D7 2 al S odor22yo2223o0o222722939222322 3022420 ege oogoc2ogBRsBQgaua oococbQgesooggoogQ B lO Y1 CB CBE 3 0 9zz amp S S S amp B s s B B s s RRA KRESS RARASRRESE SaaS AG HS H 38 r5 8 8 r5 d 9g 5 5 g 5 d 5g 3 9555525525838 w22 8 8 aaa 5 4 a a i aa a 2 aa a a ES 258 258 d i LOW ENERGY LATCH W22 poro w22 o t 3 3 d sl 7 S 9 a B lo W3 wat 8 9 9 Q a a 2 E a BL goo Wei 3 3 i a 2 Belo w2 W2 __ CB vspezi CF IN V Bao v2 Belo Wi V gs vat pen V4 Bolo ven pen V3 CF_STSCHG U boro u22 Belo v2 2 zs SE PCD HEI eau ue VREF pe vu CB RFU40 PC_IN e GF_PROY U 0 palo uzo B6lO U4 Nc PU gato ute B lo U2 zPOM STSCHG T Bolo 122 D6 Belo Ui PCM PCD T alo T i Belo T5 12 PCM IN PCM PRDY T20 eau an Belo T4 4 1 TP112 T Belo me B6lo_Ta_vREF 3 BD30 TI8 gs Tie Belo T2 2 TER PSKTSEL D I polo mei DS Belo Ti TP755 PREG BS oa pa vREF Belo RS Bees Nc DI palo mie pe R4 VREF DI a PCE2 Pat Uis 2 eau pai Belo R2 9003332 L TP738 PCEi al as pop XC28150 5 FG456 See n e PIOR 2 palo pio B
32. 3 7 1 Scanning Techniques 38 3 7 2 Scan LED Indicators 38 3 7 3 Troubleshooting co cone eses 39 3 7 4 Operating One Dimensional 1D Laser Scanners 39 3 8 Connecting Disconnecting Tethered Peripherals 40 3 9 Monitoring The Network Connection 40 3 10 Connecting An 85225 TOA PC crocs len 3 10 1 Using Microsoft ActiveSync To Work With Files A E 3 11 General Maintenance oaoa 3 11 1 Caring For The Touchscreen 3 11 2 Cleaning The 8525 us Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 25 c 18 Nov 2004 A k z d e Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 8525 Features Of The 8525 3 1 Features Of The 8525 Inside The Radio Dome SDIO MMC Slot for Bluetooth radio or additional storage memory PCMCIA slot supports 2 Type Il PCMCIA or 1 Type III PCMCIA card Compact Flash slot for 802 1 Ib radios or additional storage memory Radio Dome E elo TEKLOGIS i 2 Windows CE nst Figure 3 1 Front Of 8525 C 18 Nov 2004 x e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 27 Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 8525 The Internal Backup Battery Tether Port RS232 Serial Port Figure 3 2 Ports 3 1 The Internal Backup Battery The 8525 vehicle mount is equipped with an internal battery that will provide backup power to the unit for up to fifteen minutes of normal operation After 15 min
33. 3V3_STANDBY SS 16V i P6 V R50 9001855 97320 TSW 102 07 G S RA 100K ET iid 0 063W CONSOLE_TXD_SEL 1 MLB TEMPERATURE 11 3V3 STANDBY e e e e TP92 ato 1 2 d onm TP2i os gt 97320 WS 024 R19 Wd BSS84 d 100K Gen 97375 97316 e R238 w R223 R232 R236 9000501 Tas 0 063W ZC SON 1 1N0 68K1 97296 Hed 97296 97296 97296 50V 350MW e R5t y DEBUG ONLY Dm Jas 2 ES COFLEN gt TE 10 0 063W ZE lt 100 He 10K0 10K0 wen o 97320 WEE d 3 2 50V EDT TP 0063w 008 0 063W 0 063W 0 063W 97634 100K DO NOT POPULATE n i z i 4 1 TO on SE E H E FDV303N 0 063W n He d S id 25V_350MW E e qua RE Le 2 E HEP TP7S 97272 AUX ID du as es R192 3V3 STANDBY T SZ ky Re OPTIONS A D e J TP76 ch A LCD TYPE e e TP97 E C213 s Rad 1 9787 TETHER ID e e a feo 97320 100N 97453 VBAT MANN 100K 15 R226 BAT_SET e ORO u w R148 noom CL ey or We BATTERY_VOLTAGE one E amas y 0 063W 3K 1 T Bo 1 USED FOR E DN TPGR js i OPTION SELECTION E sl oe 4 1 2 e BATTERY VOLTAGE C218 C207 C208 C216 c26 E 2 4 S e Ww 1 97871 97871 1 97871 1 97871 1 97375 2 Va v 100N 100N 100N 100N 1NO m E Jr 8 um 15 BE BE 115 10 St SCH L 97866 2 o o iev o d6V 2 e 2 50V a e a Au LPV321M7 e POOR AVSS ej e e e A 3 AWN AUR d mee 100P 7 NGT TEAM 2003 PSION TERLOGIN IN 15 Noy Za 2 sov eege po mississauca CN B Te ME SCHEMATIC 8525 30 M1AIN BOARD PERIPHERAL CONTROLLER E K ROJENE SE z BATT_MONITOR 00014 E Som prer FIRE SR
34. 6 17 2 AU n 6 17 3 Power Mgmt Ctrl Panel 167 6 17 4 User Permissions bh D 18 N9v 2004 y 6173 Auto Start i ese eR Rk we de WR Ba ww de f 168 b 6 18 Scanner Control Panel EE pe dee E An Ya 168 e 6 19 View Manager o ee ee 130 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application 6 19 17 Split Sereen zoo 3 xo wx AE RR ox Reque Rue aus 170 6 19 1 1 Splitting And Displaying Screens Ls 170 6 19 1 2 Moving Between Split Screens sss 171 6 19 1 3 Toggling Between Full amp Split Screens 171 6 19 1 4 Using The Asterisk ASA Wild Card 172 6 19 2 Custom Characters UnicodeTM o 172 6 19 2 1 Creating A Unicode Character 172 6 19 2 2 Displaying The Unicode Pop up Window 173 6 20 Applications x29 x 69b Ree AA 175 6 20 1 ANSE Settings 4 25 Soe bea a OPS X9 Wo 4 408 es 176 6 20 11 Host Conn e ay SA gw SS A Ae a SS 177 620 1 2 Screens e svo koe Pee Ee de ee ee ew EO e 181 6 20 1 3 Xmit Modes i e skr a PRORA Eer 184 6 20 1 4 Kbd Modes 188 6 20 1 5 Edit Modes i ls do a RUE ee A 191 620 16 Serial s sow eee ye RR EU He b OE 192 6 20 17 Host Chat Set um s sos ok em p Soe hak emen 193 6 20 1 8 Anchor View llle 193 6 20 2 TESS Settings er y yp ey sede a ed e a 194 6 20 2 1 Host Coni EEN da o t y isa 195 0 2012 EE 196 6 20 2 3 Character
35. 6 20 1 ANSI Settings r 04 Ansi Rang Auto Term N see text Terminal 1 1 1024 Host Conn see text Screen see text Xmit Modes see text Kod Modes see text Edit Modes see text Serial see text Host Char Set see text Anchor View N see text Each session you create has its own Settings parameters Additional ANSI information is documented in ANSI Emulation on page 146 Auto Term L Note Refer to Group on page 177 for additional instructions C 18 Nov 2004 x e 176 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Host Conn When this parameter is set to Y a unique number is assigned for the current ANSI session If Auto Term is set to Y any value assigned to the Terminal parameter is ignored KI Note Auto Term is available when 802 10v2 is assigned to the Host Conn parameter or when 802 10v1 is enabled in the Radio Menu see 802 IQ v1 on page 162 Group Auto Term Range Group 1 1 5 When Auto Term is set to Y the Group parameter is used to identify the group or pool of numbers from which an auto address is chosen Terminal For every application session you create the Terminal assigned must be non zero and unique This parameter defines the number for the ANSI session and uniquely identifies all transmissions
36. A E a e 16 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Reverse 183 207 Underline 783 View IDs 170 viewport mapping 22 visible fields match 199 V Match Chr 199 volume adjusting 1766 VT220 Function keys equivalent Psion Teklogix keyboard Function keys 147 W Warm Reset Shutdown menu 58 warnings 114 warranty 4 wceusbsh inf installing C 4 wceusbsh inf updating C 2 WEC Write Error Code 2 4 Wi Fi Protected Access Pre Shared Key network authentication 79 Wi Fi Protected Access WPA network authentication 79 Windows Start Menu See Start Menu 50 Windows CE dialogue box 58 files folders amp programs working with 47 Windows CE navigating in 45 Windows Explorer 53 wireless connection setup 15 Wireless Information Tab 7 Wireless Properties tab 78 worldwide offices 4 WPA network authentication 19 WPA PSK network authentication 19 wrap auto 19 Wraparound 224 Write Error Code WEC 2 4 A xa transmitted acknowledgements 151 xi transmitted initialize messages 151 X Increment 769 xm transmitted messages 151 Xmit Count 785 Xmit Enter 90 Xmit key 186 Xmit Modes 184 188 Xmit Wait 85 x origin 793 209 Index xr retransmissions 152 Y Y N parameters enabling and disabling 154 156 Y Increment 7 69 y origin 93 209 1D internal scanner 38 132 col font 782 2392 Telnet See Emulation 2392 Telnet 209 32774 Telnet See Emulation 3274 Telnet 212
37. D v9 E M o Remove Storage System Teklogix Total Recall Volume amp EES ACI Ama 3 Figure 5 64 IPv6 Support Icon e Tap on the icon to display the IPv6 Support dialogue box File View 8 0 Bluetooth Certificates Datei IPv6 Keyboard Device Support Fy 3 9 Mouse Network and Owng Regional Remove n Ca Settings Programs Storage L4 amp Start TekTerm 2 Control Panel e IPv6 Suppor 5M iig SF Figure 5 65 IPv6 Support ab e Tapthe stylus on the checkbox next to Enable IPv6 Network Support to enable V this internet protocol Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 113 Chapter 5 Configuration Scanner Properties Setup 5 9 Scanner Properties Setup The Teklogix Scanners icon in the Control Panel provides dialogue boxes in which you can tailor bar code options and choose the bar codes your scanner will recognize File View cx n a g Q i a B gt D 9 R Bluetooth Certificates Date Time Dialing Display Internet IPv6 Keyboard Device Options Support e 9 i 5 2 G amp 9 Mouse Owner Password PC Power Regional Connection Settings M Y Jo Remove Storage System Teklogix g Total Recall Volume amp Stat TL Control Pane EC Y OTE Figure 5 66 Teklogix Scanners Icon 5 9 1 Scanner Options File View Scanner Properties OK E E x P 0 9 options Barcodes Translations M o E
38. HEEN VIE M hr 1 1 TP372 15 c2 97871 MEN 16V AN A Ip 100N 1 come e v c2 O 2 215 1 16V 1 e COM2 TXDATA e 9 Tout TUN 14 e Comp COM2 RXDATA e 4 ban hiour a e Cous RXD COM RTS e 10 TeOUT TaN 13 COM2 RTS COM CTS e 8 pen iQ RSOUT 15 COM2_CTS COM2 DTR e 11 TaouT TUN 12 COM2 DTR COM2 DCD 7 RAN RAOUT 16 e COM2 DCD CoMa DSR 6 Pan Raour i7 COM2 DSR 0 x e TP748 5 RAN R2OUT 18 se R2OUTB 20 e COM2 EN a R202 m 97296 FRC OFF 10K0 0 069W 2i o 28 ds INVALID FRC ON is Ion 25 R00 S7 ND 97296 10K0 E 0 063W TP380 E E x 1 e e cOM2 AUTO ONLINE ok TP409 1A CONT 98152 sv ae 352 MAX TPS2023D d 1A5 5V e gt 1 os COM2_EXT_SW_5V S 8 oun ini 2 C428 vi e e e e e i 9 snos Se 25V 350MW Ta e gt jo wl 3 100N le e 3 C464 R52 Cam 4 Cou 1 15 e 771 1 97372 97320 97871 9003431 e jours dV 2 gee ec y 10N 100K 100N 22U Ss nba 2 1 15 57 0063w um 2 110 2 2 e ee EN_COM2_PWR 16V DCH tov CONTROL wy 5 4 R614 a NC SES CEN D e 97296 R60 7 ww SC 10K0 97320 d 0 063W 100K 1 E 0 063W END Tp an R616 Ka 97272 2 1K00 a77 y 0 063W 97634 sae ED FDV303N moet 3 EESTI Pp TP153 e Tha e CN LA lt LOW ENERGY LATCH ai 7 COREVDD EN 3V3 STANDBY SA2_RESET R123 al 97320 100K 0 063W C324 D12 s E T r sn 92642 3 Di e TP471 100N Ken MMBD914 TP487 TP476 FGON CONSOLE 35 up 2 3 iw Ta NC7SZ157P6X IN ESMA C 2 iev 16v 1 9000494 oa o e um 57
39. Java Visual C Standard Protocol APIs Windows Sockets WinCE WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS IEEE 802 1 Ib 11 Mbps 2 4GHz Compact Flash radio external and internal antenna IEEE 802 1 Ib g 54Mbps 2 4 GHz CF radio future IEEE 802 1 Ib g 54Mbps 2 4GHz PC card radio future e IEEE 802 1 la b g 54Mbps 2 4GHz PC card radio future Standard antenna integrated onto radio card Next Gen Narrowband 400 500MHz radio future Bluetooth SDIO radio 5m range WIDE AREA APPLICATIONS GSM GPRS PC Card radio future CDMA future APPLICATION SOFTWARE Internet Explorer 6 for CE Open TekTerm ANSI TESS terminal emulations IBM 3270 IBM 5250 HP 2392 USER INTERFACE Colour Display 8525 1 2 VGA 640x240 8 8 e Transmissive TFT industrial for both indoor sunlight readability Embedded Memory Display contoller resolution 6bpp e CCFL Backlight 220 cd m backlight with brightness control Touchscreen Passive stylus or finger operation Rugged 5 wire technology Enhanced anti glare coating Keyboards 3 integrated keyboard formats available ABC 10 F keys Qwerty 10 F keys Azerty 10 F keys 68 key PC like format Blue Green EL backlight Ergonomic Dedicated function keys Epoxy coated elastomeric Indicators amp Controls nternal 95 dBA beeper w volume control 4 indicators RX TX API SCAN PWR CHG RFID APPLICATIONS FUTURE Long r
40. Password Echo ANSI Telnet Settings 180 Password Prompt ANSI Telnet Settings E CA period ASCII decimal equivalent 200 peripherals defining connections 7 PIN Bluetooth Controls 98 18 Nov 2004 pinouts B 1 PINs Bluetooth devices 100 a pins enabling for printing 20 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual pivot viewport 227 pocket PC compatibility 63 Port ANSI Telnet Settings 178 Port TESS Connection Type 195 Port 802 IQ v2 227 port pinouts B Port Prefix Bluetooth Controls 02 ports ANSI Connection Type 178 Baud 2 9 Buffer 220 Data Bits 219 Flow Control 2 9 Input tmo 220 Output tmo 220 parameters 27 8 Parity 2 9 Retries 220 serial 203 Serial In Out 203 settings 217 settings tether amp console port 2 7 settings for Tether and console 2 8 Stop Bits 2 9 TESS Connection Type 195 Test 220 Tether and Console Port settings 2 7 port settings tether amp console 277 220 position of screen 196 power icon AC 36 Power Management Properties 80 suspend power saving 81 Power Mgmt 167 power up 8525 15 preferred networks 23 prefix serial I O 204 Prefix Char 7 8 121 PREVIOUS key F2 134 PREV key F2 154 155 Printer serial service Bluetooth 99 printing Binary print parameter 201 pages 144 Printer parameter 201 PrintScreen key 790 procedures local 207 process local 145 201 profile creating backup 708 Index profile restoring backup 111
41. Programs Command Prompt 53 Internet Explorer 53 Remote Desktop Connection 53 Windows Explorer 53 protocol 802 1Q v1 762 Protocol Type 763 punctuation marks accessing SHIFT Key 30 Q memory address of first message in receive queue 752 queue memory address of first message in receive queue Q 752 queue transmissions waiting in TxQ 152 queuing enabling disabling next message 202 mode 746 201 pages 146 Queuing parameter 145 201 response time improving 146 R ra received acknowledgements 151 radio adding new network connection 78 advanced settings of 23 Auto Radio Addr narrow band radio 227 Bluetooth 97 102 configuring 5 adding a new network connection 18 Ad Hoc 18 authentication network 9 Connect button 17 EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol 20 Infrastructure 18 Key Index 20 KE Key Index assigning 20 VA network authentication 19 Network Key 2 Network Key assi Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 11 Index Connect button 77 Initial RTT WaveLAN 802 11 DS SS 163 228 IP address assigning 2 name servers 22 preferred networks arranging 23 Protocol Type 763 Radio Address narrow band radio 228 Radio Address WaveLAN 802 11 DS SS 162 signal quality 36 statistics screen 802 1Q 150 wireless connection setting up 15 802 IQ statistics screen 750 Radio Addr Auto Radio Addr narrow band radio 227 Radio Address 762 228 narrow band radio 228 WaveLAN 80
42. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 43 c 18 Nov 2004 A k z d e Working WITH WINDOW CE NET A 4 1 Navigating In Windows CE NET And Applications 45 4 1 1 Navigating Using A Touchscreen And Stylus 45 4 1 2 Navigating Using The Keyboard 0 46 4 2 Working With Files Folders And Programs 47 4 3 The Startup Desktop ee 47 4 3 1 The Desktop Icons 02 02 0000 48 4 3 2 The Taskbar cc 2 4 929 69 RR RR em m ee e 48 4 3 2 1 UsingTheTaskbar e 49 4 3 2 2 Customizing The Taskbar 49 44 The Start Men us a a R eR Eo ee E A 50 4 4 1 TheDesktop Rs 50 44 2 Security Levels le 51 Th System Trays oo 22 4 Re Ee rp S xx ESE ex E 55 The Task Manager rs 56 Cycle Tasks 2o os ed eee om RU E Rd A 55 4 44 3 Progr mS 2 loo o o EEE He om m dS RR Rs 53 AAD e CEET 56 44 6 Run wh eee ee de eee eR See ee a URN RS 57 4 4 7 Shutdowt 4 24 5 408554 488 04 5 Be BAe Ae Rae KR 57 4 5 Using A Dialogue Box 58 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 43 c 18 Nov 2004 A k z d e Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE NET Navigating In Windows CE NET And Applications 4 Navigating In Windows CE NET And Applications Graphic user interfaces like Windows CE NET for portable devices and desktop Windows 2000 XP etc utilize point and click navig
43. Serial In Out 203 transmitting from the terminal 190 207 transmitting from the 8525 139 185 Data Bits 219 data stream type typ 52 DEC Cursor Keys ANSI Keyboard parameter 9 decimal values of keys 200 decoding bar codes decodes required 116 Security 116 decrementing parameters 154 156 Default Colour 175 Default font 782 208 DEFAULT key F3 134 DEFLT key F3 759 DEL CLR key Local Echo mode ANSI 89 DEL Key 3 DEL key DEL key ANSI 189 desktop connection remote 63 Dev Attr 185 device attribute requests 747 device attribute string 755 Device Name changing 02 dialogue box using 56 digit check digit 120 123 124 125 number system 122 123 Dim For backlight 70 Disable kbd 190 disabling enabling Y N parameters 154 156 disconnecting ESC Prompt ANSI Telnet Settings 179 Discrete 2 0f 5 125 Disp controls 792 display Anchor Column 222 Anchor Line 222 Anchor View 7 93 209 appearance colour scheme 69 background control panel 68 backlight 69 Index Brightness 224 Display Properties 68 Display Shift 169 Field Scroll 196 ICH DCH controls 797 Line Scrolling 224 moving 169 Origin Scroll 196 Panning 224 positioning 196 split screens 170 Use Increment 769 video attributes 183 207 viewport mapping 227 Wraparound 224 X Increment 69 Y Increment 769 displaying TESS version number 143 Display Menu selecting a TESS session 138 Display menu 153 Display Properties 68 Display Shift 769 Dot Time 5
44. can choose Both to enable both of these options The function of each mode is as follows c 18 Nov 2004 h X Y amp Enable Used to input and output data Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 219 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Tether Serial And Console Port Parameter Settings Supports XON XOFF or no handshaking Print Used to output data only All input characters except XON and XOFF are ignored Supports XON XOFF or no handshaking Output Used to output data only All input characters are ignored Supports no handshaking KI Note To enable the input and or output serial in and or serial out must be enabled in the TESS menu Buffer The value assigned to this parameter determines the size of the serial buffer used by the application for both input and output The buffer controls the amount of data the application can send to or receive from a serial device Retries This parameter determines the number of times the 8525 attempts to transmit a byte from the serial port If the count specified in this parameter is exceeded the transmission fails Input Tmo This parameter sets the time in tenths of a second that the 8525 waits before passing received data to the TESS or ANSI tasks Output Tmo The value assigned at this parameter determines the maximum number of milliseconds that the application will wait for a write sent to the port to succeed before
45. characters that are accessible system wide refer to Unicode Mapping on page 75 The Custom Characters parameter allows you to create Unicode characters not available directly from the keyboard including accented characters Unicode is a trademark of The Unicode Consortium You can create up to 20 Unicode characters that will be stored in a pop up menu accessible from any application 6 19 2 1 Creating A Unicode Character AN Note You can create a Unicode character by pressing and holding YV A 172 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual the ALT while typing the decimal value that represents the Unicode character you want to use However you will need to press retype the decimal value each time you want to use the specic character L T8 Nov 2004 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Displaying The Unicode Pop up Window The advantage to creating special characters using the Custom Chars parameters is that the characters you create in the customer characters table are saved in a pop up window that is accessible from any application e Inthe Parameters menu highlight View Manager and press F1 e Highlight Custom Chars and press F1 to display the custom characters table m 04 Custom Chars 4 Font Small U 0000 U 0000 Position the cursor on Font at the top of the table e Press the LEFT or RIGHT arrow keys until
46. d c or pulled p e Ensure the vehicle body and underlying wiring is not damag d w ing mounting holes Use grommets to protect cables that pass through metal D Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 237 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories 8525 Installation in High Voltage Vehicles e Keep the cables away from heat sources grease battery acid and other potential hazards e Keep the cables away from control pedals and other moving parts that may pull on the cables or interfere with the operation of the vehicle e Leave enough slack on the cables so that the computer can be removed easily for maintenance KI Note Make sure the cables run inside the roll cage of the vehicle 1 4 5 8525 Installation in High Voltage Vehicles Warning Voltages exceeding 60VDC are considered hazardous For 8525 installations on vehicles with batteries above this voltage ensure the 8525 power connector is mounted in a secure location out of the vehicle operator s reach Due to the hazardous voltages present on these vehicles it is necessary to ensure that the unit s power supply cable connector is not accessible to the vehicle operator and is not exposed to water or other liquids To accomplish this e Ensure the power connector is installed in a dry location on the vehicle away from the vehicle operator s reach perhaps under a vehicle dash or in a sealed housing e Cover the power conn
47. e F8 ipo Nc Fi P D 31 0 E9 D7 F5 Do7 vz a NC FS pow El uvam Dag D8 __D6 Droe Nc re FS E Dous ES Iron pas pg Da Dawo EB nom pas pg Ds wn P C8 Dao C8 D E6 a Dos C aa pas 38 v_CFG NC Gi A28 e eao pas O9 Do ge Aca G7 gag pag Cs o zx Nc es G5 A24 G8 gni po BB D e e A24 G8 a bopl Be De e SC la A we 5 B9 pm C200 C201 C202 B9 D C197 C198 C199 Di Gio Dat 1 97871 1 97871 1 97372 pat 1 97871 1 97871 1 97372 NC_A2 NC_G10 A22 Gt A8 De 100N 100N 10N A22 e A8 pm 100N 100N 10N ES u SEU Weem 115 415 15 o hiii pao 3 215 15 15 NGA NCL A21 el 2 tev 2 e 2 tev A21 Ga Ai 2 iev 2 os e AB ac iS Seele A20 H9 ug AP VDD A9 e e A20 H9 Jato AP VDD A9 A9 e 9 NC Ag wua 3 Am G3 jms vpp_E7 ms G3 ag vop er E7 A we an nota H Am HI tag vo Je 2 w me HU as vob Je 2 D wen nots D A H2 a7 vopa A7 AZ ava A H2 a7 voba A7 AZ au P Nc go nots 8 Am Has vopo gs 83 Am H3 As vopa gs 8 P Nc gs wu H AS 22 as vopo cz e ms Zas vbbo c7 7 e e e B NC Ba ncs H Au 33 D3 C185 C188 C189 C190 A 33 D3 c19 C192 C193 C194 ES Lo M vouas 97871 1 97871 1 97871 1 97372 t VODRUDS 1 een 1 97871 1 97871 1 97372 NC B5 Wi Am 37 100N 100N 100N 10N Am 37 100N 100N 100N 10N B6 Lio A 115 115 115 15 215 15 15 15 NC_B6 Wl A12 JB lao ean LM tev 2 ms e 2 e M2 Cam TAPRE 2 iev 2 iv zl we 2 e BP a as wem LN AN DR ay vss Es 3 e e e mi HB ay vss Ea E3 e e e B5 Nc pg NC_M2 M2 Au H7 Jan vss A LA
48. only unguarded data is transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or serial ports When enabled set to Y both guarded and unguarded data can be transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or serial ports MATM When the Multiple Area Transfer Mode MATM parameter is disabled set to N only the selected area containing the cursor can be transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or serial ports When enabled set to Y all selected areas can be transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or serial ports This mode is significant only if the Selected Area Transfer Mode SATM is disabled SATM When the Selected Area Transfer Mode SATM parameter is disabled set to N the selected areas defined by SSA ESA and DAQ can be transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or serial ports When enabled set to Y the full contents of the buffer can be transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or serial ports TIM When the Transfer Termination Mode TTM parameter is disabled set to N the cursor position determines the end of the string that can be transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or serial ports When enabled set to Y the cursor position is ignored EOL chars Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 187 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Kbd Modes EOB chars This string entry parame
49. refer to the 9400 and 9450 Network Controllers User Manual and or the 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 04 802 10 v2 Range Port 8888 see text More Parameters see text Port Port specifies the UDP port used by 802IQ v2 The default value is 8888 Keep in mind that the value assigned here must match the value set at the network controller KI Note When using 802 10 v2 make certain that the 8525 Net Mask matches the network controller net mask More Parameters N Important The 802 10 radio items listed in this menu are only available to Psion Teklogix personnel r 05 802 10 v2 Parameters Range Auto Radio Addr Y Y N Radio Address 0 1 to 3840 Initial RTT 100 500 5000 Auto Radio Addr VA If this parameter is set to Y the 8525 requests an automatically assigned radio address c 18 Nov 2004 k KI Note f Auto Radio Addr is enabled set to Y any value signed to the Pj Radio Address parameter is ignored Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 227 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application 802 IQ v2 Radio Address AN Important Radio Address only takes effect when Cellular is enabled set to Y The value entered in the Radio address parameter is used to identify the 8525 vehicle mount over the radio link A unique value from 1 to 3840 must be a
50. urn aids TE E AE 1 z CB PAR gt 305 BigicpAR Auer Aia 2 S241 INED a NN CB VCC FLI2 CB BLOCK gt 105 Bag CBLOCK A mapo Alg 90 SAT E 000909 Tia m 5 8 a sa Ad 13PT222Z1E9 CB PERR gt Bi4 CPERR d E apoa Al J ARA OY 3 107 js ro 3 32 S2 A20 6 on e e e e e CB STOP gt earcsro E y A4S PC A20 H J GND uu owe E 9 GND as ____ oro R218 c80 1 0230 1 973721 om 109 js P 34 S 0 063W e 3 9003429 97871 10N 97871 7C8 GNT 2 HISCONT AIBPO WE S2 WE SIGNAL NAMES AS PER PC CARD STANDARD RELEASE 8 0 CF vcc Set d add SU dau TER cto St esp CB DEVSEL gt 310 Bs0 CDEVSEL asopo An S2 A J RFU RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE 1 2 8 8 ae SH A m 36 R219 ag lt CB_INT e B16 CINT A16 PC_READY_ IREQ S2 RDY 97453 ORO CF vcc 9000989 e e e e 12 a7 i A 7 57 7 B7 B51 Aer Au A51 UPC Wen aus RECH 1 Ss gu 1 cm e 35 Bt Bst awer Au A51 are ven E 1 2 97871 7871 IN out EE IRR 9003429 e ES 2 1 aub ZI sigs EIA 100 PLACE CAPACITORS NEAR CARDBUS CONNECTOR B18_B52VPPNVCORE A18_ASQ PC_VPP1 id Pd Sie 2 80 20 Kal VE 16V Jo CB CLK 15 Bigiccik Auger Ae eme 9000989 3 NEF13PT222Z1E9 N7E50 A516HG 50 m Ep d Bi 9000967 CB TRDY gt B53 CTRDY asapo A22 1 cei Kl i v AAA 117 we 62 A15 9003429 10N 97871 100N OUT IN 28 1 CB IRDY gt B20 CIRDY apo ais 828 0 10U 15 100N M lt CF_CD1 cD1 GND1 xd ST Seef 1 115 GND s2 D11 27 2 S2 03 e owns onas 7 UP qv devo b p
51. za SS B7IO C1 E H B o d oococoococococooccocooccooccooccooccoocoktko hogcooooccooccoococooccoocococooococooso 22R1 Fack B22L pop cok S R 4 e 8 Soa Sa ee ee Se ee ee Se Se Se ee Se ee Se eS FJR 2 S 8g S 3 m oS QS 5 w BB Ss Se Ss DB m5 NO mu B7IO Bi 1 0 063W FB8PRBSsz8 BSS B B 5 n B B 5 B amp 5 5 b B 5 b B 5 B b B 5 B B 5 5 b B 8 8 8 5 8 8 5 5 8 8 5 5 8 8 88288828 8828888 8 8 BB i cia el socua R417 97282 SS a dad sl ad d g S al ad o el o l n o af af ef of of dad ad o o x sf ef ef ef ol ad al al al of of Hf e e o o e a al al al 2 g al al als zm gl sl el aas a al al g a z a a 3 38 8 E 5 x l 5 z m a B x 5 B a x 5 5 S l E 5 B amp 5s BS S mo B m z x 5S 5 5 x a 2 S d 8 2 3 8 8 a amp 5 l 5 8 8 EE VA 22R1 1 0083W R240 5 97296 o 9 9 99 9 9 9 9 9 CB 3V3EN am g o 2 2 22 g 2 2 2 2 4 mum 0 063W lt 2 e e x al al a Si al als al al al el al s 2 n ol oz ol al e Se E aas e S gail sl of ol ad a a 225 885 g s x aa a 2 HEBES e Sa sl e al al d ab o 2 8 5 8 SIE 332232329322 z 28 al a a S S 8 al a I B B B8 B8 6 B B8B 888 88238 Bas GER 5358 28288 23828228 2 22882832 288 228 22268 DEE Bees dec 18 Nov 2004 Ee cB CD2 004 CB ven IGNATURES DATE RAWN AUG 4 cB vsz NGT TEA 2003 PSION TEKLOGIX IN BA 25 0 ms Gen MISSISSAUGA ONTARIO PAYO mE PS CB_STSCHG SCHEMATIC 8525 8530 MAIN GIC BOARD
52. 3 1 HICOREVDD EN e H fee alo d Ee S DE 2 20 om N 2 JP COREVDD EN e E S SE RESET 22 TP306 7 100N se 115 2 D W e ET 5 me RS 2 9003432 cll27 1 TS T 1 8 N OV 2 004 4U7 97871 Se o PXA255 1 1V 1 3V 0 063W 7 AUG 4 054 n 110 100N H OF s MICS11TU 1 e a xe e CORE VDD R_SETI R_SET2 SA2 CLOCK Gecke sl DATE vec n T auga y 14V 26k7 200MHz 5 x Tav 16k0 400MHz NGT 2003 PSION TEKLOGIX N men LE a MISSISSAUGA ONT sere neger EE RST PCON d D PCON PGRM en R625 SCHEMATIC 8525 30 MAIN LOGI BOARD C1128 97320 DC DGC NVE e i CPU CORE SUPPLY Ma 100N A SC ROJENE E p z 115 Han ED Kai 37 ki ECONS prer FIM FE SHEET OF we REL DATE 14 22 c D B sv TP155 gt 2 D16 1 94543 MBROS30T Ve TES 30V_500MA 5V_STANDBY SYS_PWRIN gt e MICS236 5BMM gt C29 a Ret 9002955 1 1f 9764 SN vn 100K n A TRACEWIDTH 30 x E mm VIN vout e e e au STANDBY 2 25V im eva 08m GND5 ERRO WE GE 2 16v GND7 GND8 wy K 11 0 063W 1M00 97872 R24 2 1 sv sv 1 C413 E 97871 d Rat 100N 100R 15 92984 Tess 16V 2 2 250MW n S 5 oo6sw de 16K2 N87 WE s TP354 11 TP352 1 kW 0 063W 3V3 STANDBY 2 T 1K00 2 2 e 2N 4 i 97272 1 i e vo R319 C
53. 4 USB SDIO CONTROLLER were AL Psion TexLoanyf ua MISSISSAUGA ONTARIO PD ME SCHEMATIC gece zg ua BOARD USB SDID CONTROLLER ROJENE SE z 008014 E Som prer FIRE SHEET OF REL DATE 9 21 B c D c D B TP335 ava e 1 2 e SS CLK 48MHZ R590 R606 97296 97453 10K0 ORO 0 063W 0 063W E E 2 TP3 JI T SS CK PWREN gt FT s J v e e e e TP676 M TP677 095 1 C450 1 C356 C137 ava E Geen 9000501 97871 97372 97371 ae E ee esses 100N 10N 100P e 2 5 2 25 15 e e tev 16V 50v 1 Cast 2 2 E 97871 R607 Re2 R610 e 100N P 97453 97453 97453 e e 2 118 oro ORO oro 0365 1 cen 16V 0 063W 0 063W 0 063W 9000585 9000585 P 15 000 a5 4P7 Ve 4P7 A o op 9001865 2 25P 5 vec 50V MK1714 01RI 50v d Nez CLK 48MHZ gt z e x x H d e 3 voor og He TP334 GND IR e 4 voz di use j REF NC E 9000515 XSEL ap NC7SZ125P5X D I e A z e o e so 15 WwW Mg NG Nc R611 97453 9 ORO Es 0 063W e e D ss GND1 7 um TP333 5 ai an 5 a 12 13 TP678 e LEE GND3 J SS_PWR_DWN e e ep cw I 2 2 a R608 nem RAS 1 Cam R603 97453 97453 gt 97458 97372 97296 EA ORO ORO ono 10N 10K0 0 063W 0 063W 0 063W 2 35 0 063W 1 a5 a5 0000 15 16V an e e SPREAD SPECTRUM CLOCK GENERATOR VA 18 Nay2004 IGNATURES DATE Bn AUG 4 a NGT TEAM
54. 4K70 4K70 4K70 lt 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 lt 4K70 4K70 lt 4K70 lt 4K70 lt 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97208 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 eau eau eau 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW eau 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW eau 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 6aMW G3MW 6aMW G3MW 63MW 6aMW 63MW 63MW 63MW G3MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW e 63MW am 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e SA e e 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Ra27 R926 R325 R324 R580 L R579 L R578 RS74 RS73 L R572 RS7 R570 _ R569 _ R568 R567 _ R566 _ R565 R564 R563 L R562 pen R560 ASSO R558 R557 R556 L Ass L R554 L R553 R552 RSS L ASSO L R549 L mum R54
55. 5 6 CONSOLE TXD SEL 49 9000933 mae Neg SEL e ee 37 SP3223EEY A g E SA2 TXD e SSES 100N us e v vcc PN E eee Ke al aLe PCON_CONSOLE_TXD 97871 1 100N 1 115 ec 4 eno 2 16V TP468 gt 1 gt C328 TP469 5 97871 e iev 2 eB CONSOLE PORT RS 232 ru 2 7 6 16V e Ke ex gt 3V3 STANDBY 8 mom TAN 12 e Seen 9 R2N ROUT 10 1 TP475 E CONSOLE s dE T a TP484 1 0 063W Jens CONSOLE TXDATA 17 nout TIN 13 e vid a bi CONSOLE RXDATA 16 RUN mom 15 CONSOLE RXD e TP492 m 1 eg Sie suuTDOWN 5 2 o o COMS 1 EN C108 1 97371 TP468 MA nus zontines 14 al R301 a 97371 100P 97296 aus STANDBY 100P 15 H 10K0 15 2 50V RX ENABLE 0063W 2 58V TP491 E R303 Auto Online Populate R304 Otherwise populate R303 GND 5 97296 10K0 TP490 E m 1 7 0 063W SE H 0 V 1 A R302 y 97296 e IGNATURES DATE 10K0 al R304 RAWN aua E Te NGT TEAI 2003 PSION TEKLOGIXAN u Era um MISSISSAUGA ONTARIO L PME ME SCHEMATIC 8525 90 MAI IC BOARD E x CONSOLE amp C ORT ROJENE SE a 008014 E Som prer FIRE SHEET OF REL DATE 18 22 c D c D B 9000989 GA NFEGIPT222Z1E9 Lin ou 2 HEATER POWER GND P ED TP128 TP167 TP127 D13 TP753 9000908 S E 1 97648 E Ja NFE31PT222Z1E9 TRACEWIDTH 150 MBRS340T3
56. 5250 emulation keys 139 5250 Telnet See Emulation 5250 Telnet 214 7 bit parameter 186 80 col font 782 802 IQ connection ANSI 177 802 IQ connection TESS 195 802 IQ v1 protocol Auto Radio Addr 762 802 1Q v2 227 802 1X authentication enabling 20 802 11b radio configuring 5 8525 approvals 244 off line 145 specifications 243 9010t connection TESS 195 C 18 Nov 2004 x e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 17 PIs i 0IN TEKLOGIX Specification Mississauga Ontario Canada DESCRIPTION DOCUMENT MANUFACTURE LABEL 8525 ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION All Text O Arial Bold THIS DRAWING IS NOT TO SCALE 4pts Kli TEKLOGIX SE Ontario Canada GR E Sh IIS 10 90 V KXXXXXXx 12345678 Mfg date MA Made in Canada toi Jus 2004 2004 VCA Approval No NOTES Psion Teklogix logo to be in accordance with company standards Code 128 barcode contains the product serial number a Serial number to be human readable Two Dimensional Datamatrix Barcode product specific data Artwork is black on white label stock See document 1010063 for generation of bar code data 6 Preferred label fabrication Ink Ribbon Advanced Bar Code Solutions p n Z1A060500 required for printing on Zebra 96XiIII Plus printer minimum 600 dpi resolution required m or REES VKO ESTA X ec Me DOC MFG LABEL SPEC 8525 ENGINEERINGONLY PROJ ENG ENGINEERING RES SPECIFIC
57. 97303 9000533 1 9001581 1 9000520 1 9000520 gt o Em E m MBRS140T3 10 20K0 63K4 33P 22U 22U E e M 5 ves SR c SE cH m DES Gum e e o a 2 e e e e e 46 aig FDS6961A oe Size 1 Sootses SENSE2 12 EC Haat TP288 TP289 TP290 97372 560P 560P 16 c 11 SENSE2 ROUTE AS CRITICAL SIGNAL PAIR 10N 15 15 16 SENSES 1 15 4 2 50 1 2 50v Ki D wm vosense2 2 e e e e cu m m TRACEWIDTH 80 POWER GROUND NET 97375 R284 C94 Ris9 C95 ew R37 Nos PONG e 1NO 97296 1 97371 97303 1 97371 9000587 R161 C73 tl0 10K0 100P 20K0 100P 29K4 SE 97303 1 97370 50v oosw 15 0 063w 15 0 063W 20K0 18P E 2 50 E 2 50V E 0 063W 15 M kb ED 2 50 SIGNAL GROUND NET WIDTH 20 ROUTE AS CRITICAL TRACE NOT TO PLANE SINGLE PLANE NODE i e e e e e e e e e E TPLNK4 sv TP315 TPHA 5V_SWITCHED 3V3_SWITCHED No 1 TRACEWIDTH 80 ese H e e mu SWITCHED y d TT a a Ke ava TRACEWIDTH 80 Ree C302 R90 e 97320 lt S787 1 97320 lt i aro e e e SYS SWITGHED ava 400K oe 100N 100K NY 97699 2 ces 2 c 0 063W essed 115 0 063w FDC658P 9003432 9003432 H 9000501 tev 2 s 7 30V 4A 4U7 4U7 50V_350MW 069 al RS RB 110 110 Se 97633 97272 97272 1ev 1ev 1 D30 FDC658P 1K00 em tha 94543 30V 4A oo6sw oo6sw R37 a R376 MBR0530T e E H H 97272 97272 So wy 124 2 30V 500MA CORE VD 20 1K00 1K00 97661 e e e e Tees Sesa 0 063W 0063W uss TP309 100 FDV309N ED E a
58. 99 At this point you can either query for services or set the PIN for each device Once you highlight a device in the list box both the Services and Set PIN buttons become available Services A discovered device may display several service profiles that it can use to communicate and you will want to activate the type you need Supported profiles that can be activated include DUN Dial Up Networking service Printer serial service and LANPPP LANAccessUsingPPP service ASync ActiveSync is another available profile e To start the service scan highlight a device in the Devices tab list and then click on the Services button or double click on the device entry SI Note If the remote device is out of reach or turned off it can take a consider able amount of time for the Services dialogue box to appear it may appear to be frozen Once the device s service profiles are displayed in the Services list box Highlight the desired service and then click on Activate or Deactivate as required Once the service is successfully activated the assigned port if applicable will appear in the Port column of the Services list box You can choose to use BSP or COM as the port name BSP is the latest Microsoft Bluetooth stack standard but older applications assume serial ports are COM When using COM as the port name the Bluetooth manager will try to find and use a free port between COM and COMO When using BSP as the port name BS
59. ANSI 182 of Cols TESS 196 of Rows ANSI 82 of Rows TESS 196 Anchor View 1 93 209 Display Shift 769 Field Scroll 796 moving between fields 188 206 Origin Scroll 196 page size shape 182 196 positioning 196 splitting view of 170 Type and View IDs Split screen 170 Use Increment 769 x and y origin 193 209 X Increment 7 69 Y Increment 769 Screen Switch 167 scrolling Field Scroll 796 Origin Scroll 196 Security 6 security levelicon 36 Security Settings 57 changing password 52 configuring taskbar 53 level 51 Supervisor 31 Teklogix 51 User 51 security settings 160 default mode 167 Selected Area Transfer Mode SATM 187 select host CTRL h 744 selecting a host 145 Send Mile 202 Send with FKEY 209 serial I O TESS command 20 serial I O fields 138 Serial In 203 Serial IO Character 18 Nov 2004 a amp Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 13 Index Serial Out 203 Serial Port 203 serial port enabling pins for printers 207 I O fields 203 Serial In 203 Serial Out 203 Serial Port 203 SICRC 204 SIFkey 204 SI mode 203 SI prefix suffix 204 SO CRC 205 SO prefix suffix 204 Servers Bluetooth Controls 701 service information 4 Services Bluetooth Controls 99 session status sts 752 Set Mode SM control 192 Set PIN Bluetooth Controls 700 Settings Control Panel 56 Network and Dial up connections 56 Run 56 Taskbar and Start Menu 56 setting the session numb
60. All RAM memory contents are lost While it is most likely that the contents of the flash memory and memory card will be preserved Psion Teklogix cannot guarantee this When the 8525 is reset the screen displays the Psion Teklogix and Microsoft Windows CE NET splash screen before displaying the startup desktop KI Note You do not need to reset your 8525 after configuring the radio c 18 Nov 2004 A h X Y e 24 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual GETTING To Know Your 8525 3 3J Features Of The 8525 ia treason emaa x RE E XOU a 27 32 The Internal Backup Batter 28 3 3 Switching The 8525 Vehicle Mount On And Off 28 34 The Keyboard sod dee Eke wee eee RE HE DS 29 3 4 1 Modifier Keys a ke we A Re weet e es 29 3 4 1 1 Activating Modifier Keys 30 3 4 1 2 Locking Modifier Keys 30 3 4 2 The KEYS e o i Ge be dee beh be eee Pee Le HER EEG 30 3 4 3 The Keypad Backlight 32 3 5 The Displays ese ban cea Sees a Ra eae hoa x has S 32 3 5 1 Calibrating The Touchscreen llle 32 3 6 8525 Indicators 4 2 52 24 ko xe Bae AAA 33 3 6 EEDS s suceso dede m ac ub ke es de A robos e ur d 33 3 6 1 4 PWR CHG Charge LED 34 3 6 1 2 RX TX Radio Traffic LED 34 SS AAA E 35 3 6 1 4 API User Application LED 35 3 6 2 Onscreen Indicators o e e 35 3 6 3 Audio Indicators 37 38
61. Bon ame Jaars Tace pn i Device Mouse Services ve e Set PIN Storage gusta Tekrerm ip control Panel JJBuetooth contos gt SEM iD Figure 5 40 Bluetooth Controls Dialogue Box Scan Click on the Scan button to list available devices Eile Viel Bluetooth Controls H x Devices servers Active Conn Properties S Bluetooth ard Device D EFEWELLI 00027280188F WindowsCE 00043E4326E2 Mi Services louse E e Set PIN Storage El Start TekTem 2 Control Panel Bluetooth Controg gt 5E i BG Wait for the 8525 to complete its scan approximately 20 seconds When scanning starts the Scan button will change to Stop if necessary you can tap on this button to stop the process Once scanning is complete all discovered devices will be displayed in the list box with Name Address Active status and PIN information SI Note During the scanning process addresses are located first followed b mE names Only the names of devices that are within the Bluetooth erage range will be retrieved The Active column indicates whether any service is activated for a service is activated the device is displayed in the list even when it i golNdetected 04 gt during the scan h the device Q The PIN column indicates whether you have a PIN password set MU VAL A Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual
62. F connection to for example connect a PC or laptop computer to the 8525 USB Auxiliary Connector Connector Vi j de gt Figure 3 8 Auxiliary Port Cable e Attach the auxiliary connector to the auxiliary port on the closest to the vehicle mount power cable d 8525 A C 18 Nov 2004 A S e e Attach the USB connector to your PC or laptop Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 41 Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 8525 Using Microsoft ActiveSync To Work With Files 3 10 1 Using Microsoft ActiveSync To Work With Files Before communication can begin between an 8525 and a PC ActiveSync Microsoft PC connectivity software must be installed on your PC Once the devices are cabled together running ActiveSync on the PC will allow you to e View 8525 files from Windows Explorer e Drag and drop files between the 8525 and the PC in the same way that you would between PC drives e Back up 8525 files to the PC then restore them from the PC to the vehi cle mount again if needed and so on To install ActiveSync follow the step by step instructions provided with the program s setup wizard Refer to the following website for details http www microsoft com windowsmobile resources downloads pocketpc activesync35 mspx KI Note You ll need the USB setup utility to configure the ini file For information about this USB application refer to Appendix C USB Setup Application 3 1
63. F4 the SAVE key or Tap the stylus on the SAVE softkey label EL Note Ifthe softkey labels are not visible you ll have to press F4 the SAVE function key If a parameter value is changed and the menu exited before the change is saved a dialogue box appears asking whether or not the operator wants to save the change c 18 Nov 2004 E a e 158 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Retrieving Default Parameter Values 6 11 4 Retrieving Default Parameter Values AN Important When F3 the DEFAULT key is pressed all parameter values revert to the factory defaults including those values that you ve changed and saved Press F3 the DEFAULT function key or tap the stylus on the DEFAULT softkey label to reinstate the default parameter values e Press F4 the SAVE function key or tap the stylus on the SAVE softkey label to save the changes e Reset the 8525 See Resetting The 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer in the next section 6 12 Resetting The 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer Some parameter adjustments require that the 8525 be reset before the changes can take effect To reset the 8525 e Press and hold down the BLUE key and the lt ENTER ON gt key simulta neously for a minimum of six seconds A reset results in a complete reboot of the unit All RAM memory contents are lost The contents of the f
64. FAULT 1 R59 R94 e e e e e 1 1 97320 L 97320 C272 Ca71 Ca70 C269 C244 C245 C243 C252 C247 C248 C246 C256 1 POPULATE FOR FPGA 100K 100K Ka 1 een 1 971 1 gen 1 97972 1 een 1 een 1 een 1 97372 C378 1 men 1 men 1 97871 1 97372 0 063W 0 063W 100N 100N 100N 10N 100N 100N 100N 10N 9454 t 100N 100N 100N 10N 1 E E BE Ap 115 15 15 15 15 15 100 215 215 B 15 A ee ee ee E o tev o 16 2 tev 2 tev 2 16v 2 16v 16V 2 16 10 2 tev 2 tev 2 tev 2 er tev o e e e e e e A 4 4 Ro vs wy E BYPASS FOR I O BANKS d E BYPASS FOR I O BANK TR RR ees al R396 i 97453 ORO ASIC CORE POWER ZG POPULATE FOR ASIC CARDBUS 1 15 TP PCMCIA SLOT 1 POWER 1 ava TP123 3 TPS78625DC0 9004558 4 e e vouT VIN cate C274 co 1 5 PLL AVDD ka 1 97871 1 97371 i om BYPASS EM 10N 100N 100P 9003428 97871 C1122 15 15 15 100 13618 GND ou 100N 9003428 iev 2 tev 2 sov 2 ang 2 BE ss 2 100 EN T 6 3 16V 2 B0 20 mr 50v e e EA ASIC 32kHz CLOCK Ke 16V ava 1 97375 INO TPB72 10 ae 0377 2 50V B7 Y e 973714 C376 7 c382 100P e 1 97375 TE s 15 1NO Ed Sw 2 10 ied al mm 2 50 Sch TPB50 97292 gd PLL LOOP gei 5 n TP873 VE NA a 128 d vec E e e 32KHZ z ri e 32KHZ_ASIC gt Y A TP882 8 a GND R142 uso 972006 n 9000515 10KO NC7SZI25P5X POPULATE FOR FPGA uo ASIC PLL POWER m 18 Nov 2004 Vas y IGNATURES DATE POPULATE ONLY FOR ASIC m En NGT TEA 2003 PSION TEKL
65. Here lt F23 gt Remove lt F24 gt Select lt F25 gt Previous Screen lt F26 gt Next Screen lt F27 gt lt F36 gt None Table 6 2 Psion Teklogix Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent Keys 6 8 4 Block Mode Local Editing The Psion Teklogix 8525s support block mode or Local Editing Application programs must be specifically written to support this mode For software that supports this mode the keys shown in Table 6 3 have special meaning Key Function lt ENTER gt Function keys Atrow keys lt DEL gt lt CLR gt lt SHIFT gt lt RIGHT gt arrow lt SHIFT gt LEFT arrow Starts transmission of data Start transmission of data Move cursor to the next unprotected position in the appropriate direction Moves the cursor to the next unprotected area Moves the cursor to the previous unprotected area Deletes the character to the left of the cursor and moves cursor one position to the left Erases the data in an area and moves the cursor to the first position in the area Table 6 3 Function Of Keys In Block Mode e 148 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 18 Nov 2004 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Working With Sessions 6 8 5 Working With Sessions AN Important Use only lowercase letters when entering commands at the TCP gt prompt 6 8 5 1 Establishing A New Session e Press lt CTRL gt and type a lowercase a At th
66. INPACK ag e S2 A2 m 1 10K0 10K0 e GNO 134 GND_53 TP610 E un CB CBE3 135 60 SR e 4 wes PLN M S2 Al 1 Hm SOUS BGI CCBES Aer REG S2 REG TP609 CB AD25 136 s e S2 Al e se avoz sPkR EN S2 40 7 B28 cAD25 AGRPC Ai 137 A P e AC eat Bvm erem Dl m S2 Do lt CB AUDIO e BG2 CAUDIO AG2 PC BVD SPKR S2 BVD2 CB AD26 138 63 S2 A0 S2 D8 47 ps ME S2 Di B29 CAD26 A2S PC AO gt s2 D9 48 28 S2 D2 lt CB STSCHG 139 BesicsrscHG A63 PC_BVD1_ STSCHG Bi S2 BVD1 D9 pe a R39 CB_AD27 140 65 S2 Do A D w RIT pre S2 D10 49 pio ENEE AE SES N Se BSO CAD27 ASO PC DO 97296 97296 oe CB AD28 141 66 S2 D8 Ke 10K0 T 50 A 25 B64 CAD28 A64 PC_D8 in Aen PEO See SS se D7 R309 142 67 0069W Aren 52 51 TP608 a awm GND en S o e MT2 misil o PET 1 97296 PUES JO Tee 100 CB AD29 TM e mE S2 Di TP606 oe aa ie ae I gew CB AD30 dl cani PERAE S2 Da TPS78 TP579 S2 ps 1 TP350 lt CB_RFU32 5 145 B32 RFU waan pe 0 S22 S2 Di E cum JO Trzos CB aper 148 estate Meet pio zt S2 Dog S2_101S16 e dag 147 72 S2 DO the dee 4 CB CLKRUN o B33 CCLKRUN A33 PC_WP_ IOCS16 82 101816 gt F 1 GF PC OE e CB CD2 38 B67 CCD2 A67PC_CD2 73 PC CD2 gt 4 CB AD 1 0 P S2 D 15 0 CB _AD 31 0 349 B34 GND A34 PC_GND3 74 S2_D 15 0 150 B68 GND AGSIPC GND4 75 CB_CD2 S2 A 25 0 TRG 152 we MTG1 1151 4 S2 aen TPB42 CB CBES CB CDi 154 153 1 TP776 MTG4 MTG3 S2 A25 ES mam O CB CBE Se A24 20 Pero CB CBEI gt
67. Installed In The 8525 Network Key This text box is used to specify a 5 or 13 ASCII character sequence or an equivalent 10 or 26 Hexadecimal digit sequence that matches the active WEP key on the access point e To assign a Network key tap the stylus in the checkbox next to The key is provided automatically to remove the check mark V disabling this option File Edit View TITTEN RTT ier ok x E La Network name sp This is an ad hoc network wireless access points are not used Encryption WEP Authentication Open y Disable this option to Network key Key index i access Network Key amp Bg key is provided automatically Key Index fields Enable 802 1X authentication amp Start Tekrerm amp Network Connections PTXWLAGS46B1 Wi p Figure 2 6 Accessing Network Key And Key Index Make New Serial c Connection on CO Key Index This field is used to identify the WEP key Enter a value from 1 to 4 Enable 802 1x authentication 802 1 X is the IEEE standard that offers additional security for local area networks It provides authentication for user devices attached to an Ethernet network whether wired or wireless A security protocol packet such as TLS or MDS encapsulated in an EAP is used in conjunction with the 802 1x standard to authenticate users at the MAC layer Available EAPs are listed in the dropdown menu next to the EAP option e To activate 802 1X ta
68. N an des GND D7 wi 128 oris DS vmp2 126 _ DS wea 127__orpi66 D4 vmpa ries D3 vas oris 130 TP192 D2 vmes 30 c Di wp 181___crpigo 1 iu Do 2i 1 MEM_CTL pn e Weer 70 ep e BEEN 69 WAIT eps e Vai EN SA2 RESET gt RESET eps LB RD WRI CEt GPlo4 87 CTP169 PCM_IN WEI CE2 eps CTP173 WED WE GPIO6 88 CTP172 avs RD OE GPIO7 E CTP171 BS VDD pios otero 29 w R eps 187 _ Tweet 28 cs aporo 188 mmm eron 88 me A SDCLK2 B aak GPloi2 3 mue cua SDRAM CTL D oe be CLKI3 RED 112 men ava GREEN 15 mue e 4 onFo BLUE 12 mees SS CLK 48MHZ CNF1 HRTC 118 mung CN2 varo 120 CTP185 CNF3 mer 113 _ TP 186 CNF4 CNF5 conEvbb 27 CNF6 m corevop2 S9 e aa CNF7 m corevops 122 e TESTEN DTESTEN oun 1 e e e e e e e e e ee Ilovppa 2 e EE 1 Cae Mes 1 om CHiB 1 ous em 1 cag4 SN 1 caos Cao C400 cove ul 97372 ue e 97871 97871 97871 97871 97871 Ce 97871 EE 97871 97871 10N e 59 veer 100N 100N 100N 100N 100N QD B toon Br 100N 100N 15 pp L 92 e 2 op 2 215 2 5 27 215 2 215 2 115 10M 2 ss 2 ss zl tev e nA ess a 16V 16V 16V tev Ka ue 16V 16V A 7 yss Iovpp 199 e e e e e eee e e e lovops 123 _ e 88 vsss e wy om pee DVDD1 38 e vss o Fun 132 98136 4 vi ves DVDD2 TP195 Ei ees ava 7 200MA 144 o e 4 vss y AVDD1 110 e e vis 58 114 e 24 oss AVDD2 case C336 me Ee pid Jam m o sm JS e maios 10
69. Narrowband Modulation 2 4 level FSK Type III PC Card Form Factor Transmit Power 1W or 0 5W Frequency Range 403 422 MHz 419 435 MHz 435 451 MHz 450 470 MHz 464 480 MHz 480 496 MHz 496 512 MHz Rx Sensitivity 110 dBm 19 2 kbps 4 level FSK Data Rates 4800 bps 9600 bps 19 2 kbps Bluetooth Radio SDI O form factor Transmit Power OdBm max 9dBm min Frequency Range 2 400 2 4835 RX Sensitivity 72dBm typ 75dBm max Data Rate 784Kbps 8 3 Bar Code Scanning Scanner Types Decoded and non decoded Non Decoded Codes Supported Code 39 code 128 EAN 13 EAN 8 EAN 128 UPC A UPC E Codabar Code 93 Code 11 Interleaved 2 of 5 MSI PLESSY Discrete 2 of 5 Decoded Codes Supported Dependent on external scanner choice Code Discrimination Automatic for all selected codes Non Decoded input Decoded input is external scanner dependent 8 3 1 External Scanners Supported Types Decoded and Non Decoded 5V o Interface Via tether port e 18 Nov 2004 E a e 246 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 8 Specifications External Scanner Specifications 8 4 External Scanner Specifications 8 4 1 Power can TN LR and XLR Industrial Scanner Specs Communication Undecoded Mechanical Dimensions Weight Cable lengths Electrical Operating voltage Operating current nominal Idling current low power mode Optical Light source Scan System Rate Depth of field Long Ra
70. Number of test report RFI EMCE1 RP46573JD02A Remarks if any See Appendix 2 Place BRISTOL Date 18 NOVEMBER 2004 Signature E A W STENNING or Head of Product Certification The index to the information package lodged with the approval authority which may be obtained on request is attached EAE059966 WA c 18 Nov 2004 h A Ke lt Q VAL pv 72 245 EEC AS LAST AMENDED BY 95 54 EC APPENDIX to EEC Type Approval Certificate No e11 72 245 95 54 3024 00 concerning the type approval of an electric electronic sub assembly with regard to Directive 72 245 EEC as last amended by Directive 95 54 EC 1 Additional information 1 1 Electrical system rated voltage The device can be connected to any supply vehicle with a voltage between 10V DC and 90V DC i e 12 24 48 or 72V DC 1 2 This ESA can be used on any vehicle type with the following restrictions Any supply voltage between 10V DC and 90V DC 1 2 1 Installation conditions if any See manufacturer s documentation 1 3 This ESA can only be used on the following vehicle types Not applicable 1 3 1 Installation conditions if any Not applicable 1 4 The specific test method s used and the frequency ranges covered to determine immunity were Not applicable 1 5 Approved recognised laboratory for the purpose of this Directive responsible for carrying out the test Radio Frequency Investigation Limited Hampshire 5 Remarks None EN De
71. Q Ye ES gt Bluetooth Certificates Date Tir IPv6 Keyboard Double Click Support e g Mouse Network and Owner Options Ee Z Regional Remove Dial up Co Settings Programs n H 39 Storage Stylus Systerr Figure 5 67 Bar Code Options To display the sub menus available in the Options tab e Tap on the symbol to the left of the option with which you want to work To change a parameter e Double tap on the parameter or press the SPACE key If a field requires text entry a text field is displayed in which you can typ the appropriate value c 18 Nov 2004 gt 114 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Scanner Options Display Parameters Scan Result When this parameter is enabled set to ON the type of bar code and the result of the scan appear on the screen Note that this information is only displayed after a successful decode and is visible only while the scanner trigger is pressed When the trigger is released this information is cleared from the screen can Indicator When this parameter is enabled set to ON the laser warning logo appears on the display whenever the scanner is activated Scan Result Time sec The value assigned to the Scan Result Time sec parameter determines how long the scan results of a successful scan are displayed on the screen Time is measured in seconds and a val
72. SES 1 TP844 y y S2 CE 21 TP583 d S2 A22 15 TP582 TPB45 CB CBEO 2_CE 2 1 SE 1 1 TP565 gea S2 A20 P one PCMCIA CARDBUS SLOT 1 PCMCIA SLOT O d x 1 S2 VS 2 1 FE wer S2 A19 O TPs62 S2 A18 1o wes Zi b S2_BVD 2 1 e S2 A7 O Ten CB CD 2 1 Pa cio Se BVDI2 1 R286 o R287 S2 A16 iO Trszo CB_CDf2 1 S2 Apps 97296 97296 S2 A15 pen EN S2 A 5 TP53 10K0 10K0 mm 1 pu E E JO TP515 L a z S2 D 15 0 i 0069W S 006aW S2 Am Has 5 S2 D 159 S2 PULL UPS e e S2 A12 ER dee a E 1 2 S2 BVD2 s2 au 1O Tr200 S2 Am R289 R200 ew S2 BVDi TP149 TP54 1 NE COMPACT FLASH T TO Taw 18 Noy 2004 a E H TP598 N 4 1 CB PULL UPS gt e e cB_vse 0 063W 0 063W Kl EE Se AT TP597 9 TU H Bo IGNATURES DATE S2 A6 1 10K0 10K0 RAN TP596 C8 ver AUG 4 S2 AS dees R30 ew Rat4 o EE d Bor ol V NGT TEA 2003 PSION TEKLOGIX JN 97296 97296 1 S2_VS 52 M4 TP594 10K0 10K0 CB_VS 2 1 m MISSISSAUGA ONTARIO S2 AS To Tess 11 11 C8 vspe i pe See e ven BW e CB PULL UPS E SC 1 SCHEMATIC 8525 8530 AIN LOGIC BOARD TP591 CE CARDAPONCIA FACE S2 A0 1 ROJENE SE er TP590 CB ven J 008014 E di vs GL prer ERI FEN SHEET OF REL DATE 8 22 B c D c D B TP1077 3 Us7 R29 9
73. SSID e Type the appropriate SSID Service Set Identifier in the Network name SSID text entry field at the top of this dialogue box The Network name field can contain a maximum of 32 characters The name assigned here is listed as a preferred network h Important Keep in mind that the 8525 will only communicate with access points that are configured with the same SSID Ad Hoc And Infrastructure If you are using an Infrastructure network one in which 8525s m pass data through an access point leave the checkbox next to Thi hoc network blank If you are using an Ad Hoc network a network in which 852 directly to other 8525s without an access point tap on the che to This is an ad hoc network to enable N Ad Hoc 5s pass data Eobgnblev 2004 18 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Configuring An IEEE 802 11 Radio Installed In The 8525 Encryption WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy encryption prevents others from acciden tally accessing your network If you are nof using encryption you can choose Disabled from the dropdown encryption menu Otherwise leave this field as is Authentication 802 11 supports a number of subtypes of network authentication services Open Shared WPA and WPA PSK Using Open authentication any wireless station can request authentication The station that needs to authenticate with another wireless
74. Selecting the Change Con nection button allows you to change the type of direct connect to your PC vw Teklogix Scanners Teklogix Scanners Used to set up scanner parameters and choose the bar code sy that the 8525 scanner will successfully read 66 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Control Panel Icons e Network And Dial up Connections Network and Displays a network window from which the 8525 radio can be configured Geste ED and an existing configuration can be executed Refer to Configuring An IEEE 802 11 Radio Installed In The 8525 on page 15 for details Y Internet Options Internet Options Used to configure your Internet browser including options such as identify ing the default and search page that the browser applies when connecting to the Internet setting the cache size specifying the Internet connection options and defining the security level that is applied when browsing E SNMP SNMP SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol is the protocol used to monitor and manage devices attached to a TCP IP network This feature is reserved for future use Q Bluetooth Bluetooth TE Device A short range wireless technology that enables data communication between devices It also provides the capability to use a Bluetooth enabled cellular phone as a data modem exchanging information with other Blue tooth devices and providing network access lU T
75. Start Tekrem zz Control Panel Keyboard Properties T S i 287 Figure 5 15 Remapping A Key Type the scan code in hexidecimal in the field labelled Scancode Note The Label field displays the default function of the scancode you are remapping Virtual Key Function And Macro The radio buttons along the side of the dialogue box allow you to define what the scan code will be remapped to Virtual Key Function or Macro When Virtual Key is selected you can choose to force lt SHIFT gt to be either on or off when the virtual key is sent If No Force is selected the shift state is dependent on whether the shift state is on or off at the time the virtual key is sent When Function is selected a list of valid functions appears in the dialogue box When Macro is selected the macro keys available on your unit are listed in the dialogue box Choose Virtual Key Function or Macro sk e Choose a function from the Function list in the dialogue box and t p on CA C 18 Nov 2004 x e 78 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Volume And Sound Properties Editing A Scancode Remap To edit a scancode e Inthe Scancode Remapping tab tap the stylus on the remap you want to edit e Tap on the Edit button and make the appropriate changes e Tap on OK to save your changes Removing A Remap To delete a remap e Inthe Scancode Remapping tab highlight the
76. System Teklogi TotalRecal Volume amp L Dronrarnc fa cy iy Sans amp Start TekTerm 2 Control Panel IF Certificates i 503 Figure 5 26 Certificates Dialogue Box For a detailed description about Certificate setup for both the server and client side devices 8525s refer to the following website www microsoft com windows2000 techinfo planning walkthroughs default asp Security Services KI Note When importing certificates the 8525 only recognizes cer files 5 5 7 Narrow Band Radio Note Keep in mind that the Narrow Band icon is only visible in the Control Panel when a Narrow Band radio is installed in the unit e n the Control Panel choose the Narrow Band radio icon File View x 2 m Q Lo e Bo SS Y R Bluetooth Certificates Date Time Dialing Display Internet IPv6 Keyboard Device Options Support e gt a d d e A 2 Mouse Owner Password PC Power Regional Connection Settings D M b o L Remove Storage System Teklogix Total Recall Volume amp y Start 3 Control Pane Figure 5 27 Narrow Band Icon c 18 Nov 2004 A E Y 7 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 85 Chapter 5 Configuration Info Tab 5 5 7 1 Info Tab In the Narrow Band Mdio dialogue box the Info tab displays information about the radio it cannot be edited Narrow Band Radio kal Ki E Info Channel Protocol Power Radio
77. Tap on OK you can now access all menu items in the Start Menu and icons in the taskbar Accessing Teklogix Level Security Important The Teklogix security level is reserved for authorized Psion Tek logix personnel only Before you can access Teklogix security level you need to set the sec to Supervisor 18 Nov 2004 A h Y E Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 51 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE NET Security Levels In the Security Level dialogue box see Figure 4 6 on page 51 e Tap on the Configure button Configure Security OK E Show Icons For M Teklogix Supervisor User 1 Allow Teklogix Security Level Figure 4 7 Configuring Security Levels e Tap on the checkbox next to Allow Teklogix Security Level to enable V this option and then tap on OK Security Level O Teklogix Password Set Password Configure Figure 4 8 Security Levels The Teklogix level security is now available in the Security Level dialogue box e Tap on the radio button next to Teklogix To activate this security level you ll need to enter the appropriate Psion Teklogix level password in the Password field Changing A Password E EL Note Keep in mind that this is the same password as that assigned thfough CA Password control panel applet Refer to Control Panel Icons d c 18 Nov 2004 To assign a password O e Choose a secur
78. VSSN DGND E2 G2 C2 J2M15 P15 R2 R4 R6 R8 R10 R12L2 N2 R14 4 TI4 PWE u29 tev A TMS PWE GP49 aes A mmer Di C ast due SN74CBTLV3126DGVR T uw TP33 d Come PWAI pss NIS PWAIT i Kaes BONUS 612 veer 2 E Controller em eps MIS lOlSi6 nap ale CONSOLE_RXD SoE m 2 ee g ie e Ap E ME 88 ava e 8 TEsrctk SE RA ROROBOSOS SASS See eee eb SSeS ee Se eee 22 2 amp 8 8 9 34 3B 3A P 22 88 mm 6 e e e e m JB BUS PCM IN 2B 2A em C172 om C174 3 2 fec SCL 1 97372 TP31 TP32 18 1A i 1 97871 1 97871 1 97871 1 97871 S z 9 9 8 e 2 e z 3 2 3 2 2 2 9 z 8 9 8 5 s H e a 2 3 9 zz Ch 100N 100N 100N 100N Ke S SES E S ear 2 2 Ba BE j 15 BE 15 ap M 2 tev 2 16 2 16 2 16 ora 18 se E R125 E asl al al sl s sis g A aR eee e 2 g gl s el a a A wl ol el al al xl ol oga Ho 97296 e e e e 383885838 ses 8 8 8 8 G5 66465666 6 B BS 8 8 8 8 8 a 8B e 10K0 ELS eer e 0 069W y 97296 E gt Jet e og FL e Pd SAZ RESET 0 063W apra 2 ava Bo 1 3 3 GD INOV 004 TP17 TP18 b a 7 e e e e e T 7 a 2 Ke NATURES UAE C162 C163 C164 C165 oe GS A d AWN rarer 1 97871 1 9787 1 s787 1 gen 1 9787 2 g Y 100N 100N 100N SON T0 ton e e NGT TEA 2003 PSION TEKLOGIX IN 15 115 15 Ke 415 1 e R207 e R208 ms 2 iev 2 16 2 16 2 ey 2 iev 18 97296 97296 H A A M sus sw Keeser e 10K0 10K0 e e e e e TP36 Bn Hz SS MLE SCHEMATIC 8525 30 MAIN LOGI BOARD el ae PXA
79. a e 218 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Tether Serial And Console Port Parameter Settings Choosing A Character Set To choose a character set e Position the cursor on the appropriate item for example ISO and press F1 to display the character set options e To activate a character set press the RIGHT or LEFT arrow key to set it to Y N Important If you choose a Chinese character set from the Misc menu and a character sent from the host cannot be displayed on the screen a shaded box character is used as a substitute If you are using a Korean character set a right arrow character is used as a substitute Baud This parameter determines the bit rate of the port Allowable values include 110 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 14 4kbps 19 2kbps 38 4kbps 57 6kbps 115 2kbps 128 0kbps or 256 Okbps Data Bits This parameter determines the number of bits for the data going through this port Possible values are 6 7 8 Parity This parameter determines the type of parity checking used on the data going through the port The options are none odd even mark and space Stop Bits This parameter specifies the number of stop bits 1 1 5 2 used for asynchronous communication Flow Control This parameter selects the type of flow control used in your vehiclez ount E computer The 8525 can perform Software or Hardware har le We
80. and FORWARD buttons allow you to scroll through the help steps to guide you through the Total Recall operation c 18 Nov 2004 es that provide amp Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 109 Chapter 5 Configuration Creating A Backup Profile e Tap on the Next gt button to begin the process Profile Information Default Registry Type indicates what type of Profile Name registry type the platform supports Profile Settings Image Psion Teklogix 8525 OS Version 4 20 0 Registry Type Hive registry AutoRestore Profile Settings Profile Location Back E Figure 5 58 Profile Details Profile Information This dialogue box lists the possible storage destinations for the profile file e To begin type a name for the profile in the field labelled Profile Name This dialogue box also lists the image type 0 Version and Registry Type for the 8525 e Taponthe icon to expand your settings for AutoRetore Profile and Profile Location ef AutoRestore Profile Settings b i Not an AutoRestore Profile AutoRestore Profile for this device only _ Clone Profile for other devices Profile Location Storage Card Flash Figure 5 59 Profile Options Not an AutoRestore Profile creates a backup that is manually restored by the operator AutoRestore Profile for this device only creates a profile that automati cally restores itself following a
81. can change the device name and description of your radio by clicking on the System icon in Control Panel which will open the System Properties dia logue box Click on the Device Name tab to access the menu and change your settings Then click on OK Although the name will have changed in the Properties menu in Bluetooth Controls the radio only reads it on boot up For the changes to take effect you must reset the 8525 5 6 4 The Bluetooth GPRS Phone 1 To connect to the internet using a GPRS phone equipped with a Bluetooth radio begin by setting up the Bluetooth radio The setup information is outlined beginning on page 98 Remember to choose the modem with which you want your 8525 to communicate Scan Device list Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual c 18 Nov 2004 4 103 Chapter 5 Configuration The Bluetooth GPRS Phone 2 Tosetup the internet parameters select the Network And Dial up Connections icon from the Control Panel File View 2 0 0 9 L a 9 e e Bluetooth Certificates Date Time Dialing Display Internet IPv6 Keyboard Device Options Support E e A 5 e 3 Mouse igbtwork and Owner Password PC Power Regional ff ia up Co Connection Settings ds Ma Jo 1234 Remove Storage System Teklogx Total Recall Volume amp y Start_ Control Panel Y OE Figure 5 44 Network And Dial up Connection Icon 3 Select the Make New Connection icon
82. changes without notice and shall not be held responsible for damages resulting from reliance on the material presented in this manual c 18 Nov 2004 E a e TABLE ot CONTENTS Program License greements 002 c eee ee cues I Approvals And Safety Summary IX Chapter Introduction l1 Abo t This Man al s o esoe era srecresu seere arreu 3 1 2 lextConyventiohS u s lo aa EE eee e 4 1 3 About The 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer 5 1 3 1 Features 4 2 ce eka eR ESE Roe UR RR Y RUE a 5 1 3 2 The 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer 8 La 8925 Ports 2 eae ce ew Rom ve Ros A 9 1 3 4 Regulatory Labels o o ooo o 9 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout 2 1 Preparing The 8525 For Operation o o 15 2 2 Powering Up The 8525 And Configuring The Radio 15 2 2 1 Switching The 8525 On 5 cren sa 15 2 2 2 Configuring An IEEE 802 11 Radio Installed In The 8525 15 2 2 3 Assigning An IP Address 21 2 24 Name Servers Tab occa uo op Ro ER Sek TN e 22 2 2 5 Advanced Features 23 2 3 Calibrating The Touchscreen o o 24 2 4 Resetting The 8525 Vehicle Mount 24 KW 3 Getting To Know Your 8525 Features OF The 8525 ce veces Kou Ts e 2 The Internal Backup Battery e 3 3 Switching The 8525 Vehicle Mount On And Off 5 s Nov 04 54 The Keyboard o s ss ua se A sn os Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Comp
83. connections 802 1Qv2 9010t TCP Direct 2392 Telnet 3274 Telnet 5250 Telnet and Narrow Band Settings EL Note The Settings sub menu is not available when 802 1Qv2 is selected as the Conn Type Settings Range Host see text Port 9999 0 9999 Host This parameter is used to assign a host IP address using the format HH HHH HHH HHH Port Port specifies the port number By default the port is assigned the value 9999 C 18 Nov 2004 x e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 195 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Screen 6 20 2 2 Screen m 05 Screen Range of Cols 80 2054132 of Rows 24 4 100 Origin Scroll N Y N Field Scroll N Y N Pages Saved 16 sul App Parameter 0 sl E Label F1 F10 See text Colour Override N see text of Cols This parameter defines the logical page width in characters used by the host computer application Emulator systems trim the host application screens to this width This page width cannot be smaller than the width of the 8525 display Display panning is used if the page is wider than the display KI Note The value in this parameter must be an even number of Rows This parameter defines the logical page length in lines used by the host computer application Emulator systems trim the host application screens to this length This page length cannot b
84. default to block radio communication when the unit is initially powered up This prevents several new terminals from attempting to communicate with the same default terminal number at initial power up Once the default value is changed it cannot be set back to 0 Polling The default values for the Polling parameters are dependent on the value assigned to the Modulation Baud Rate parameter in the Radio tab Modulation Baud Rate Sync Delay 4 Level 19200 17 4 Level 9600 2 Level 9600 2 Level 4800 25 23 Table 5 3 Polling Parameters Window Delay Poll Timeout Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 93 Chapter 5 Configuration Protocol Tab Sync Delay e Warning This parameter should not be changed from its factory setting without a clear understanding of radio protocol timing The ync Delay parameter specifies the delay between the base station transmission and the first response window measured in milliseconds The value assigned to this parameter must be compatible with other terminals and base stations in the system The allowable range for this parameter is between 1 and 40 Window Delay AN Important The value assigned to this parameter should not be changed from the factory setting without a clear understanding of the timing of the radio protocol This parameter specifies the amount of time in milliseconds the 8525 should add to each respo
85. double click appending characters to a decoded barcode 1 5 scanner trigger 1 5 Double Tap stylus settings 83 DUN service Bluetooth 99 E EAN UCC 128 1720 EAN 13 720 EAN 8 121 EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol 20 Echo Mode 88 Edit extent 797 editing 185 Edit Modes 191 192 edit modes TESS 740 empty entry fields 200 Emulation 2392 Telnet 209 AIAG Characterc 18 Nov 2004 Barcode Charatt r 2 0 h amp Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 5 Index amp Right 2 entry fields 738 Enable Alarm 2 empty fields 200 Features 2 0 Function keys 208 Fixed Field Overhd 2 hidden match 199 Passthru Printing 2 0 Ign Bcode fld 208 Send CR with FKEY 209 video attributes 183 207 Serial IO Character 2 visible match 199 3274 Telnet 2 2 Entry Mode 208 BRK for Attn 2 3 entry mode 208 Features 2 3 EOB chars 188 FKEY0 39 2 4 EOL chars 87 Fujitsu Host 2 2 Erasure Mode 7927 Intl EBCDIC 272 Error Accept 1 8 IP for SysReq 2 2 Error Tone and Error Time 66 LU Name 2 3 ESC Key 31 LU Name Enabled 273 5 Ent ANSI Telnet Settings 179 i Xi SE E E Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP Features 2 6 20 FKEY0 39 216 F Intl EBCDIC 2 5 LU Name Enabled 2 5 LU Name Prefix 2 5 Fcursor mode 140 features of 8525 5 Features 2392 Telnet 2 0 Nall Ta Fields Suo Features 3274 Telnet 2 3 Remap Underline To 2 5 Features 5250 Telnet 276 Term Type 2 5 FETM 187 WEC Write Error Code 2 4 fh
86. e A10 MV vss ji LJ e B9 Nc gg Nc Ma M3 N eL ci vsso A3 43 e EA vsso As 43 e DI No Bro Nc Ma MB r kl weg vsso pr 87 e vsso gz E7 e DI wo Nc M9 W m vsso ca C e vssa cs S e Nc oe Nc Mio Mi Mrd D7 D7 0 063W vssa p 27 wen vssa p 27 A C peu ca peu go P SE 18 Nax 2004 D psy pa Rsv os 68 Mz DRA 3 SDRAM MEMORY CONFIGURATON TABLE De acu ng rev mm IR e M RAWN CONFIGURATON POPULATE DO Nor POPULATE D7 we AUG 4 DRAM 4 BEV D PEP NGT TEAI 2003 PSION TEKLOGIX IN 4 16Mx16 U40 U30 Do Ke U25 U26 R583 R585 R582 R584 EC Po ke m MISSISSAUGA ONTARIO 582 583 2 82Mi8 U40 U30 Weg da ME SCHEMATIC 8525 8520 MAKE BOARD 25 26 i 4 32Mx16 U40 U30 ROJENG coru ct fame endi z u25 026 A582 R584 583 585 008014 E Som prer ERIM RE SHEET OF REL DATE 3 22 A B c D c D B TP135 e D 31 0 QS32XL384Q1 95191 uso BD 31 0 po 3 P amp 5 2 BDO Di 4 a ui 5 pp D2 7 25 e 8 BD2 Co 8 de i 9 BD3 Du n 10 BD4 ava s B4 ec BEA 15 cH 97871 za Des w zr HM ps 2 AS BS 4 BOB 97296 E od 16V es Ce 16 Se de 17 BD6 11 SC D7 e 97871 19 18 BD7 0060W T is EIE A7 B7 MEM_CTL NC7SZ11P5X 2 118 D8 20 D m 2 BD8 5 9002958 us 16V 1 5 NC7SPOBPSX 57 D9 23 22 BD9 v 9001584 D Ud ASIC
87. e Scan the entire bar code Make certain that the scan beam crosses every bar and space on the bar code including the margins on either end of the symbol e Hold the scanner farther away for larger bar codes Hold the scanner closer for bar codes with bars that are close together 3 7 2 Scan LED Indicators The 8525 scanner LED the upper right LED indicates whether or not your scan is successful The LED behaves as follows e Scan In Progress scan LED displays solid red colour Successful Scan scan LED displays solid green colour and turns off when the scan is ended Unsuccessful scan scan LED flashes red active the onscreen message states SCANNING If the scan is succe rh Doha 2pp 4 code data is displayed on the screen until the scan trigger is released kh x amp 38 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 8525 Troubleshooting 3 7 3 Troubleshooting If the scanner is not working investigate the following Is the 8525 on Check that the bar code symbology being scanned is enabled for the 8525 you are using Check any other parameters that affect the scanning proce dure or the bar code Check the bar code to make sure it is not damaged Try scanning a different bar code to verify that the problem is not with the bar code Check that the bar code is within the proper range Does the vehicle mount display the warning without scanning
88. e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e wy 1 1 1 1 1 1 R334 R333 R332 R33 R330 R329 R328 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 lt 4K70 4K70 gt 4K70 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 eau eau eau 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW dm 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 18 Nov 2004 AUG 4 2004 IGNATURES DATE RAVN Sue NGT TEAM 2003 PSION TEKLOGIXAN mg a ER be TEE seueuang 8625 60 OGIC BOARD HEAT SR ROJENE T J z 38481 C 1008014 E ECONS THER ux INTERMRE SHEET OF REL DATE 22 22 B c D INFORMATION DOCUMENT RELATING TO VCA JOB NUMBER EAE059966 RELATING TO TYPE APPROVAL OF AN ESA WITH RESPECT TO ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY 72 245 EEC AS LAST AMENDED BY 95 54 EC Appendix 2 Test Report Serial Number RFI EMCE1 RP46573JD02A VA 18 Nov 2004 INFORMATION DOCUMENT RELATING TO VCA JOB NUMBER EAE059966 RELATING TO TYPE APPROVAL OF AN ESA WITH RESPECT TO ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY 72 245 EEC AS LAST AMENDED BY 95 54 EC This page has been left intentionally blank VA 18 Nov 2004 Rri Global 9 TEST REPORT FROM RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD Test of Psion Teklogix Inc Vehicle Mount Terminal Model 8525 To 95 54 EC 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII Test Report Serial No RFI EMCE1 RP46573JD02A VCA Job No EAE059966 This Test Report Is Issued Under The Authority Of Richard Jacklin Operations Director
89. e rm xm e rb Xi e ra xa with which this 8525 is currently associated MAC address of the 8525 vehicle mount computer e g C33B the boot number of the network controller This number increments each time the controller reboots so that 8525s can detect the reboot when they reinitialize number of unique received messages number of unique transmitted messages number of received beacons This number should contin uously increment number of initializations with the network Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 151 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Exiting The Radio Statistics Screen bt beacon timeouts Number of times the beacon has not been received as expected Xr number of retransmissions This number should remain low if radio coverage is adequate rt average round trip time This number represents the milli seconds taken to send a message and receive a response from the base station Cellular Protocol message numbers fr forward remote number hex ar acknowledged remote number hex fh forward host number hex ah acknowledged host number hex ca radio address This is the Cellular Address including session number hex tn host terminal number of session decimal sts session status hex typ data stream type hex msk message mask hex Q memory address of first message in receive queue i e if 0 then the receive queue is empty AcQ number of messages that h
90. ee 138 6 7 2 Working With Multiple Sessions o ooo 138 6 53 The Field Types e es sar a ee x eue oe AN 138 6 7 4 IBM 5250 Emulation Keys o o e 139 6 7 5 DataEntty isc ca eee UR RR eee eee ee eet es 139 6 7 5 1 TESS Edit Modes And Cursor Movement 140 6 7 5 2 DEL Key Behaviour In TESS 141 6 7 5 3 lt BKSP gt Key Behaviour In TESS 142 6 7 6 TESS Status Message o o e e e 143 6 7 7 Lock Messages sc se a a o a A LN EL 144 6 7 8 Control Commands 144 6 79 Resetting A TESS Session lees 144 6 7 10 The Local Ment ocs si s 29 eee sa EE ee 145 6 7 11 Selecting Another Host Computer oa aaa 145 6 7 12 Queuing Mode 68 ANSIEmulaion AA 6 8 1 Configuration 6 8 2 Sending Data To The Hoer 6 8 3 Psion Teklogix Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent Keys c 18 Nov 2004 6 8 4 Block Mode Local Editing LP hue 148 7 6 85 Working With Sessions 9 20 m km es da EE 2 6 8 5 1 Establishing A New Session x Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 129 6 8 5 2 Listing Sessions And Moving To Other Sessions 149 6 8 5 3 Closing A SessSi n s ss c sa aa sacre a a ewe apdo 149 6 8 5 4 Printing A Screen oco aor mee ee eee eee 150 6 8 5 5 Smart Echo Disabling o 150 6 9 The Radio Statistics Screen 150 6 9 1 802 1Q Stats Screen 2 ee a rana 15
91. hazardous environments requiring fail safe performance such as in the operation of nuclear facilities aircraft navigation or communication systems air traffic control direct life support machines or weapons systems in which the failure of the Software could lead directly to death personal injury or severe physical or environmental damage High Risk Activities Accordingly MDC and its suppliers specifically disclaim any express or implied warranty of fitness for High Risk Activities You agree that MDC and its suppliers will not be liable for any claims or damages arising from the use of the Software in such applications Ownership intellectual property rights and will not ake any action to jeopardize ni E fere in any manner with MDC s or its suppliers ownership of or rights wi e IV Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual License Agreement to the Software The Software is protected by copyright and other intellectual prop erty laws and by international treaties MDC s third party suppliers may protect their rights in the event of any violation of these License Terms Termination Your rights under this License will terminate automatically without notice from MDC if you fail to comply with any term s of this License Upon termination you must immediately destroy the Software together with all copies adaptations and merged portions in any form U S Government Restricted Rights The So
92. ise Figure 5 50 Setting The Phone Number The phone number you enter is network carrier dependent Once you ve specified all the necessary information choose the Finish button c 18 Nov 2004 B ps 4 106 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration The Bluetooth GPRS Phone 9 Inthe Control Panel choose the Dialing icon File View 0 O b S 9 BW gt E Bluetooth Certificates Date Time Dialing Display Internet IPv6 Keyboard Device Options Support ie e ate 3 2 e Mouse Owner Password Power Regional dedu Settings 6 Y Mt Ae Remove Storage System Teklogix Total Recall Volume amp rar ene ete CC 1 Start A Control Panel Y OE Figure 5 51 Dialing Icon 10 The values in the Dialing Properties dialogue box need to be edited accord ing to your network carrier specifications File View 7 X 9 Dialing Propertie OK x E P iaing fom frrssqqmE EEEEENN Bluetooth ien dog sam board Device E Local settings are Tre ea zos ate P Mouse NI The local country region code is f gional Dial using Tone O Pulse ttings Z 7 Disable call waiting by dialing Remove reless KSE rel E amp jStart TekTerm rs Network Conn Control Panel 230i Dialing Properties gt amp all E Figure 5 52 Setting Up Dialing Properties Once you ve edited this dialogue box to reflect your n
93. it is aborted The write may be one or several bytes in length Test When this parameter is enabled set to Y data is output through the serial po make certain that it is operating appropriately C 18 Nov 2004 x e 220 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Tether And Console Port Scan See Parameters 6 21 3 Tether And Console Port Scan See Parameters When Scan See is specified as the peripheral for either the Tether or the Console port the parameters listed under the Scan See sub menu are used to tailor the operation of this type of scanner The other parameters listed in this menu Character Set Baud and so on are identical to those described beginning on page 217 05 Scan See Character Set Baud 9600 Data Bits 8 Parity none Stop Bits I Retries 3 Input Tmo 2 Scan See 6 21 3 1 Scan See Sub Menu Mapping The Viewport 05 Scan See Anchor Line Anchor Column Follow Cursor Line Offset Column Offset Wraparound Panning Line Scrolling Brightness Arrows Version NOU coz e uzmnoOoornuimnbmnb VO Range nad h X Y e c 18 Nov 2004 A Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 221 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Scan See Sub Menu Mapping The Viewport The Scan See display is mapped to a specific area on the 8525 screen c
94. number system digit is included with the decoded bar code data Include Check When enabled set to ON the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data Addendum A Important Before Addendum can take effect the Short Code parameter in the Options menu see page 116 must be enabled set to ON Refer to Addendum on page 121 Prefix Suffix Chars Refer to page 122 for details 5 928 Codabar Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Codabar or off to disable it Field Size Char Refer to page 119 for details 5 9 2 9 Code 93 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Code 93 or off to disable it c 18 Nov 2004 I Y 124 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Code 11 Field Size Char Refer to page 119 for details 5 92 10 Code l Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Code 11 or off to disable it Indude Check If Include Chk is enabled set to ON the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data Check Digits This parameter can be set to None One Check Digits or Two Check Digits If this parameter set to One Check Digits it is assumed that the last digit is a check digit If this parameter is set to Two Check Digits it is assumed that the last two digits are check digits Field Size Chars Refer to page 119 for details 5 9 2 11 Int
95. numeric character for example type the number 7 e Next press the lt BKSP gt key The cursor is now positioned to the right of the previously selected A SCH character ex gh the A c 18 Nov 2004 gt E U X Y e e Press the RIGHT or LEFT arrow key to scroll thro characters and select another character Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 157 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Saving Changes To Parameters Entering Information In A String Entry Field In addition to using the fixed set of ASCII values assigned to this type of parameter you can also type text in a string entry field e Type the required text in the string entry field including letters numbers and symbols e Press ENTER to save the text Entering Unicode Values Unicode is a trademark of The Unicode Consortium To enter a Unicode value for one time use e Press and hold down the ALT key while typing a four digit decimal value that represents the Unicode character you want to display e Release the ALT key AN Important Ifyou have a set of Unicode values that you use frequently you may want to create and save them in a pop up window so that you can access them whenever necessary Refer to Custom Charac ters Unicode on page 172 for details 6 11 3 Saving Changes To Parameters Whenever a parameter value is altered the new value must be saved To do this Press
96. or Media Copy control the transfer of data to and from the serial and console ports on the 8525 At the 8525 the value assigned at the Primary Port and Secondary Port parameters determines which port the ANSI print command will identify and use as primary and secondary The allowable options are Any Available 1st printer 2nd printer 3rd printer 4th printer lst Serial 2nd Serial 3rd Serial 4th Serial and Disabled Async In When this parameter is enabled set to Y the serial async port is ready to receive input at all times Start End These parameters specify the start and end characters of input received from the serial async port c 18 Nov 2004 E a e 192 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Host Char Set 6 20 1 7 Host Char Set The Host Char Set menu allows you to specify a character set in the Lower and Upper character tables 05 Host Char Set Lower ASCII ISO IR 006 Upper DEC Multinational KI Note When an 8 bit set is selected from the Lower character set the Upper character set will change to the same value The Upper character set cannot be altered until a non 8 bit value is assigned for the Lower character set To choose Lower and Upper character sets e Position the cursor on the Lower or Upper pa
97. press F2 the PREV function key 6 1 1 1 2 Numeric Parameters Numeric parameters are displayed in reverse video e To decrease the numeric value tap the stylus on the left side of the number To increase the numeric value tap the stylus on the right side of the number Each numeric parameter has a preset range of numbers assigned to it for example a preset range of 1 through 10 If you attempt to enter a number which either exceeds 10 or falls below 1 the incorrect value will be rejected the original value for this parameter if any will be displayed ES VA 6 1 1 3 Y N Parameters Y N parameters can only be enabled Y or disabled N To enable or disable c 18 Nov 2004 he value P a Y N parameter e Tap the stylus on the parameter associated with the Y N value will toggle between Y and N 154 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Alpha Parameters Some Y N parameters have sub menus For these parameters a double right arrow gt appears next to the Y or N e Tap the stylus on the sub menu arrow gt to display the sub menu 6 11 1 4 Alpha Parameters Alpha characters appear in reverse video in this type of parameter The allowable values for this type of parameter consist of a predetermined set of acceptable letters or words To cycle through the set e Tap the stylus on the alpha field to cycle through t
98. replace mode In this mode data can be entered over previously entered characters In replace mode the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys move the cursor to the right and left within a field The UP and DOWN arrow keys complete the entry field and move the cursor to the previ ous or next field Replace mode KI Note When the Enter on Arr parameter is disabled set to N the UP and DOWN arrow keys do not complete an entry field Refer to page 207 for details about this parameter c 18 Nov 2004 gt x Y e 140 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application DEL Key Behaviour In TESS 6 1 5 2 DEL Key Behaviour In TESS Field mode In a left justified field the lt DEL gt key erases all characters in the field and places the cursor in the left most position of that field In a right justified field the lt DEL gt key erases all characters in the field and places the cursor in the right most position of that field If the lt DEL gt key is used to clear data in a field that has been pre filled by the host application the field is flagged as modified and the updated information is sent to the host in the next response message Replace mode In both left and right justified fields the lt DEL gt key erases charac ters beginning from the current cursor position to the end of the field The cursor remains in the same position in the fiel
99. scancode you want to delete and tap on the Remove button e Tap on 0K 5 5 3 Volume And Sound Properties KI Note Sounds wave files cannot be reproduced on 8525 units The conditions under which 8525s emit sounds are tailored from within the application installed on your unit e Inthe Control Panel choose the Volume amp Sounds icon File View x 0 2 a 5 gt B H O gt L 9 9 w gt Bluetooth Certificates Date Time Dialing Display Internet IPv6 Keyboard Device Options Support 1 amp amp amp PD Mouse rrow Band Network and Owner Password PC Power Regional 1 Ban Dial up Co XX Settings amp P W W 1234 Remove Storage System Teklogix Total Recall W Volume 8 pf Start r3 control Panel e ur al E s S Figure 5 16 Choosing The Volume Icon c 18 Nov 2004 E a e e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 79 Chapter 5 Configuration Volume Adjustments 5 5 3 1 Volume Adjustments Volume amp Sounds Properties D Volume Sounds Bluetooth Loud Enable sounds for Device Events warnings beeps and system events ry Applications program specific and all other sounds ei E Notifications alarms appointments and reminders Mouse Remove que y EIS RET Programs ler Stat TekTerm Q Control Panel 15 volume amp Sounds Pro i gt 5 gl Figure 5 17 Volume Settings e
100. sh DOC4 7000530 200 DOCUMENT 8525 MLB PRODUCTION FUNCTIONAL TEST SPECIFICATION 0 M SYSTEMS flash DOC5 1010084 DOC SERIAL NUMBER CODING INST 0 Page 4 Address amp Data bus switches Page 5 Peripheral Microcontroller PCON EEPROM Real Time Clock Battery Monitor PCON Programming I F PCON Console Page 6 Buffer ASIC Page 7 ASIC Support Circuitry CF PCMCIA Power Swtiches Page 8 CF Card PCMCIA Interface Page9 MQ1188 SDIO USB Controller MQ 1188 DC DC Converter Page 10 Spread Spectrum Generator Page 11 LCD Controller Page 12 SDIO Socket Display Transition Board DTB Connector Page 13 SMBus Battery Charger Inrush Current Limiter Page 14 3V3 5V Power Supply 3V3 5V Switched Power 3V3 Standby Regulator CPU Core Supply Page 15 Supercap Charger Analog Mux Supply 5V Standby Regulator Page 16 Tether Port RS 232 Transceiver Page 17 USB Hub 12C DEVICE MAPPING Port Extender Interface DEVICE 8 BIT ADDRESS 7 BIT ADDRESS Page 18 COM2 RS 232 port Console RS 232 Port REAL TIME CLOCK RV5C386A 32H 64H Page 19 Battery interface TEMPERATURE A D PCF8591T 48H 90H Beeper Driver External Supply Inrush Limiter PCON M30624FGPGP D5 08H 10H Page 20 Internal Keyboard interface e MLB EEPROM M24C01WDW6T 58H ABH External Keyboard interface Page 21 Audio header DTB EEPROM M24C01WDW6T 52H A4H J Tag Interface BATTERY PACK EEPROM M24C01WDWeT 50H AOH Page 22 Heater BATTERY PACK CONTROLLER BQ2060 OBH 16H KEYBOARD CONTROLLER 33H 66H
101. suspended or withdrawn by the Secretary of State for Transport at any time without any particular length of notice being given and in the event of that being done the holder will absolve the Secretary of State from any claim for damages or compensation 3 CONDITIONS FOR MOTOR VEHICLES 3 1 The holder of this approval shall put the approval mark described in the Motor Vehicles Designation of Approval Marks Regulation 1979 as amended only on Motor Vehicles fitted with Motor Vehicle parts which Motor Vehicles as fitted with such parts conform with the type of Motor Vehicle approved by as on behalf of the Secretary of State for Transport and only on Motor Vehicles that a have been manufactured assembled or completed in factories under his control and b conform in all material respects with the type of Motor Vehicle which was tested before an approval certificate was issued 3 2 The holder of this approval shall mark motor vehicles of the type approved in the manner set out in the relevant Regulation Directive using the authorised approval mark as given in the Motor Vehicles Designation of Approval Marks Regulation 1979 as amended together with the approval number allocated by the Secretary of State for Transport 3 3 The holder of this approval shall mark Motor Vehicles of the type approved in the manner set out in the relevant Regulation annexed to the United Nations agreement of 1958 as amended using the authori
102. the Windows CE NET Control Panel The behaviour of the keypad backlight is tailored in the Keyboard Properties dialogue b OX Note Refer to Keyboard Backlight on page 72 for details about this option Keep in mind that this option may be restricted to supervisory use only 3 5 The Display 8525s are equipped with display backlighting to improve character visibility in low light conditions The backlight switches on when a key is pressed The backlight intensity and the duration of time that the backlight will remain at full intensity can be specified in the Display Properties dialogue box in the Windows CE NET Control Panel AN Note Refer to Display Backlight on page 69 for details about the Display 32 Properties dialogue box 3 5 Calibrating The Touchscreen P If your 8525 touchscreen has never been calibrated or if you find that the Stylus YA pointer is not accurate when you tap on an item use the Stylus Properties dialogue box in the Windows CE NET Control Panel to recalibrate the screen Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual c 18 Nov 2004 Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 8525 8525 Indicators e n the Control Panel choose the Stylus icon to display the Stylus Properties window File View 2 x 0 0 ak amp 9 w amp F Bluetooth Certificates Date Time Dialing Display Internet IPv6 Keyboard Device Options Support V e s Ge 3 T B Mouse Narrow Ba
103. the check digit is included wi decoded bar code data Field Size Chars Refer to page 119 for details C 18 Nov 2004 x e 126 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration IATA 2 of 5 5 9 2 14 IATA 2 of 5 Mod 10 Check If this parameter is enabled set to ON the Mod 10 check digit is calculated ITF Check If this parameter is enabled set to ON the ITF 14 16 Mod10 check digit is calculated Include Check If this parameter is enabled set to ON the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data Field Size Chars Refer to page 119 for details 5 9 3 Translations File View i Q S Bl 1 Certificates Date Ti Keyboard Device Support Properties gt 3 9 Mouse Network and Own Regional Remove Dial up Co Settings Programs e Storage Stylus Syster Estat CIN XM FE Figure 5 70 Translation Tab e In the Translation tab choose the Add button c 18 Nov 2004 E a e e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 127 File View 2 x e Mo e Modify translation GA gt Imi Bluetooth Certificates Datef t IPv6 Keyboard Device 1 Support Properties zb Z e e P Mouse Network and Ow Regional Remove Dial up Co Settings Programs e B y Storage Stylus Syst m Start I controlPanel SAR Figure 5 71 Translation
104. the same column In addition the ENTER key transmits a CR When enabled set to Y an LF character received from the host causes the cursor to move to the first column of the next line The lt ENTER gt key transmits both a CR and an LF Disable kbd Setting this parameter to Y disables the keyboard and scanner When this parameter is set to N the keyboard and scanner are enabled c 18 Nov 2004 A E a e 190 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Edit Modes DEC Cursor Keys This parameter can be set to either Cursor Mode or Appl Mode Cursor Mode causes the cursor keys to generate ANSI cursor control sequences Application Mode causes the cursor keys to send application control functions 6 20 1 5 Edit Modes r 04 Edit Modes Range Auto wrap N Y N Erasure mode N Y N Tab stop mode N Y N Edit extent Line see text Disp controls N Y N Auto wrap If Auto wrap is disabled set to N characters received when the cursor is at the right edge of the screen replace the previously displayed characters If Auto wrap is enabled set to Y the cursor wraps to the next line when the current line is filled The display scrolls up if the cursor is at the bottom margin Erasure mode When this parameter is disabled set to N erase functions can only erase unprotected characters When enab
105. this dialogue box resets the data to zero Suffix Char This character if non zero is added after a successfully decoded bar code Press the key you want to insert in the dialogue box attached to this parameter The ASCII Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed Pressing the lt ESC gt key in this dialogue box resets the data to zero Strip Leading This parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the beginning of the bar code before the prefix character is added KI Note The appended character is treated as any other keyboard character For example if BKSP is pressed the usual action for that key is per formed If your 8525 is operating with the Psion Teklogix ANSI emulation application the vehicle mount transmits the escape sequence associated with the function immediately after the bar code data Strip Trailing The value entered in this parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the end of the bar code before the suffix character is added 5 924 EAN 8 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable EAN 8 or off to disable it Include Check If this parameter is enabled set to Y the check digit is included with t bar code data c 18 Nov 2004 h fa Py ny 122 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration UPC And EAN Settings Addendum A Important Before Addendum can take effe
106. to and from the 8525 Other applications running in the 8525 such as a TESS session or another ANSI session must each have a different number In addition each Psion Teklogix 8525 using the radio link must have a unique number 6 20 1 1 Host Conn Host Conn Range Conn Type Telnet 802 1Qv2 9010t Telnet Narrow Band Settings see text Conn Type The options for this a parameter vary depending on the type of applicatio running ANSI or TESS and the type of radio installed in your 8525 For ANSI applications this parameter allows you to choose one of the Me A types of connections 802 10v2 9010t TCP Direct Telnet and Narrow Band Keepin mind that choosing Telnet allows the 8525 t directly with the host Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 177 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Host Conn Settings AN Note The Settings sub menu is not available when 802 10v2 is selected as the Conn Type In addition this sub menu varies depending on which option you ve selected Telnet or 9010t Telnet Settings Range Host see text Port 23 0 327167 Terminal Type VT220 see text ENTER Pmpt Press ENTER to connect see text ESC Prompt Press ESC to cancel see text Auto Login N Y N Func Key Remap N Y N Arrow Key Remap N Y N 9010t Settings Range gt Host see text eet 9999 0 9999 Host This para
107. to use and press lt ENTER gt To close the pop up menu when you re done e Press the lt ESC gt key Font Override 04 Font Override Font Code 0 is font 18x32 Font Code 1 sae Ls font 18x32 Font Code 2 see Es font 10x26 Font Code 3 is font 18x32 Font Code 4 is font 8x20 This parameter is used to redefine the font to which 5 different font codes refer C 18 Nov 2004 A e 174 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Default Colours Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Applications 04 Default Colours Range Foreground Black see text Background White see text Foreground And Background This menu is used to select the foreground and background colours used within Tekterm If an unreadable combination is assigned the foreground and background have the same value the foreground colour will be inverted The allowable values are Red Green Yellow Blue Magenta Cyan White and Black KI Note The 8525 must be reset press and hold down the BLUE and ENTER keys for a minimum of six seconds in order for the new colour assignments to take affect 6 00 Applications TESS and ANSI applications require unique names so that several different sessions of TESS and ANST can operate simultaneously 8525s can support up to 8 sessions at one time 03 Applications
108. v 2003 PSION TEKLOGIX ING o Aessen orf a pee MLE SCHEMATIC 8525 20 MAIN LOGIC BOARD SPREAD SPEGTRUM CLOGK GENERATOR ROU ENG DE DENT No Sur em er C 1008014 E aen NA INTERIM REV SHEET OF 10 22 D c D B BA 25 0 D 31 0 BD31 BD9 rog 1 us Bin a men 9002773 1D13806F00A100 BD29 1 BD28 A20 tos 107 BD 7 P724 ATP ve 106 BUS ups SCH roe 105 A17 104 ren 104 _ BD24 Au TP707 103 Foig 108 _ Bbo3 ro A15 core 102 LCD DATA BD22 Crp705 AA vz 101 LCD FDi7 BD21 PTOS AB vue 1100 LCD FDi6 BD20 Crp703 ae DIE 98 LCD_FD15 BD19 OTp702 2 rus L 7 LCD FDi4 BD18 Crp7o1 Ato uM 96 LCD FDi3 BD17 Grp700 9 Foie 95 LCD FDi2 BD 6 Crpeg9 AB GE 94 LCD FDi1 BDi5 A7 TP697 Foo 93 LCD rm BDi4 reos AS Us a LCD FD9 H BD13 PTE Ab E FOE 90 LCD FDB BDi2 um A E iu 87 LCD FD7 BDii TPO 3 ee 86 LCD FD6 BD10 opri Se ES 85 LCD FD5 BD9 Au TP712 84 LCD FD4 BDB Ao 2 Vid TP713 roa 8 LCD rps BD7 827 crema D 15 0 roo 82 LODFD2 m ES TP715 Dis i at LCD FDi pcm 3 BOS gu Di4 a mo 80 toro SE LCD CNTRL BD4 Dia TP717 Serna n e mae pp ger Di2 ss A e FPLINE pp eet pit 8 3 Sauer 2 FL7 e FPSHIFT DI gien D10 E 9004216 E 7 NEW31SP107X1E4L DRDY d de a DRDY e TP721 g A Ds vmo 25 otpisa
109. 0 063W p x E 0 063W oe WT om 31 E E 0 063W 0 063W o SW ES ava e D GND 3i les TOW C om 3 oi PSW5_ GL5_ GPSW sp EE iii 094 lai 9000501 R67 BSS84 d gt 97296 gt TP208 Y E 10K0 n e e e ee 0 063W l B HUB EN_USB_PULLUP e e se m TPA7B 5 M 1A CONT EN sv FH12 408 0 5SH 1 5A MAX ER y 4 asm 9002946 e n 1 EXT 5V SW 8 ouri INI C330 FDV303N EXT_Sv_SW e e e e e e e T dal 9 soa R299 25V_350MW TERN Staren E ge mo o SI alee s ie Ae 1 97372 1 cue iin 1 3 100K 100N 6 ours weu a oos3w EXT 5V SW VN EK E 9003431 D 4 15 21 ue 2 22U T e e e EN AUX PORT PWR MIC IN MIC IN 2 tev E 10 SONT x MIC GND 5 MIC GND 5 00 EN e RnS a NC 97296 R122 6 SA 7 N No 10K0 97320 GND gt 8 I 0 063W 100K SPEAKER z SPEAKER GND H J ow SPEAKER SPEAKER x BEEPER_OUT BEEPER_OUT R615 037 w d 97272 97634 GND pr e 1K00 Q75 FDV303N 0 063W 97634 25V 350MW P4 USB HOST LL _ PORTA USB HOST PLUS E FDV303N Tuo e SES 12 PORT4 USB HOST MINUS PV SSOMW ERES 5 e L LOW ENERGY LATCH 1 Ke ee E MEDIAQ USB DEVICE PLUS KEE MEDIAQ USB DEVICE MINUS Ster 16 e PORT4 USB HOST PLUS PORT4 USB HOST MINUS See 17 PORT3 USB HOST PLUS SS Dese 18 PORT3 USB HOST MINUS GND Fe eo GONSGIE EXE 20 CONSOLE RXDATA SONS 21 CONSOLE TXDATA GND o d GND 2 o CONSOLE MEDIAQ USB DEVICE 3i Cous Cen COM2 Den pas x COM2 DTR COM2 DTR 25 m COM2 DCD COM2 DCH 26 0 COM2 RXDATA COM2 RXDATA LE 3 COM2 TX
110. 001562 97872 iy MQ1188 GBE 1 1M00 C106 eem m E MQ1188 POWER A E 33P 15 MQ1188_PWRON D10 por osa Ft ay 1 50v TP773 1P771 En i MEM CTL PDWN GPIO4 osco e e CLK 3M6864 N 1 R36 97326 diio Sp PACK MQ1188 Ce ks El A CS oscr WA e 1 ua MOE Lo 182k MQ1188 PWR 94548 ls FL6 SDRAM CTL Ke ED d MBROS3OT Ee 9000989 dl as PWE Ke wm Ai D1 0 063W 30V_500MA 2 NEF13PT22271E9 Damo Ls M6 1 s 5 1 2 1 E l8 eEo AVDDP1 e e e e e e e vout VIN our IN IRQ_BUS j Dou M7 o AS 1 Cae 1 com 1 C398 1 oer GND KD BET AVUDPE 97871 97871 97871 97372 mm Sue C1095 MRDY i Dow auer 6t 100N 100N 100N 10N 94054 1 3 2 115 2 116 2 ss 2 25 C1096 d 1U0 S Mal188_IRQ Ko MS 16V 16V 16V 16V 84054 i 4 2 10 IRL AGNDP1 e e e zv Alba F BYP GND esos L M 110 0364 BA18 H2 Au e e tev 2 97372 1 5 E eed 10N BA17 Ha 15 v Ale iev 2 Au d A15 87 ED An Am Fp23 ea Am Fpz2 ou An rel At Ato rozo E10 o Foro e AS Foie D A7 For 42 Ae 38 Fora B9 bs A Loe Fora B8 sE AS Ez Fo12 35 AB A3 ER Fort A2 ES Foro E zg i m 87_ 8 Fos E D15 BA 25 0 E Fos Bi Di4 E 6 2 FDS ER E Fp3 m TP79 ORO 5 po D 0 063W 97453 R249 Bi uk 64 TP55 1 7 B3 96331 La pi LCL RA RIOP P sa e PLP3216S551SL2 MEDIAQ USB DEVICE PLUS D8 FMop_GPio1s BE e FC TA ASS e Se R367 E TP69 oben D7 FVSYNC_GP1014 9004471 3V3 gt e FUSYNO GPIOI3 c3 oe 1 Seen wens USB DEVICE MINUS MQ_G
111. 0N 100N 100N HA mae o 2 tev Moe er Mes Sy MS ob Ae me 3 ayssi NC 76 e e 2 avsse TEST 133 e R588 v7 97453 lt mp Ww p oo6sw LCD CONTROLLER 8 Nov 2004 1 43 IGNATURES DATE Ge AUG 4 NGT TEAM 2003 PSION TEKLOGIX IN um MISSISSAUGA ONTARIO PD ME SCHEMATIC 8525 30W AIN BOARD LOD GONTROBLER ROJENE Soe a D eniin E 008014 E Som prer FIRE SHEET OF REL DATE 11 22 B c D c D B sv ava 3V3_SWITCHED TP1160 me 3va 97453 e e e e SE i Kg C335 C334 C128 C407 C1103 0406 1102 1104 1105 C408 Rest E 1 s7871 9787 1 97871 1 97871 1 97872 1 en 1 97871 1 97372 1 97372 1 cas 1 97372 1 en e 15 100N 100N 100N 100N 10N 9003429 100N 10N 10N 9003429 10N 100N eoe e o i Eon B B 15 B 15 100 B 15 15 100 15 215 2 e 2 iv 2 tev iev 2 16V 2 s80 20 2 1ev 2 wa tev 2 e 2 80 20 2 16v 2 tev Bag s FL13 18V L 16V E S i i 9000989 o e e e e e KEE Ls d NEF13PT222Z1E9 0 063W a82 4 A k Lb d am p MEC 97633 IN out 97634 Wee GND FDV
112. 1 6 9 2 Exiting The Radio Statistics Screen len 152 6 10 The Tekterm Startup Display Menu o a 153 6 11 Working With Menus 153 6 11 1 Using The Touchscreen To Navigate Through Menus 154 6 11 1 1 Sub Menus ele lee 154 6 11 1 2 Numeric Paraimeters o oo s os coeca nanon aa e a eea a 154 6 11 1 3 Y N Parameters soe c toea c RR e eS 154 6 11 14 Alpha Parameters 155 6 11 1 5 String Entry Parameters 155 6 11 2 Using The Keyboard To Navigate Through Menus 155 6 11 2 1 Sub Menus w o c soca eA 155 6 11 2 2 Numeric Parameters llle 156 6 11 2 3 Y N Parameters 22 60 RR RR 156 6 11 2 4 Alpha Parameters o o 156 6 11 2 5 String Entry Parameters aooaa 156 6 11 3 Saving Changes To Parameter 158 6 11 4 Retrieving Default Parameter Values 159 6 12 Resetting The 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer 159 6 13 The Parameters Men 159 6 13 1 Security SettidgS o o a kaa 160 6 14 Display OPlONS lt 2 eos loser ewe a a a ee e 160 6 15 More ParameterS ee 161 6 16 Radio Parameters oves ii a oy os E e e emt i NN 161 6 17 System Parameters s o cee ee ee om Ld Rods UY UR Re 163 6171 Keyboard ue o oe Romeo Rex 9o EE ale ee A 164 6 17 1 Macro Control Panel lt soss 2 ee 164 61712 ndicatOtS a las oom Rom Be 164 6 17 13 SOftkeyS cece eds oh RR o Re R9 eer 6 17 1 4 Ctrl Panel usur RR xU dw
113. 1 4 1 8525 Mounting Recommendations e Warnings Before mounting an 8525 in a vehicle there are a number of oper ator safety issues that require careful attention An improperly mounted 8525 may result in one or more of the following operator injury operator visibility obstruction operator distraction and or poor ease of egress for the operator Psion Teklogix strongly recom mendis that you seek professional mounting advice from the vehicle manufacturer Cable routing within a vehicle cab also requires careful consider ation especially for separately tethered scanners and other devices with loose cables If you are unable to obtain suitable advice contact Psion Teklogix for assistance see Appendix A Support Services and Worldwide Offices at the end of this document Note also that for better protection the equipment should be mounted inside the vehicle roll cage Use of the Powered Fork Lift Cradle while charging the fork truck battery is prohibited AN Important Safeguards e To avoid possible injury this device must be properly secured when in a moving vehicle e Keep this device away from magnetic fields e Do not place the computer near a television or radio receiver e Do not disassemble your 8525 computer there are no user serviceable parts inside c 18 Nov 2004 B ps 4 0 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 233 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Ins
114. 1 800 387 8898 press option 2 c 18 Nov 2004 Fax 1 905 812 6304 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual A 1 A 3 Worldwide Offices COMPANY HEADQUARTERS AND CANADIAN SERVICE CENTRE Psion Teklogix Inc 2100 Meadowvale Boulevard Mississauga Ontario Canada L5N 7J9 Tel 1905 813 9900 Fax 1 905 812 6300 Email salescdn psion com NORTH AMERICAN HEADQUARTERS AND U S SERVICE CENTRE Psion Teklogix Corp 1810 Airport Exchange Boulevard Suite 500 Erlanger Kentucky USA 41018 Tel 1859 371 6006 Fax 418593716422 Email salesusa psion com INTERNATIONAL SUBSIDIARIES see also www psionteklogix com Psion Teklogix S A La Duranne 135 Rue Rene Descartes BP 421000 13591 Aix En Provence Cedex 3 France Tel 33 4 42 90 88 09 Fax 33 4 42 90 88 88 E mail tekeuro psion com A 2 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual c 18 Nov 2004 E a e e D APPENDIX Port PINOUTS B Tether Port Pinout The tether port connector incorporates multiplexed undecoded scanner decoded scanner RS232 serial and USB interfaces In order for it to operate a special wiring scheme is needed If you need to create cables for the tether port contact Psion Tek logix and request an instruction sheet for tether port termination A Important Do not attempt to interface with the tether connector without direction from a qualified Psion Teklogix technician Doin
115. 1 General Maintenance 3 11 1 Caring For The Touchscreen The top of the touchscreen is a thin flexible polyester plastic sheet with a conductive coating on the inside The polyester can be permanently damaged by harsh chemicals and is susceptible to abrasions and scratches Using sharp objects on the touchscreen can scratch or cut the plastic or crack the internal conductive coating If the touchscreen is used in harsh environments consider applying a disposable screen protector PN 1008009 These covers reduce the clarity of the display slightly but will dramatically extend the useful life of the touchscreen When they become scratched and abraded they are easily removed and replaced The chemicals listed below must not come into contact with the touchscreen e mustard e sodium hydroxide concentrated caustic solutions e benzyl alcohol and c 18 Nov 2004 A concentrated miner acids h Y A 42 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 8525 Cleaning The 8525 3 11 2 Cleaning The 8525 A Important Do not immerse the unit in water Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent to wipe the unit clean e Use only mild detergent or soapy water to clean the vehicle mount unit e Avoid abrasive cleaners solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning e To clean ink marks from the keypad and touchscreen use isopropyl alcohol c 18 Nov 2004 la Y 4 o lt
116. 120 120 100N 400k 100K eet 2 am 50v 2 am 2 r5 0 063W 0 063W 16V m H e e e e 1 1 al R295 VA 97296 S SA Ee TP442 TP44 0 063W E s E TETHER SELt TETHER SEL 0 TETHER INTERFACE 0 0 8 Now2004 0 1 TL 1 201 IGNATURES DATE 1 0 RS 232 RAWN AUR NGT TEA 2003 PSION TEKLOGIX IN 1 1 USB ms MISSISSAUGA ONTARIO PME ME SCHEMATIC 8525 30 U AIN BOARD EXTERNAL INTERFACES ROJENE Soe a s t a foa I 008014 E Som prer FIRE SHEET OF REL DATE 16 22 c D B R285 97453 ORO TP206 0 063W 15 5V_SWITCHED z FLIA e e e 9000989 e e e e d e NEF13PT222z1E9 cus DEL mo as 1 94054 Ke C333 97320 3000501 d our 100 15 ES os 100K BSS84 2 GND EET AS wv al MN 11 97634 0 063W bg Tpigg 0 069W FDV3ON T 3 10K0 25V_350MW 97296 e e Sp 4 R316 EN mu SWITCHED D B R382 T ES 1 97272 07 EN_USB_HUB_PWR e e g P4 i ele TP138 TP460 Hon TP464 R306 R66 21 d usa 97296 97296 1 1 ISP1122ABD TP739 10K0 Ww 1 2 98171 Me EE 2 USB RESET e e W e am 5V SWITCHED E s hs am l
117. 15 B 15 A JB ao vss at LA tev 2 mz dev 2 e Am 48 ao VES Av Al 2 iv 2 tv 2 tV 2 e AM H8 At vss_e3 E3 e e e An HB ay vss Ea E3 e e e e A10 HZ an vss Ji HIL e Aio HI ao vss y GD e vsso As 43 e wy vsso As 43 e pm vssa B E7 e vsso pr B7 e vssa ca 1 03 e vssa ca LD e M SYSTEM DISK ON CHIP D7 D7 vssa p D7 vssa p 27 va Al25 0 MD3831 D32 V3 X 9001557 ava N D5 5 DRAM_1 DRAM_2 la JJ e 0 EB y J6 cao cat TS WER 1 gen em MEM CTL ES op a 100N FLASH Cen 3 H2 ce VSssG3 Bi z SDRAM CTL MOE mm og vso 9 e e e PWE 08 wg 7 PCM IN _ m ES gusv pis H8 nii A 25 0 pia K8 pia DB ar pa H7 D3 Tp7 SDCS3 D R582 R585 R584 98 am pig 7 DS POPULATE R583 IF 497453 97453 97453 97453 16MX16 DRAMS ORO geg Dad POPULATE R585 IF A ORO ORO POPULATE R584 IF 4 P ato pi HS Di ARE USED 0 063W o osaw MIS DRAMS 16MX16 DRAMS 0 063W 0 063W 32Mx16 DRAMS e m 15 ARE USED 15 15 ARE USED o D10 7 M N e H4 e TP96 sta Ap D9 03 ay om D u25 oa u26 SEE SCD 1008211 SEE SCD 1008211 DR ae o7 8 Dz 1008211 1008211 ES as vele n SDCS3 cs1 pais 2 D31 E2 csi pars E my D na ps H D CS0 par B D30 G9 cso para Bt m D2 Ae p He D MWE F9 ae pois B2 m EP ap Da HS pm SDCLKi F ok omel i 025 SDCLKt F2 ak pag LD mg ro m pe K4 nm G tt SDCKE1 FS cke pati 2 De7 EMT SDCKE F3 Lues pa 02 DM G2 w p ed D so P Di Do 93 D SDRAS ES pas bos pa Da e G9 o p SDCAS EZ cas pas HEt Da
118. 152003 _04 52 54 lt Back Next gt ST Stat TekTerm 3 Control Panel I View Selections 5 Hi AIO 07 Figure 5 62 Viewing Selections e Tap on the Next gt button to perform the operation Performing The Backup Perform the Operation To complete the Backup Restore tion the big button to the night EE Backup To Flash Disk BACK FORWARD 3 amp jStart fTekTerm 2 Control Panel Ip Perform the Operation lt gt 54 2107 Figure 5 63 Performing The Backup e Tap on the Backup To Flash or Storage Card button to start the process and create a profile 5 7 2 Restoring A Profile E To manually restore a profile Y A e Choose Restore Selected Profile from the dropdown menu and select the Profile Name displayed in the drop down box EA Note You can also manually restore an auto restore profile located it flash ora storage device c 18 Nov 2004 112 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration IPv6 Support 5 8 IPv6 Support The IPv6 Support icon in the Control Panel allows you to activate IPv6 network support on your unit This internet protocol specification version 6 sup ports 128 bit IP addresses replacing version 4 File View D O 2 Lh A CNS Bluetooth Certificates Date Time Dialing Display Internet Device Options Owner Password Power Regional 5 e a s Mouse Gaia Settings
119. 16V e BLMIOA121SPT 1 1 s 19 SCAN ENABLE e Com TXD 12 men o TOUT 8 COMI TX DATA e e TETHER POWE R ele 87 ad m RS e Cou pap 10 R2OUT RUN 9 COMI RX DATA e 100K CYT e CHE ETEISCHUAGE E BLM10A121SPT TP431 kb 12 5 TETHER ID Com RTS 13 THN o OUT 17 COM Prs e e 96350 200MA 1 d COMI CTS 15 RIOUT RIN 16 COMI CTS TETHER ID CY Y Y PCON AD PUS BLMI0A121SPT Bag 4 5V_TETHER_PWR 207 TETHER POWER ON e SHUTDOWN D aL cmi all e Di ach n 97320 97320 R108 97371 ava ER STATUS 100K 100K 97320 TP430 100P E ie A 0 063W 0 063W 100K 15 Pad PAEENAPLE PS E EXT SCAN 0 063W 1 ure 50V R297 ei H 9000884 VA TP427 97295 GND wa e E e TS 1 10K0 7 DN E 5V_TETHER DG409DY T1 alle 1 9001547 0 063W ha S S 35H NC7STOBP5X CI VO402MHS12 mn an 9000963 x e E ABE E c99 ee Ee e 97371 S 1 EXT_SCNR_ENA 7 TP433 ir a 2 SE e PLONE 10 83 50V TP426 TVS2 5V TETHER PWR i 9001547 COM CTS B2 e e Vo402MHS12 B ze al le e ES e 5V TETHER EXT SCNR SOS 5V 12 B y E 5V TETHER PWR 1 5V_TETHER PLDN6 13 B0 C100 ma 97371 TP425 mes TETHER PORT RS 232 e LLJ e i m 9000928 De 9000928 PLDN7 7 las 15 VO402MHS12 3K32 9000928 3K32 1 50V e RIA e 0063W 3K32 0 063W Cou TX DATA 6 o E E 0 063W E e e 1 2 ED EXT SCNR DATA 5V 5 a al le al TP424 TVS4 a R105 9001547 5 u32 PLDNS 4 a K 97320 rar V0402MHS12 Vom e EXT SCNR DATA 5V 100K e RA e 9000963 0 063W i E 1 2 EXT SCNR ACK EXT_SC
120. 2 11 DS SS 762 802 1Q v1 162 radio address automatic 802 IQ v1 762 radio specifications 245 radio statistics screen 802 1Q 150 rb received beacons 151 recalibrating touchscreen 32 83 received acknowledgements 151 received beacons rb 151 received messages rm 151 receive LED 34 Remap Underline To 2 5 Remote Desktop Connection 53 remote desktop connection 63 Repeat Delay between key repeats 77 Repeat Rate of key repeats 77 Repeat tab key repeat settings 71 Replace mode 140 replace mode 208 reprinting a page 144 RESET Press Enter message 137 resetting default parameter values 59 TESS session 144 8525 memory 159 resetting the 8525 24 response time improving with queuing mode 146 retransmissions 802 IQv1 xr See xr retransmissions 752 Retries 220 reverse video attribute 783 207 Riet if Alpha 206 rm received messages 51 round trip time rt 152 TOWS number of in ANSI screen 182 number of in TESS screen 796 rt round trip time 752 Run Start Menu 57 S safeguards 233 safety instructions general X scanner 37 safety warning scanner 37 SATM 187 SAVE key F4 134 Save on Reset 201 Scan Bad 1 4 Scan Good 114 Scan Indicator 774 Scan Log File 4 scanner aiming target dot duration 7 5 Append Enter 205 Append F0 205 appending data 115 bar code appending datato 115 Click Data appending data 115 Click Time double click 5 Cont Nxt Fld 205 disabling the scanner 190 Do
121. 203 to 1097 cm 2596 minimum S65 55 Artificial light 1200 ft candles Sunlight 8000 ft candles Operating 22 to 122 F 30 to 50 C Storage 40 to 158 F 40 to 70 C 5 to 95 NC Withstands multiple 6 foot drops to concrete Meets MIL STD 810E IEC529 rating IP54DW UPC A E EANS 13 JANS 13 P2 P5 Code 128 EAN add ons Code 128 MSI Plessey Code 39 Inte ed n 2 of 5 Code 39 Full Ascii VA Standard 2 of 5 Code 93 Codabar bes c 18 Nov 2004 ur wi Complies to Gost R TUV UL E 4 Complies to FCC A EN55022 B 9 248 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Laser Classification Chapter 8 Specifications PowerScan Standard Range Scanner Specs BCIQCNS13438 AS NZS3548 VCCI B CDRH Class 2 IEC60825 Class 2 8 4 2 PowerScan Standard Range Scanner Specs Communication Undecoded Mechanical Dimensions Weight Cable lengths Optical Light source Scan System Rate Depth of field Standard paper Print Contrast Ratio Pitch Skew Standard and Intermec compatible 6 9 x 11 2 x 18 3 cm 2 7 x 4 4 x 7 2 in Scanner 280 g 9 9 ozs Cable 82 3 cm 32 in 176 g 6 2 ozs Collapsed 81 cm 32 in Max working 183 cm 72 in Extra bright 650 nm Visible Laser Diode VLD Frictionless lifetime flexure mechanism 35 scans sec nominal Paper Labels decoded 75mi 3 0 to 6in to 15cm 10mil 1 5 to 15in 4to 38cm
122. 24A which is enclosed in Appendix 2 of this document This Appendix Appendix 1 contains the following Documentation Supplied By The Manufacturer 1 Product Specification 2 User Manual 3 Label Diagram 4 Technical Drawings These pages are not included in the total number of pages for this document VA 18 Nov 2004 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer Driving Technology The 8525 is a Windows CE NET based vehicle mount computer engineered to deliver maximum performance ruggedness and integration required for mobile data collection in the harshest mobile environments in and out of the four walls The user friendly 8525 is designed to deliver Flexibility Integration Ruggedness Ergonomics FIRE day in and day out The 8525 can also be configured to operate in Intense and Cold Environments ICE The features of FIRE and ICE put the 8525 in a class by itself Add to this robust expansion and connectivity options and it is easy to see why the 8525 is the only choice for use in rugged environments like warehouses freezers ports yards and wide area mobile applications And like the rest of Psion Teklogix Next Generation Terminal platform products the 8525 is based on industry standards to ensure it integrates easily with your existing or future infrastructure ADVANTAGES Extreme Ruggedness The 8525 is designed to stand up to the harshest and most extreme environments and deliver the solution
123. 25 Vehicle Mount Computer Specifications 243 8 2 RadioSpecifications 22e 245 8 3 BarCode Scanning 246 8 3 1 ExtemalScanmers w s e ia ess rondt ana a w a aui a a 246 8 4 External Scanner Specifications ooa 246 8 4 1 PowerScan LR and XLR Industrial Scanner Specs 246 8 4 2 PowerScan Standard Range Scanner Specs 248 85 Internal Lithium Ion Batter 250 Appendix A Support Services And Worldwide Offices Al TechnicalSupport 2 2 0 00 00 00 00200004 A 1 A 2 Product Repairs dud il ia A 1 A 3 Worldwide Offices 4 2 su sx oet EE e e a A 2 Appendix B Port Pinouts B Tether Port Pinout wi e 4 4 wed ae Bw EH 4G de a a B 1 B 2 RS232PortPimO L 29x99 Swe we a de we we AC B 1 B3 DB 26 Auxiliary Port Pinout 2 2 ee B 2 Appendix C USB Setup Application Call USB Setup sa aa a a ROE E Ah C 1 C 1 1 Launching The Application 0 C 1 C 1 2 Pre Installation Updating usbstor inf And wceusbsh inf C 2 C 1 3 Installation Installing The 8525 As a Device On Your PC C 4 C I4 Post Installation 22s RR ges C 5 c 18 Nov 2004 E a e 6 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual PROGRAM LiCENSE AGREEMENTS Microsoft s End User License Agreement You have acquired a device DEVICE that includes software licensed by Psion Teklogix Inc from Microsoft Licensing Inc or its affiliates
124. 258 PROC K E ROJENG EIE Ge Staren er KEN SE 008014 E e E GL prer FIRE SHEET OF REL DATE 2 22 A D c D B ava DRAM CTL RR A Dj31 0 97296 SDCSO 10K0 0 063W aper meg P w n 7 RA NAND FLASH BUS vas Daag 9003330 u40 U30 TP45 mae ru TP4B ro K9F5616U0C D1B0 poms SEE SCD 1008211 SEE SCD 1008211 2 R 1008211 1008211 m di vi DO 97296 NAND CMD LATCH ENABLE e B3 gg vm L D15 apen E2 A2 DSi E2 A2 DIS 10K0 TP42 3081 pais Kal pats 0 063W MEM OTE D si ECH TP43 NAND ADDR LATCH ENABLE ape eu L D14 SE G8 cen para E EH G9 cso para E Du ux NC7S32M5X 7 C 5 NAND CHIP ENABLE e M og vm E Dia ES we pais 82 Da CAS LATENCY gt SPLASHES 3 o j NAND RE 8 ae e L D12 SDCLKt F2 Ci po SDCLKi F2 o ms R150 E Y CLK Do E CLK Dor 97296 MOE 20 J NAND WE A5 we vn LHS Dii MEM CTL SDGKE F3 cke pari G2 D27 SREI ES cke pai 62 Di Kei NAND WRITE PROTECT P4 MEM CTL 0 063W 3 Au F3 D10 DaM1 A Dt D10 H e e EE 1210 TP51 Dou SS NAND READY BUS 1 e e nog 09 LE D9 SDRAS FB Ras pos 02 Do s Overlap resistor footp
125. 288 97288 97288 gt 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 gt 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 SA 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW sun 63MW 63MW 63MW ou 63MW Sau 63MW su 63MW 63MW ew S3MW 63MW 63MW 63MW ug mun 63MW 63MW eu 63MW ou 63MW sau G3MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 69MW 63MW 6 MW 63MW 63MW ou eu S3MW 63MW 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 am 2 1 am 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e Na e e e o o o e o o e o e o e e e e e e o e o e o e o o o o e o e o e e o e e e e e e e 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R484 pop pop R480 R479 _ R474 mara R472 mari R470 pop Raes per R 66 maes macs R463 R462 R461 R460 R459 _ R458 _ R457 _ R456 RASS _ R454 _ R453 R452 R451 Raso R449 mass R447 meso R445 R44 pm R442 Rasi Raso R439 R438 R437 R436 R435 4K70 4K70 lt 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 lt 4K70 lt 4K70 lt 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 lt 4K70 4K70 lt 4K70 lt 4K70 lt 4K70 4K70 4K70 lt lt 4K70 4K70 lt 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70
126. 2IN SOUT3 3 EL COMMAND TP147 E ENABLE 32KHZ e e 7 gc ro BUS n D KmID cov rei 53 P37 A15 2 P93 DAO TB3N ANALOG CCFL DIM DES OPTION M NTRA OL 3 RTC_IRaB o BUS e E P94 DAi TB4N 1 VTERM DAC SV9 BTANDBY e R587 100K 5 vss wrRB D 4 REE e COM3_1_EN P40_A16 2 400 R134 97453 S E LECT 0 063W si G P95_ANEX0_CLK4 CHARGE EN m ORO ED Iz TETHER SEL 1 P41_A17 5 gt H 0 063W 5b i P96 ANEN SOU lt ACPRES 10K pn TETHER SEL 0 P42 Al8 O 3k Soen du a P97 ADTRG SIN4 ACSEL E N a8 Pa A S NR ege TP mg 3 7 GND_TETHER_POWER 48 P44_ Cen E Pi00 ANO 95 lt LCD_THERM CONVERTER_ENABLE a P45_ CS1 P101_AN1 S9 TETHER ID HEATER INSTALLED 46 pic ces 2 aus ane 92 awm 3V3_STANDBY DispiAy oro 45 Paz csa E Pros Ana H LCD TYPE E n 9 P104 ANA KI0 90 OPTIONS AD 01125 d e VREF o a 9787 9 pros ANS ki 89 BATTERY VOLTAGE SCH 1 15 5 98136 97 E 88 BAT SET E D 3V3 STANDBY BLM21A102S TER ZER Wee LU 9002925 Sp 200MA 94 E 87 S E MSS SIGNAL DGND 12 62 Wee e D Jeck Vd sis gt Bine POWER SWITCH hi C135 1 C202 e PCON AVSS ee FLS 1 99 1j Sen E MOLEX 100 1001 e 10 15 R32 yt USE 128K FLASH PART WITH ASIC TP139 3V3_STANDBY 2 dV 2 tev 97453 ORO USE 256K FLASH PART WITH FPGA a mm 5 0 063W 1 97296 7 15 10K0 11 e 0 063W gt z 9001855 N TSW 102 07 G S RA a 1 pe 9003438 a ls a RTJOERI03J T A V TOON
127. 303N 25V 350MW 3 3 p e e y LCD DATA 1 2 bi N EN SDIO PWR e EN 7 TP1159 J7 53481 1209 R621 9002922 97296 1 7 CD FDS LOD_FDS 10K0 TP799 GND GND PR 0 063W 7 FPSHIFT 1 FPSHIFT LCD FD7 7 LCD FD4 LOD_FD7 TP798 O En Sue TP792 FPLINE FPLINE LCD FD14 a TP797 O LED_FDS Len Foe TP791 FDV303N BND END 25V 350MW LCD FDi0 12 1 LCD FDi6 e LCD FD10 LCD FD16 e TP1154 trs o7 pm e 14 ep Se 18 e LCD FDi4 Pa d LCD FD2 16 15 LCD FD3 LOW ENERGY LATCH Sh H A LCD FD2 LCD FD3 LCD ro 18 17 LCD FDi5 i TP795 e ab m e TP789 l LCD FDO 20 19 LCD_FDS K e ESSO LCD FDO LCD FD5 mee HDD 22 21 LCD FDi6 e GND GND e er C410 C1097 C459 LCD FDi3 24 28 LCD FDi2 1 97871 1 94054 1 97372 LCD FDi3 LCD FDi2 100N 100 10N LCD CNTRL 26 25 Lep_FDo 18 10 15 e GND GND e He 2 tev 2 tev 2 ei LCD FDii 28 27 LCD FDi LCD FDii LCD FDi e 30 29 LCD FDI E Me Ww E o m y M y LCD FD4 32 31 LCD ra a a a a a E a a LCD FD4 LCD rm Y R256 Sieg R252 R259 R257 R254 R258 R253 34 33 LcD FD2 97320 97320 97320 97320 97320 97320 97320 e GND GND e TPIS LCD_CNTRL SU CARD 100K Head 100K 100K 100K 100K 100K 100K LCD_FD15 36 35 LCD FDi7 0 063W Ke 0 063W 0 063W 0 063W 0 063W 0 063W 0 063W P1 LCD_FD15 LCD FDi7 an A Tp oan Tp oan oan Toon am am 9001544 38 37 LCD FD9 ZS 10 5738 009 789 862 e GND GND e e SDIO D3 e Ee LCD re 40 39 FPFRAME n LCD re FPFRAME A L EE SDIO_CMD e 2 reus GND GND user Ven EN 4
128. 31 BKSP 37 BLUE key CTRL 37 DEFAULT key F3 134 DEL 31 END 37 ESC 31 Function keys 32 HOME 31 32 INS 31 LITERAL key F5 134 Macro keys 32 macro keys 73 134 164 modifiers 29 navigating using the keyboard 46 NEXT key F1 34 one shot mode 72 ORANGE key 30 PREVIOUS key F2 134 SAVE key F4 134 SHIFT 30 softkeys 134 SPACE 31 TAB 3 keyboard mapping Scan See 226 Keyboard Properties 70 72 backlight 72 one shot mode 72 Key Index assigning 20 Key Repeattab 71 c 18 Nov 2004 keys emulation keys IBM 5250 39 transmit key 186 30 Ly e 0 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual L Label F1 F10 783 197 labels changing softkey Label F1 F10 197 labels changing softkey Label F1 F5 183 LANAccessUsingPPP service Bluetooth 99 launching DOS 153 Parameters menu 153 Tekterm 153 Lcl Process 7 45 201 LED charge 34 functions 8525 33 receive 34 scan 35 transmit 34 LED Scan See Brightness 224 LF CR CTRLJ 189 LF character 190 Newline 790 Line Offset 222 Line Scrolling 224 LITERAL key FS 134 local editing mode ANSI 7 48 185 Local echo mode 188 menu 45 procedures 145 process 145 201 Save on Reset 207 LOCK B message 144 196 locked keyboard 186 202 locked 8525 200 LOCK H message 144 196 lock time decreasing with queuing mode 7 46 Login ANSI Telnet Settings 179 Login Failed ANSI Telnet Settings 180 Login Prompt ANSI Telnet Settings 179 Lower A
129. 4 16 appears when you need to make selections and enter further information File view Date Time Properties ok x gt x Q Date Time Es la Bluetooth May 2004 PE Device S M T WTF e 12 58 37 PM D 25 26 27 28 29 30 1 Time Zone 2 3 4 5 5 mm A Mouse 9 10 11 12 13 Jus bional diy adjust clock for daylight saving Fre q 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 gi Z 30312 3 4 5 Apply 50 Remove Storage Stylus Systgm Teklogi Total Recall Volume 8 Wreless Ee Y TE Control Panki Date Time Pro A ke CIA gt Start TekTem LEE Checkbox Dropdown Menu Butto 58 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual c 18 Nov 2004 A b n A Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE NET Using A Dialogue Box TEKLOGIX f Exec E184 wu 154 SS 81 Disp A MLAGS4 B1 gt c as IP Address Name Servers An IP adare an be automatically assigned to this computer If your network does not automatically assign address IP addresses ask your network 7 administrator for an address Subnet Mask and then type it in the space F provided Button Textbox Supervisor amp Start TekTerm PTXWLAGS46B1 Figure 4 16 Navigating Dialogue Boxes Dialogue boxes contain one or more of the following elements Tab A tab separates different elements of a dialogue box Tap on a tab to display t
130. 4 49 LCD FD6 E EPSON GPIO 0 LCD re 4 TP amp 64 O M Q GPIOC e 46 45 e 1CD FDi7 7 y 7784 ve EE GND GND o SDIO_CLK e 5 Pax TP863 k VGH EN 48 47 DRDY Sr ebe EPSON GPIO 1 DRDY F e pee TPB62 50 49 e GND GND e Tec BUS SW SDIO Do e TUA VGL EN 52 51 EC SDA SW M 4 a EPSON GPIO 2 IeC SDA SW S SDIO D1 e 8 nam Macao e GND GND K e SDIO D2 e KS MO GPIOA 56 55 1c SCL SW C een te MQ GPIOA lec SCL SW SDIO wP 10 58 57 K e WP e Ke e GND GND e Bees Ma GPIOB 60 59 LCD TYPE MQ GPIOB LCD TYPE SDIO CD 12 e 62 e e e o GND GND e 13 un Ma GPIOC 64 63 een TP346 Ma GPIOC NC e 14 ure 66 65 1 e GND HEATER POWER o kd e lt HEATER_POWER e Dess Fd VES THER e LCD THERM 68 67 e can 0367 d LCD TEMP HEATER POWER 1 95621 1 95621 C310 1P774 19776 TP1150 1P777 TP778 1P779 TP780 TP781 e 16 na e 70 69 100N 100N 9003428 TPB25 TP340 GND HEATER POWER A 120 120 100 gt 72 71 2 sov 2 am 2 80 20 Se 1 1 e GND NC i gt Treat e 50V PWM CCFL DIM e 74 73 PWM CCFL DIM 25V 76 75 COFL EN CCFL EN 25V e E E 78 7 TPB28 e GND 25V e 80 79 1 e GND 25V LCD HEATER CTL 82 8t LCD HEATER CTL e HEATER CTRL sv LJ S DIO SOCKET 84 83 e GND 25V TP827 86 85 e GND 25V e 1 88 87 e GND 45V d ANALOG CCFL DIM e So 89 TP332 ANALOG CCFL DIM NC TOUCH ns 92 91 3V3 STANDBY e e SVS STANDBY au m c89 e 94 93 al E GND 43va 3 96 95 TP_DCLK 1 Ka e GND 3V3 TP i0 ap SCH DTB PU DRIVE 98 97 TP DCLK d DTB PU DRIVE TP DCLK
131. 4 P14_D12 P70_TXD2_SDA_TAOOUT 28 POS EXT SCAN M EXT_SCNR_ENA 73 PIS D13 INT3 P7 RXD2 SCL TAOIN TBSIN 2 POS MOTION DETECT 72 pig pi4 INT4 P72 CLK2 TAIOUT 26 LOW ENERGY LATCH gt KBD IQ n P17 DIS INTS E P73 CTS2 RTS2 ran 25 4 LOW_ENERGY E 24 ROGAR T aen a0 5 P74_TA20UT 3V3_STANDBY eR CFG Ok 69 o P75_TA2IN 23 R179 97232 SRETNE P21 A m Ge de 3MHZ6864 5 CFG DATA 68 as PE PWR SYNC CLK pi ZS 22R1 Ma in 5 P77_TA3IN 2 BATT FAULT 2196 0 0680 ai Bear AST_ASIC 87 P28 A3 3 d e 2 1 COREVDD_EN EX Pa SEHE e FPGA CFG 2 19 E E 3 RTC_SUPPLY T PM MO 2 ren TA4OUT 20 20M tne NW H S E RTC_IROB 65 P25 AS re man 18 ENABLE 32KHZ Eod 3V3 STANDBY T m R228 GND 64 18 CORE EN Va a P26 A6 res INTO EXT SCAN T j L Ki gess mms z ava 7 CFLEN a poy a S peg int 1 EXT SONR sos Sen NC7SZ125P5X 2 E ed TARJ 2 PB4 INT2 18 POWER ON 115 ES on e Lr us 3V3 STANDBY TDO CPU 61 E S P30 AB o 18V RV5C386A 3V3_STANDBY 9 es mn c17 c16 p CE me 59 6 97365 1 xs 97365 1 R230 3V3 STANDBY R46 w PM AS D fs fe uo a 97320 5 PB6 XCOUT Ka ksi vob a R156 TCK 58 E 15 15 9 Lesen 10i lt 97296 AK mam g 8 sw 2 SV 2 0063W meo 1oko vew TRST 57 gesait A POT KON um EOS 97296 0 063w ZS E 2 gt lt gt 10K0 an TDI 56 e 5 EXT SCNR DATA 2 3V3 STANDBY v 8 RP o P34 AS P90 TBOIN CLK3 ap oscout a 3 Som E 55 4 wl me 5 P35_A13 P91_TB1IN_SIN3 Se p EN oc ooh TP56 O S4 1 Dx P36 A14 ro TB
132. 525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 143 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Lock Messages 6 7 1 Lock Messages When information is transmitted to the host computer the keyboard locks to prevent further data entry until the 8525 receives a reply A locked state is indicated by either LOCK B base or LOCK H host in the lower left corner of the display When the reply is received by the 8525 the lock message disappears and the keyboard can be used again 6 7 8 Control Commands A group of lt CTRL gt key commands can be used within TESS to dictate how the 8525 will operate under a variety of conditions lt CTRL gt lt P gt Reprints the last print page sent from the host This key combination will not print anything if a print page from the host was not previously received at the 8525 vehicle mount e lt CTRL gt lt S gt Displays the 8525 status continuously Below is a sample status line as it might appear at the bottom of your screen jOCk B Lock H fld enh application name e lt CTRL gt lt T gt Displays the 8525 status with the terminal number instead of the name joCk B Lock H rep terminal nn e CTRL lt H gt Displays a menu of available hosts 6 7 9 Resetting A TESS Session Resetting a TESS session requires that lt CTRL gt C be pressed three times within a two second period to generate the RESET User request message e Press and hold down the lt CTRL gt k
133. 6lO P4 BD20 P B alo pig B6lO P3 e 4 CB RFUA7 s sPIOW N22 gato wes D4 Belo_p2 P2 e lt CB PAR d POE N21 paio N21_VREF B6lO NS e lt CB BLOCK gt PWE N20 gato Noo B6lO Wo e lt CB_PERR gt Nig oa ep No Pap NB DGND A1 A22 B2 821 03 C20 J9 J10 411 J12 J13 J14 BRIGUNS e S SESTO PWAIT Ni9 DGND K9 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 L9 L10 L11 L12 L13 L14 o Pap Ve DGND M9 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 N9 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 Pap N2 VREF e CB GNT we MET ase ues Fay DGND P9 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 Y3 Y20 AA2 AA21 AB1 AB22 GER iols16 M20 7 E PO M20 VCC INT J7 J16 P7 P16 R7 R16 77 T8 T9 T14 TI5 T1 B lo Ms 7 e s GB DEVSEL ASIC CSS wa VCC_INT ES E18 F6 F17 67 68 69 G14 615 616 47 H16 E B3lO us Kaart B6IO_M4 e e CB INT BTS MIB eo Mig DVDD_5V P5 V6 W13 Belo ma M3 VCC_BO F7 F8 F9 F10 610 611 eid Ma TROY e F EE VCC_B1 F13 F14 F15 F16 G12 G13 gt MRDY 122 TP191 Ba10_122 VCO_B2 617 417 J17 K16 K17 L16 mee m MWE Pl gas ai TP546 S SEN VCC_B3 M16 N16 N17 P17 R17 T17 TP603 TP156 120 Ne B210_120_IRDY VCC_B4 T12 T13 U19 U14 U15 U16 WE LiB co NC B210_L18 VCC_B5 T10 T11 U7 U8 U9 U1O B7IO_L5 e CB CLK __ ASIG_0S5 147 Nc L Bao Li7 M ero L4 H e CB FRAME MOE K22 ke22 blo oz ero L3 IRbv 3 e lt CB IRDY Nc 2l_ Bao kei vREF B7IO L1 K20 gt be B210_K20_D3 NO CONNECT A2 A6 A12 A13 A14 B11 B16 C2 C8 09 D1 D4 710_K5 E MBREQ eel molo 2 NO CONNECT D18 D19 E13 E17 E19 F11 G2 G22 H21 J1
134. 7 R546 _ R545 R544 R543 R542 R541 R540 R539 R538 R5397 L R53 R535 4K70 4K70 lt gt 4K70 4K70 4K70 lt gt 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 lt lt 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 lt 4K70 lt 4K70 4K70 lt 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 lt 4K70 4K70 lt 4K70 lt 4K70 4K70 lt 4K70 4K70 lt 4K70 gt 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 lt 4K70 lt 4K70 4K70 lt 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 4K70 lt 4K70 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97208 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97208 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97208 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 97288 63MW J eau 63MW 63MW su sun 63MW 63MW eau 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 6aMW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW au au 63MW 63MW mua G3MW 63MW 63MW 63MW 63MW am 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 mam 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 J 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 A 1 A 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 A 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 e e e e e
135. 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer Specifications Size e 298mm W x 117mm H x 292mm L 11 W x 45 8 Hx 11 L Weight 4 3 kg 9 5 Ibs Operating System Windows CE NET 4 2 Processor And Memory e 400MHz ARM RISC 400 MIPS 32KB instruction 32K B data cache e on board RAM 128mByte SDRAM e on board ROM 64 MByte FLASH e Internal power supply 10 90VDC designed for forklift power e 12 6V Li Ion standard battery for brown out e Advance Smart Battery Built in fast charger e 1 week real time clock backup C 18 Nov 2004 x e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 243 Chapter 8 Specifications 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer Specifications Communication Ports e One Tether port with one RS232 serial port decoded scanner printer undecoded scanner port USB host port e One Port with DB9 plug RS232 e One Port with High density socket one RS232 serial comm port 1 USB device port 2USB host ports Environmental Standard Temperature Unit Temperature Range Storage Temperature Rain And Dust Resistance Humidity 3 axis Vibration 3 axis Shock Freezer Unit Temperature Range Storage Temperature Rain And Dust Resistance Humidity 3 axis Vibration 3 axis Shock Approvals Safety EMC 20 C to 60 C 4 F to 140 F 35 C to 70 C 31 F to 158 F IEC 529 classification IP66 5 95 RH non condensing 1 5g RMS PSD 4 500 Hz 30g 11ms saw t
136. 8525 ignores password echo if Password Echo is set to Y otherwise skip to step 7 7 8525 looks for Login Failed in next transmission from host 8 Login successful or Login failed and return to step 1 QNA dell Login Prompt When the unit receives the string assigned to this parameter it will respond with Login Login The unit responds with this string when it receives a Login Prompt VA c 18 Nov 2004 h k d Prompt e De lt e Password Prompt When the 8525 receives this string it responds with a Password Password The computer responds with this string when it receives a Passwo Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 179 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Host Conn Password Echo When this parameter is set to Y the host will echo data back to the terminal after receiving a Password Login Failed When the unit receives this string it assumes that the login attempt has failed and returns to the Enter Pmpt Func Key Remap In ANSI each function key has a default string associated with it When a function key is pressed the corresponding default string is sent to the host The Func Key Remap table allows these function key character sequences to be redefined F1 F2 F 3 F28 F29 F30 1B Ap 1B Ap 1B Ap 1B 5B 1B 5B 1B 5B r 07 Func Key Remap 50 21 52 34 34 34 32 33 34 E E
137. 9001584 ES 3 6 BEEPER SIGNAL 1 o e 2 e 1 92525 BEEPER VOLUME o 2 MMBT3904 H C159 40V 225MW 1 97372 3 10N 2 8 15 R33 TP510 Ral2 bom 2 16v 97264 TZ 97296 97296 e 475 Tray 9 AND 10K0 10K0 1 0 063W s e 0 063W 0 063W C160 E 1 ES ES 1 97372 RADIO HEATER e 19 EN_RADIO_HEATER T Ia e 1 i e e BEEPER OUT 15 2 16V e o n a R146 3 C109 So 97256 D22 1 97371 12 GND a 92642 A 100P e Z aen MMBD914 15 EI 70V 225MA 2 50 18 di 14 wc BUS 15 a COMMON 7 lec Sc 16 DEN 12C_SDA 17 mm 3V3 STANDBY 5 GND e 19 3 3V STANDBY C145 1 20 97871 e GND ci 100N In 115 T u Y A x y 18 Nov 2004 IGNATURES DATE RADIO HEATER BOARD E m INTERFACE NGT TEAM 2003 PSION TEKLOGIX IN d MISSISSAUGA ONTARIO PME T SCHEMATIC 8525 30 AIN BOARD INPUT POWER KEYBOARD INTERFACE ROJENG Er Bae fot J 008014 E ECONS prer 22 FIN FE SHEET OF REL DATE 19 22
138. 9002982 Ze e can C120 C121 C122 2 50V o S cA 94543 30V 6A w TPLNKS 1 9000520 1 9000520 1 9000520 1 9000520 men Tease e A omm Tm 2pm oo m mo m m om gt C MMBD914 ay ag Gel 30V 6A D52 97375 wl R7 cot 2 6v3 2 evs o es 2 eva 1 1 70V 225MA 1 1 wml o e e D 8 T ges 1NO L 9000532 1 9001581 Vs R MBRS140T3 10 lt 105K 33P 28 22 2 1A 40v EN 0o06sw 15 5V PWR OFF e e RUN SS1 BGI e 1 H 10 S lt 1 nm FDS6912A CL e e 2 Joss 50V 18 1 e e SVA PWR OFF e e 1 RUN SS SENSE LS 22R1 FDS6912A 1 D33 i SENSE1 41 _ 0 068W 94543 R86 RB D20 C304 C305 31 ZA MBROSSOT SVS STANDBY _ 97320 97320 92642 1 97871 1 97871 SENSEI SENSE1 ROUTE AS CRITICAL SIGNAL PAIR 2 30V 00MA 100K 100K MMBD914 100N 100N 0 063W 0 063W 70V_225MA B B 1 Ens ES 1 2 tev 2 tev VOSENSEI bk oan vm TP293 TP324 D 1P279 P Sg 3 o gt 97236 30V 35 Oosaw f e e o e 33R2 6 11 1 1 1 TP286 0 063W EE e 3V_5V_PWROK 27 zeeee a Se ae E TG2 e e PY a 20 17 DESS e e FDS6961A l2 3000522 R152 TP278 TP284 TP285 PWR SYNC CLK gt e 3 puun Ln w e Fo 100N TS 20 4 025W y ava 2 2 20 d E 2 5A MAX 3A ABS PEAK PELFETR 50v E EE RIPPLE 10mV 80 1 2 80 1 2 u 5 e e e VW e e e e e mE cu SLF12555T 100M3R4 8 2 737e S et a50 Loewe Wa ne MBROS30T TP927 R592 TP294 9000537 e 1 fr 277 aov soma 1 S 97453 30V_3A5 c33 6 ORO 8 1 pst 97375 e Ri6o a ORB C60 C123 C124 TP281 TP296 aech SGND sw L5 o 20 e 3 0 063W AR 93615 1NO
139. A N VEA RELEASED Installation Instruction SIZE DRAWING NO REV U engdata RELEASE TEKLOGIX PRODUCTS DO Blank 1008407 Nov 2004B forms Blank Forms Word Doc InstallationInstruction doc SHEET 11 OF 1 2 Mississauga Ontario A Special Component Detail 8525 8530 VEHICLE MOUNT COMPUTER S CELL Designator PCB1 1008011 PCB 8525 MAIN LOGIC BOARD Y CONI 9003441 CONNECTOR DOUBLE SLOT CARDBUS EJECTOR REVERSE TYPE 2MM STANDOFF 1 SCR1 SCR4 9002961 SCREW M2 X 20 PAN HEAD 4 M A N B A R D SCR5 SCR6 9001802 SCREW M2 X 8 CHEESE PHIL 2 NUT1 NUT6 95257 NUT M2 PCMCIA 6 WRS1 WSR4 9004474 M2 LOCKWASHER STAINLESS STEEL FLAT INTERNAL TOOTH 4 WSR5 WSRB 9004475 WASHER STAINLESS STEEL M2 FLAT 4 ADH1 ADH4 94751 ADH SILICON RTV WHT RTV162 0 001 ADHS ADH10 92075 LOCTITE 0 001 LBL1 95565 LABEL 0 25 X 0 25 WHITE 1 LBL2 LBL3 1008087 LABEL BLANK PCA 0 25 X1 0 WHITE MYLAR 0 002 THICK 2 SIW1 1002024 SOFTWARE 8525 PCON IMAGE 1 SIW2 1002025 SOFTWARE 8525 BOOST IMAGE 1 SW 3 1002023 SOFTWARE 8525 CE V4 2 OTT IMAGE 1 SCHEMATIC INDEX DOCI 1008010 DOCUMENT ARTWORK PCB 8525 30 MAIN LOGIC BOARD o Page 2 PXA255 CPU DOC2 1008018 DOCUMENT PCB ASSEMBLY 8525 30 MAIN LOGIC BOARD 0 Docs 1008014 DOCUMENT SCHEMATIC 8525 30 MAIN LOGIC BOARD o Page 3 SPRAM
140. A e e e e e e Na se BYPASS FOR I O BANKO Sr BYPASS FOR I O BANK4 VCC INT ava ver B1 3va VCC B5 COM PACT FLASH ue PCMCIA SLOT 0 POWER C264 C263 C262 C261 C232 C233 C201 C250 C235 C236 0234 C254 1 een 1 9787 1 97871 1 gas 1 een 1 een 1 97871 1 97372 1 97871 97871 1 97871 1 97872 100N 100N 100N 10N 100N 100N 100N 10N 100N 100N 100N 10N Ap BE 115 15 115 B 15 15 B 215 215 15 2 iev 2 iev 2 e 16V 2 e 2 eu 2 eu 2 tev 2 tev 2 tev 2 tev 2 er 4 A n e e e e D D LEE ee a Nd So BYPASS FOR I O BANKI ES BYPASS FOR I O BANKS j S POPULATE FOR ASIC ava sv 1 1 1 TP125 R397 1 e e l 97453 cvece ver INT ava ve B2 VCC B6 A ORO fpe 1 0 063W 1 C229 C435 C455 C228 15 1 menu em 1 97372 1 9787 AA 100N 10N 10N 100N e e e e e i e ele f 15 15 15 215 C268 C267 C266 C265 C238 C239 C237 C251 0241 C242 C240 0265 2 dev 2 tev 2 ez tev 1 een 1 9771 1 97871 1 97372 1 een 1 een 1 een 1 97372 1 men 1 men a 97871 1 97372 1 1 100N 100N 100N 10N 100N 100N 100N 10N 100N 100N 100N 10N l 1 e e Ap Ap 115 15 115 B 15 15 215 215 215 15 tev o d6V 2 tev 2 tev 2 e 2 iev 2 16v 2 iev 2 tev 2 16v 2 16v 2 tev 1 1 a m z 9 TPS 4 t 4 37 9000979 e e e e e e 1 Se 1 TP118 TP117 DEES CB_VCC sz BYPASS FOR I O BANK2 Ez BYPASS FOR I O BANK6 1 97453 1 A n ORO ava voc e e 1 0 063W T 1 I E I j CB 3V3EN e e vec 1 2 E ver INT ava VCC B3 VCC Er i CB_5VEN gt e e CC B 7
141. A20 35 Mi R 34 BA20 e BED A21 38 Als Bib 39 BA21 A22 41 xis Ge 40 BA22 A23 42 at es 43 BA23 A24 45 Ki dig 44 BA24 A25 46 Aij Bia 47 BA25 ava A 37 BEB s weng VDD36 DGND12 48 DGND24 vents oe Nov 2004 1 8 004 TONATUAES DATE Gd AUG 4 NGT TEA 2003 PSION TEKLOGIX IN um MISSISSAUGA ONTARIO PME ME SCHEMATIC 8525 8590 MAII IC BOARD ADDRESS amp DATA BUS SWITCHES ROJENE Er De Yona a 008014 E ECONS prer 2 FIM FE SHEET OF REL DATE 4 22 B c D 3V3 STANDBY a R231 Hed SERIAL PROG e PCON E 0 063W RST PCON e e PROGRAM PCON CE PROG TP90 geng I2C ACCELERATOR SCLK_PROG 0341 cx gt SS Res 1 S2 1 97871 97296 xa 10N toon 1 SII oko 3V3 STANDBY ABNO2 7 5729MHZ 16 1000 SOS ay SR Bb SUE SM a 5 2 16v RIOR TERMINAL SELECTION H 7 So 2 Un R R 9 5V PWR OFF 9000568 ava STANDBY e 2 RSR E 3V3 STANDBY LTC1694IS5 C205 R395 9003331 PERIPHERAL CONTROLLER R364 TP83 97871 ps C72 cn 97272 eo m Bn 97453 gt e 1 97370 1 97370
142. ADS B39 CAD6 A39 PC_D13 TP674 1 C40 21 zie 100N NC7so4MS ees TRL o CB ADS 86 n 82 De tev 2 116 10K0 1 BS CADS ASIPC_D6 S hs 97871 d use 15 eris pas Ries R424 100N y 5 NC7S86M5X ze 87 12 S2 Di4 97296 97296 mem 2 115 9002048 gt 5 BS E lt CB_RFU4O ES Ap Da 10K0 10K0 tev 15 CB ae CB AD7 58 13 S2 D7 mas NS i A mes O B6 CAD7 AGIPC D7 am n 2 CB AD amp 89 n S2 Di5 Y 5 NC7S02M5X e abate CB AD7 BAT CADS A41 PO_DIS q E d CB ADS CB CBEO 3 B7 CCBE0 AIC Cp 15 CF_CD1 e T 3 TP814 n d S2_CE1 X CB ADS CB_AD10 91 i A 16 Se e e 2 ds mes O B42 CAD10 A42 PC_ CE2 GER aig CB AD10 8 anv 92 ep un Z o 3 1 Som CB ap CB ADS 33 Gaam ABIPC Aug 18 S2 A10 Se 3V3 SWITCHED 1 C8 ver 94 19 M Tem O CB ADi2 B43iCvS1 Ann VS1 Em e Tas CB_AD13 CB Ani 95 B9 CAD11 Aa op 20 CF PC OE 3V3 SWITCHED 1 ca 1 SABE S A 97871 ADA B44 CAD13 A44 PC_ IORD S2 IORD 100N TP822 E U72 2 115 CB wer CB_AD12 97 BioicADi2 AloPC Aii 22 S2 An TP337 CB_AD15 R589 98139 tev TP823 men a 5 97296 NC7S32M5X 1 BASICADIS A45 PC_ IOWR S2 IOWR 5 A CB ADi6 10K0 Se al R291 TPBA4 O PER m di mm 0 063W 1 97296 1 B11 CAD14 Aug A9 24 __ Gg j I CB ADi7 11 J PAT 10K0 TP847 O 700 um 5 P 11 1 l ep 100 oun 2 o S2 OE e e i CB ADiB DES 19960 CB ADI6 101 26 S2 A17 5 Sepe CB ADi9 BAGICAD16 mepo Au E maen R220 1 CB CBE 102 gt 27 S2 AB con BI2 0CBE1 AiziPc As Z COMPACT FLASH PCMCIA SLOT 0 CARD ENABLE AN E
143. Annex VIII 4 Deviations from the Test Specification None VA 18 Nov 2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD TEST REPORT S No RFI EMCE1 RP46573JD02A Page 10 of 30 Issue Date 05 November 2004 Test Of Psion Teklogix Inc Vehicle Mount Terminal Model 8525 To 95 54 EC 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII 5 Operation of the EUT During Testing 5 1 Operating Conditions The EUT was tested in a normal laboratory environment During testing the EUT was powered using a 24 0V 10 DC supply with a ripple voltage of less than 1 596 5 2 Operating Modes During testing the EUT was operated in the following mode s Mode 1 Active A Bluetooth link was established between the EUT and laptop Also Pinging of data from EUT to laptop over the 80211B Wireless LAN 5 3 Configuration and Peripherals During testing the EUT was configured in the following way Please see Schematic Diagram 001 in Appendix 2 VA 18 Nov 2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD TEST REPORT S No RFI EMCE1 RP46573JD02A Page 11 of 30 Issue Date 05 November 2004 Test Of Psion Teklogix Inc Vehicle Mount Terminal Model 8525 To 95 54 EC 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII 6 Summary of Test Results 6 1 Summary of Tests Radiated Narrowband Emissions Annex VIII Complied Radiated Broadband Emissions Annex VII Complied 6 2 Location of Tests All the measurements described in this report were performed at the
144. BUFFER Wu 7 e ROJENE coru D enim er TP846 TP547 S2 PULL UPS 008014 E EM AS EST Som THER FIRE SHEET OF ES REL DATE 6 22 ava sv BYPASS CAPS FOR 5V TOLERANT l O BANKS E Caes C226 caz 1 een 1 97872 1 sem 1 978 100N 10N 100N 10N 115 15 15 15 EY 2 iev 2 tev 2l dV 2 eV 4 MS ee e C600 C601 C602 C603 Sw See TPs 1 menu 97871 1 men 97871 poo von 100N 100N 100N TP116 an E er vcc 115 B 15 215 2 iv 2 iev 2 tev 2 tev n u DE E veo E e l L Ev e 7 KR A E ES 3 gt CF 3V3EN cra Zz M z oam gt cno a 7 FAULT 4 no GND al R58 R57 97320 97320 sb 100K 100K 0 063 0 063W E E VCC INT ava vcc_Bo ava VCC B4 Na Na e e e e e C260 0259 C258 0257 C208 C220 221 C249 C378 C222 C223 C224 C253 1 een 1 een 1 97871 1 97972 1 een 1 een 1 een 97372 94054 1 1 een 1 een 1 97871 1 97372 100N 100N 100N 10N 100N 100N 100N 10N 1U0 100N 100N 100N 10N 215 115 215 15 115 15 118 15 10 15 15 15 15 2 tev 2 tev 2 dev 2 tev 2 dev 2 dev 2 tev 16V 16V 2 2 tev 2 wv 2 tev o d V A 4
145. C 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII PHT 46573JD02 004 View of EUT and Loom ENEX 18 Nov 2004
146. C 128 To successfully scan this type of bar code EAN UCC must be enabled set to ONT EAN UCC bar codes include group separators and start codes Field Size Chars Refer to the description beginning on page 119 for details 5 9 2 3 EAN 13 Settings Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable EAN 13 or off to disable it Include Country If this parameter is enabled set to ONT the country code is included with the decoded bar code data Indude Check If this parameter is enabled set to ON the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data Addendum Important Before Addendum can take effect the Short Code parameter in the Options menu see page 116 must be enabled set to ON An addendum is a separate bar code supplementary to the main bar code This parameter provides three options Disabled Optional and Required Depending on the value chosen for this parameter an addendum is recognize or ignored When Addendum is set to Disabled the scanner does not re without an addendum Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 121 Chapter 5 Configuration EAN 8 Prefix Suffix Chars Prefix Char This character if non zero is added before a successfully decoded bar code Press the key you want to insert in the dialogue box attached to this parameter The ASCII Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed Pressing the lt ESC gt key in
147. Ces 3 4 4 oc m B WITCHE LCD_CS3 d 2 D10 26 n Ze 27 BD10 x DH 29 AG Bit 28 pp N74 f QS32XL384Q1 D12 30 AT Se E BD12 95191 u79 E D13 33 re Bis 32 BD13 25 0 BA 25 0 2 L D14 35 Ae En 34 BD14 aj 3 m Se 2 BAD Ce S Au 4 B 5 pa BED 100N a 7 n E 6 BA2 2 ap eu A3 8 9 BAS gt D15 38 39 Bp15 did P 3 A15 B15 m m iss x D 10 BAS NO7SZ11P5X Dig a A16 B16 4 BDI6 5 9002058 MQ1188 CS2 1 4 piz x A17 B17 49 BDIT e BEA PCE1 3 4 Dig 5 A18 B18 44 BDI8 pee P D19 46 fi Bis 47 BD19 AS 15 j 5 14 BAS 7 ava as e 17 BAG Ka AS B6 m 2 e BEB 36 NI oae 18 BAT VDD36 e A B7 BAT PCM IN DGND12 48 Aal 20 21 BAB GE VDD48 B B8 BA8 S7 a 23 Ze p 22 BA9 95191 QS32XL384Q1 U81 e BEC ava D20 3 2 BD20 AD Bo A10 26 ada ud 27 _ Bang D21 4 5 BD21 ae B1 BI An 29 Bii 28 BAM EA JS z A2 B2 __Bp22 A12 30 AB m E BA12 Se Ss Des AS B3 8 Oe A13 33 m Bis 32 BAIS pal TP137 5 NCTSPOBPSX a D24 n 10 BD24 bs AS B4 Au 35 ada ius 34 Bang 4 1 sen e e BER e BED D25 15 14 BD25 AS BS BD ais 38 Ais D 39 paus D26 16 17 BD26 I 6 B6 B026 _ Al6 a PS Ele 40 Baue D27 19 18 BD27 A7 B7 BDE7 al 42 A m 43 BA17 D28 20 21 BD28 Ap B8 al 45 P De 44 BAIS D29 28 22 BD29 A9 B9 BDe9 al 46 S i on 47 Baus is ava e BEC 37 BE 5 T VDD36 zi e DGND12 48 D30 26 re i 27 BD30 PES VDD48 D31 29 nS EY 28 BD31 30 A12 B12 t 3a A13 B13 z
148. Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Moving Between Split Screens Once you ve indicated how you want to split the screen in the Type parameter e Use the DOWN arrow key to move the cursor to the View IDs parameter e For each application you want to display type the letter corresponding to the application For example suppose you want to split the screen into two vertical segments with the Parameters menu in the left pane of the screen and a TESS session in the right pane In the Display Menu the letter A represents Parameters and B represents TESS The Type and View ID values would be represented as follows 042 Split screen Type 2 Way View IDs AB e Press ENTER To display the split screen on the 8525 Press lt CTRL gt lt DOWN gt arrow 6 19 1 2 Moving Between Split Screens To move the cursor from one pane in a split screen to the next e Press lt CTRL gt RIGHT or LEFT The cursor moves in order from the left most pane to the right and from the top most pane to the bottom 6 19 1 3 Toggling Between Full amp Split Screens To toggle between a split and full screen format Press lt CTRL gt lt DOWN gt arrow The application displayed when toggling from a split to a full screen formati determined by the cursor location in the split screen For example ifhe cursor is in the pane of a split screen in which the TESS application is displayed M A CTRL D
149. Control Panel Keyboad Properties SA i aloe Figure 5 11 Recording A Macro e Type the macro sequence you want to assign to the Macro key You can type text and numbers and you can program the function of special keys into a macro KI Note Tap on the Stop Recording button at any time to suspend the process When you ve finished recording your macro sequence press the key sequence lt CTRL gt lt ALT gt lt ENTER gt A new screen displays the macro sequence you created The Save Macro button is highlighted e Tap on the Save Macro button KI Note If you want to discard the macro you ve just created tap on the Discard Macro button Executing A Macro To execute a macro e Press the macro key to which you ve assigned the macro For example if you created a macro for macro key 1 press lt M1 gt to execute the macro Deleting A Macro To delete a macro e In the Macros tab tap on the macro number you want to delete c 18 Nov 2004 E a e e e Tap on the Delete Macro button 74 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Unicode Mapping 5 5 2 5 Unicode Mapping e In the Keyboard Properties dialogue box open the Unicode Mapping tab Keyboard Properties gt x Repeat Backlight One Shots Macros wey s c Unicode d Bluetooth Device Storage Start Tek
150. DATA GOMATXDATA SONUS PORT3 USB HOST PLUS PORT3 USB HOST MINUS COM2 RTS P9 e COM CTS ava COM2 CTS 30 MOTION DeTecT 31 MOTION DET COM2 EXT SW 5V COM2 EXT SW 5V 32 ES cow Exi swsv 83 __ e EXT COM2 ez cow Exr awa Eid 2 16V 5 AUX ID AUXILARY PORT ID 35 mi et vec Ka zi le Ma GND Ha o PGON A D BUS 1 PCON PGRM cio END 37 e e e 5 7 e MOTION DETECT Wd CONSOLE TXD sEL 39 CONSOLE TXD SEL 3V3 STANDBY Y A TP493 1 3V3 STANDBY 39 GND GND e des 40 9000515 PGON_PGAM e 3 NC7SZ125P5X R605 1 41 L e 97320 MTG TAB e Ki 100K Un MTG TAB 1K00 e 2 97125 TP62 Se 0 063W TP737 f s 4 E 5 Rg i A 4 IGNATURES DATE e o e O e PROGRAM PCON RAWN AUGA NGTT 2008 PSION TEKLOGIX IN 3 me MISSISSAUGA ONTARIO PME ME SCHEMATIC 8525 30 MAIN BOARD USB HUB EXT TO PORT EXTENDER BOARD mum ze A fin PCON PROG I F 008014 E EGR prer ERIM FES SHEET OF REL DATE 17 22 A B c D 3va casa c423 1 1 S72 ZE 97871 10N 100N 15 1 ss 2 2 16v TP405 16V TP364 e 4 TP407 sii i 978711 wy us7 e 1 TP406 100N 97857 15 SP3243EEA fo 16v 2 TP365 EE EXE TP373 L_2 y 61 28 109 mae S 2 18V TP377 1 TP374 C426 t TP378 S 1 27 nas EXT COM2 TP375 e NT TP363
151. Dialogue Box Input This value is compared with the decoded bar code reading If there is a match the Output string is translated into the decoded bar code Output If there is a match between the decoded bar code and the corresponding Input string the decoded bar code will be translated into the Output string This string entry parameter can be null or it may contain any combination of standard and special characters e g function keys ENTER etc Type The value chosen from this dropdown menu determines what is compared with the decoded bar code reading the beginning of decoded bar code the end of decoded bar code the entire decoded bar code or anywhere within the decoded bar code default c 18 Nov 2004 E a e e TEKTERM APPLICATION 6 1 The Tekterm Application 0 00000 00004 133 6 2 Additional Keyboard Functions o o e 133 6 2 1 Function Keys And SoftkeyS o o 133 6 2 1 1 Euncton Keys sage gb ee Re ee e x 133 6 2 1 2 Softkey Function Keys 134 6 2 2 Macro Keys 2 4 32 a a et bag ed A ea be a a Sk 134 6 3 Changing The Screen Font Size 2 llle 135 6 4 Panning The Screen Contents 135 6 5 The Task Manager Switching Between Applications 136 6 6 The Tekterm Status Area sea 22 o o e e 137 6 7 TESS Emulation s se ee ce lt lt lt RR EE A 137 67 1 Config uratioD ag ck ee xe SR eG ROS pu Ke
152. EC60825 Class 2 12 6V Lithium Ion Li Ion bag c 18 Nov 2004 A E a e 250 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual APPENDIX SUPPORT SERVICES AND WORLDWIDE OFFICES Psion Teklogix provides a complete range of product support services to its custom ers worldwide These services include technical support and product repairs Technical Support Technical Support for Mobile Computing Products is provided via e mail through the Psion Teklogix customer and partner extranets To reach the website go to www psionteklogix com and click on the appropriate Teknet link on the home page Then click on the Log in button or the Register button depending on whether you have previously registered for Teknet Once you have logged in search for the Support Request Form A 2 Product Repairs International For technical support outside of Canada or the U S A please contact your local Psion Teklogix office listed on our worldwide website http www psionteklogix com Click on the heading labelled Contacts to choose a Psion Teklogix technical support representative closest to you Canada U S A Canadian and U S customers can receive access to repair services by ee the toll free number below or via our secure website see Technical Supporta EL Note Customers calling the toll free number should have their sion Teli customer number or trouble ticket number available Voice
153. EET OF REL DATE 5 22 B c D c D A B he d Fi 2 E o e k E o 3va Bu 2 z E E u w 8 El E 8 8 5 8 85 PII D 5 el el g i alg R55 ale E m EI a D D D a UE 8 p 97320 9 Li 7 100K b TP109 TP108 TP107 TP106 TP105 Ed me i e P Edi m d m Es E e N N P E S2_VS 2 1 CFG CLK Cro DONE CFG DATA CFG INIT PROGRAM CFG INIT e SER S2 BVD 2 1 SET DRIVE DONE OPTION IN FPGA ASIC CFG A Oklk Kuh ED S2 A 259 FLOAT CF SLOT FOR PCMCIA INTERFACE SHA ava Zed a 838 agSassss2zss s z sg sgJusg23295 da 5 gzzzszs5zs iz al J so Je deal Sal El g 7S2 OARD DETECTED RST ASIC Dm hs ogg Es EE Es s Bc Ds s M HK E URGE e Ke IOS e s eS mp 0 ada ao B BB 445 8 5 4 4 8 ora amp 91 2992 a a al al al af al al al a a al a a Ida a ada 223 al a 2a al a al a a al a al 8 al 8 9 al al al a al al al al al a 10K0 ASIC_REQ CB_CD 2 1 ASIC_ACK LE 2 2 a 8 x a g z a s s S S a g gl S a g EISES E22 z a S 2z2 X Si z 2 z 5 e 2 e o 2 o BS e ol 2 L A 5 5 3 2 3 2 S 2 2 5 S 5 2 5 5 2 5 zx zzz Ez 5 4 2 5 5 5 5 i 5 S 3 5 2 5 5
154. ENS e GND 4 over e P TN LMC7215lM5 97296 mnm 9000040 P ben 10K0 TUER ac b ep 4 97296 0 063W CG SCL 3 5 N a R48 S 10K0 H set w e e VBAT MAINAN e o 97320 1 C208 1 0 063W BAT PRES e Ji 1 cea 100K 97871 E a GND 1 97975 C30 1 a55 al Rn 7 0 063w 100N ew 3 e o e 97871 R140 BSS84 97320 E 2 115 2 10 100N 97831 9000501 100K kb Ka 50v 118 2 al R198 ge 301K RS 50V 350MW 0 063W a R73 C299 16V 9004496 Q 063W 97872 2 E 97634 320 1 97871 511K n E Ki FDV303N 100N ek 7 0 063W 1 0 063W 25V_350MW 87 S87 y 0 0 B m Y 1 H Zeg d 3 11 2 16V gt 3 CELL 9V75 3 ei TP262 TP263 ZS e e 1 2 hd 1 TP255 C e bs 97296 UB al i 97 10K0 LMC7215lM5 1 R6 o 1 i 1 0 063W 9000940 P 9004495 M faw zd gt i 3 28K 8 D oe TP230 KEE sl Mew v e 1 z o mase lt LOW ENERGY d e e A SS ee ri e 1 8 N O 2004 b z AU 015 5 b 97634 TE Cam IGNATURES DATE FDV303N wo Se J RAWN Mas A gt 137k mA Dit NGT TEAM 2003 PSION TEKLOGIXIN 0 063W ar 93285 E a dev BATS4 ge A MISSISSAUGA ONTARIO M 30V_200MA y ACPRES Ly EE Te ME SCHEMATIC 8525 30 M1AIN BOARD e K POWER MANAGEM CHARGER y ROJENE coru a t Par Vendi I LOW ENERGY DETECTOR CHARGER V_ ADJUST 00014 E ES Som prer FIRE SHEET OF REL DATE 13 22 B c D
155. ES 18 Nov 2004 IGNATURES DATE SR AUG 4 NGT TEA 2004 PSION TEKLOGIX IN no MISSISSAUGA ONTARIO Ga mE DOC SCHEMATIG 8528 31 LOGIC BOARD ROJENG crei xem Bare fontis er 008014 E ECONS prer 2 FMRE SHEET OF REL DATE E2 1 22 A A FL4 CORE von 98136 ZE CORE VDD BLM21A1028 200MA 1 Yi CPU PLL VCC e e o e kd L e e e o C134 cree C179 PXA255 1 94054 1 97871 a a a a a a a a a a a a a ae a rr ra N DZ p Coen C180 1 97871 Ci78 Ci77 C176 0175 1u0 100N 1 97871 1 97871 100N 1 97e71 1 97871 1 S970 1 gen 10 B 100N 100N B 100N 100N 100N 100N 2 e zl tev s 3 g a a g el o n e 2 g ol al 2 ol al al n o a a al a l o 15 B 2 tev 15 15 B B us e 2 22 2332zzzzzuEzuHExxuxrxzzzuzz2zx22zx2 2 16V 2 16V 2 16V 2 16V 2 16V 2 16V 97871 100N e e e e e e E Ww sS Ka CORE VDD 7 1 2 Ut 00000000 s gt Te kal 9003333 5 NO7SPOBPSX ZUM A alla ee ww Ir ez secessprszro2252 89222292955 Eaa s a ge s NAND FLASH BUS 1 A ava ava 4 CLK 3M6864 CORE Sp 3MHZ6864 N 2 lt aj R203 8398z9g22 22222z22235222222z3 258532223 mm R204 a 97296 15 Z 2 2 22 X X X X X X OX X ox X S 3 3 i 3 3 3 SA AE Ae la 97296 10K0 Pu voc 222 E Sass X A E 29888808898 B3 NAND CHIP ENABLE Hr e nm 899888288 L DD15 GP73 0 063W 11 PLL_VSS s D ca CF
156. I Appendix 4 Photographs of EUT This appendix contains the following photographs Photo Reference Number Title PHT 46573JD02 001 Rear View of OATS Set Up PHT 46573JD02 002 Side View of OATS Set Up PHT 46573JD02 003 Side View of OATS Set Up Showing EUT PHT 46573JD02 004 View of EUT and Loom VA 18 Nov 2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD TEST REPORT S No RFI EMCE1 RP46573JD02A Page 27 of 30 Issue Date 05 November 2004 Test Of Psion Teklogix Inc Vehicle Mount Terminal Model 8525 To 95 54 EC 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII PHT 46573JD02 001 Rear View of OATS Set U I 7 8 J m 18 Nov 2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD TEST REPORT S No RFI EMCE1 RP46573JD02A Page 28 of 30 Issue Date 05 November 2004 Test Of Psion Teklogix Inc Vehicle Mount Terminal Model 8525 To 95 54 EC 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII PHT 46573JD02 002 Side View of OATS Set Up 38 Nov 2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD TEST REPORT S No RFI EMCE1 RP46573JD02A Page 29 of 30 Issue Date 05 November 2004 Test Of Psion Teklogix Inc Vehicle Mount Terminal Model 8525 To 95 54 EC 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII PHT 46573JD02 003 Side View of OATS Set Up Showing EUT RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD TEST REPORT S No RFI EMCE1 RP46573JD02A Page 30 of 30 Issue Date 05 November 2004 Test Of Psion Teklogix Inc Vehicle Mount Terminal Model 8525 To 95 54 E
157. IPv6 Support 60 00 ara we SR X eee eb 112 5 9 Scanner Properties Setup 113 5 9 1 Scanner Options 113 3 02 Bat COdeS y Ge Soo Pe Rer tee po EUR eR SRL ee 116 5 9 3 Translations Chapter 6 Tekterm Application 6 1 TheTektermApplication 133 6 2 Additional Keyboard Functions C 18 Nov 2004 6 2 1 Function Keys And Softkeys la Pg Es 133 6 2 2 Macro Keys Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 3 4 Contents 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 6 10 6 11 6 12 6 13 6 14 Changing The Screen Font Size caa wonsa iaa 135 Panning The Screen Contents oo oo o 135 The Task Manager Switching Between Applications 136 The Tekterm Status Area ea sona doe ooo a e a 137 TESS Emulation zx ai A El A Seas a erates 137 6 7 1 Configuration eA 138 6 7 2 Working With Multiple Sessions 138 6 73 The Field Typis s x cas eh E xS eG A 138 6 7 4 IBM 5250 Emulation Keys 139 67 5 Data Ehtty s s eed ets Ha ed be BAR eS E 139 6 7 6 TESS Status Message 143 6 7 7 Lock Messages gq es eek ark Gow ee poses wid e a 144 6 7 8 Control Commande 144 6 79 Resetting A TESS Session 144 6 7 I0 The Local Menu lt ac a 2 lt a dead eae x od alee m 145 6 7 11 Selecting Another Host Computer 145 6 7 12 Queuing Mode EE a LR Y eee 146 ANS Emulation 2 22 em ee Sx x E 146 6 8 1 Configuration
158. If Auto Radio Addr is set to N the value entered in the Radio Address parameter is used Refer to Radio Address in this section for details about manually assigned radio addresses N Important Ensure that all 8525s grouped in the system use the same addressing process that is if you choose to use automatic radio addressing use this addressing process for all units operating in the same system If you choose to assign radio addresses manually using the Radio Address parameter use this process for all units in the same system ch VA Radio Address The value entered in the Radio address parameter is used to identify 8525 over the radio link A unique value from 1 to 3840 must be assig for each 8525 vehicle mount computer 18 Nov 2004 162 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application System Parameters Initial RTT Round Trip Time Round trip time is the elapsed time between a vehicle mount computer transmission and an access point acknowledgement Each 8525 continuously adjusts the accept able round trip time calculating the average elapsed time over a number of trans missions If an acknowledgement takes longer to receive than the average round trip time calculated the computer will send the transmission again Because 8525s cannot calculate an average round trip time without a number of transmissions a starting point or Initial R
159. J4 K2 OY MDC NO CONNECT K18 K19 L2 L19 M2 M17 M21 N1 P1 P22 R3 7 MBGNT dil ee NO CONNECT R20 R22 U3 U18 W4 W15 W19 Y5 Y22 AA1 d RS REF a Ds NO CONNECT AA3 AA9 AATO AA11 AA16 AB7 AB8 AB12 AB14 AB21 d TP143 DQM3 J20 polo Jag 7IO Ki DaM2 n9 PRENS NOTE THE ABOVE NO CONNECTS ARE FOR THE FPGA WEG TH Dou 18 ss ES THE FOLLOWING ARE CONNECTED FOR THE ASIC PS DOMO H 2 Belo H22 Di B7IO_J2 e CB_RST H20 g A RESLA PLL_AVDD A2 PLL LOOP D4 RST_ASIC E19 PRS E E 8 Hi9 palo ue B7IO H4 VREF 4 _ e CB SERR 1 A e 1 BDz DS 210 H18_VREF B7IO_H3 TP110 TP111 3 SC G golo Get B7IO H2 e CB REQ SDCSO G0 alo Go B7IO_H1 919 oo es B7IO_G5 5 Si8 palo en B7IO G4 y BAS F22 Bolo 22 B7IO G3 mat D I B210_F21_VREF DEEN DAG D oe ron B7IO_FS DAG Fl9 goo re B7IO F4 SDRAM CTL Fig Nc F18_ pao ris B710_F3 DAC E20 goi poo B7IO_F2 R414 97232 sonas P S BA20 Sal aio se Star TP132 EE BAIS E22 polo poo B7IO E4 lla BAIS D 2 Bolo pe B7IO_E3 R415 97232 200 s 5 BAIT D pelo pei B7lo E2 VREF ES e Pd CB RFUS2 gt 22R1 CFG DATA D20 y D29_ gojo pao DIN Do E DER 11 0 063W E g t 55 2 2 E E BAJE CP go cgo gd ZS EE E E E E BEEN e lt OB OLKRUN gt spckg F416 97282 c21 9 8opPpruysPLrLterprfgbrssrshbsrfrfrry99 sgEpspsgr JERESPTSSs 29280t5kb5nhesng5osnszzz2o2g NC Belo C21 DOUT BUSY B E SS 5 x n 5 x n FF x 5 B i x S B i m 5 5 i n 5 5 S EC D SS G n Sp SS Sg SG bbbbSS SS Sgg
160. MS Those installed software products of MS origin as well as associated media printed materials and online or electronic documentation SOFTWARE are protected by interna tional intellectual property laws and treaties The SOFTWARE is licensed not sold All rights reserved IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT EULA DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE SOFTWARE INSTEAD PROMPTLY CONTACT PSION TEKLOGIX INC FOR INSTRUC TIONS ON RETURN OF THE UNUSED DEVICE S FOR A REFUND ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE This EULA grants you the following license e You may use the SOFTWARE only on the DEVICE NOT FAULT TOLERANT THE SOFTWARE IS NOT FAULT TOLER ANT PSION TEKLOGIX INC HAS INDEPENDENTLY DETER MINED HOW TO USE THE SOFTWARE IN THE DEVICE AND MS HAS RELIED UPON PSION TEKLOGIX INC TO CONDUCT SUFFI CIENT TESTING TO DETERMINE THAT THE SOFTWARE IS SUIT ABLE FOR SUCH USE e NO WARRANTIES FOR THE SOFTWARE THE SOFTWAR vided AS IS and with all faults THE ENTIRE RISK FACTORY QUALITY PERFORMANCE ACCURAG EFFORT INCLUDING LACK OF NEGLIGENCE IS WITH YOU ALSO THERE IS NO WARRANTY AGAINST INTERFERENGE2004 WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE OR AGAINST AL AY Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual l License A
161. Mode 208 Enter On Arr 207 Enter To FO 207 208 Entry Mode 208 Fcursor mode 1 40 Field mode 740 Field Order 206 Field parameters 206 Host Connection Type 795 Ign Bcode fld 208 Insert mode 140 Kbd Locked 202 keyboard lock 202 matching fields via data stream 199 milestone 202 modes edit 140 multiple sessions 175 number of columns in screen 196 number of rows in screen 196 Pages Saved 197 Port 195 query command 197 Replace mode 1 40 resetting a TESS session4 144 h Reverse video attrib 207 VA running multiple sessions 738 selecting a session 38 settings 794 209 e 18 Nov 2004 gt status message 748 4 h switching between hosts 201 e Terminal 194 Tests 200 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 15 Index Valid Numerics 208 video attributes 207 802 IQ connection 795 9010t connection 195 TESS Settings character attributes 798 character sets choosing 798 Connection Type Telnet amp TCP Direct 195 Fields parameters 206 Scanner parameters 205 screen settings 196 Test 220 Tether amp Console Port character set 2 8 peripheral devices 2 7 scan see parameters 227 Tether amp Console Ports Baud 219 Buffer 220 Data Bits 2 9 Flow Control 2 9 Input Tmo 220 Output Tmo 220 Parity 2 9 Retries 220 Stop Bits 2 9 Test 220 tethered device connecting and disconnecting 39 timeouts beacon bt 52 tn host terminal number of session 52 Total
162. ND OR CONDITIONS EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY OR SATISFACTORY QUALITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONIN FRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS LICENSOR DOES NOT WAR RANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFT WARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED FURTHERMORE LICENSOR DOES NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR RELATED DOCUMENTATION IN TERMS OF THEIR CORRECTNESS ACCURACY RELIABILITY OR OTHERWISE NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY LICENSOR OR AN LICENSOR O VI Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual License Agreement RANTIES SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU THE TERMS OF THIS DISCLAIMER DO NOT AFFECT OR PREJUDICE THE STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER ACQUIRING LICENSOR PROD UCTS OTHERWISE THAN IN THE COURSE OF A BUSINESS NEITHER DO THEY LIMIT OR EXCLUDE ANY LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY CAUSED BY LICENSOR S NEGLIGENCE Limitation of Liability UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY LOCAL LAW INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE SHALL LICENSOR ITS SUB SIDIARIES AFFILIATES OR SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING LOST PROFIT LOST DATA O
163. NR_AGK SV 16 apen KR 1 3 wy EXT SCNR TRIG 5V SEE v GND EXT SCNR SOS 5V 15 xx cos e 1 97371 100P TP414 e 15 o EN u17 amp A DD 1 Ie 9000854 de A ABA DG409DY T1 EE E mp C97 97371 2 n 100P e ENABLE ve e 1 TP434 Ko PLDN4 10 mm Be e COMI RTS nu le 9000988 O B 3 e MSQAGVIWST2 EXT SCNR ACK 5V mm GC e e Ri04 e PLDN3 13 B0 97320 TP435 S I PLDN2 7 A3 I H COM1_RX_DATA e 1 8 EXT SCNR TRIG 5V 5 wu e s7 a R103 9000988 PLODNI 4 A0 97320 s MSQABVIWST2 y 400K 0 063W 1 V a TETHER PORT e 1 sELECTO v 3 E GND usa 15 97467 We TALCX125M y EXT SCNR DATA 3 2 Raza 723xT SCNR DATA SV a 1 2 1 22R1 s 0083W e Ca21 u2 Ve 97871 97467 100N 5000982 VAs 74LCX125M E ANCASIER EXT_SCNR_TRIG 6 5 Fr 97292 cet scNR TRIG Su e Sow ve E uu 1 z d TP437 H H 22R1 8 sin AUW PLP3216S551SL2 oa SCANNER USB PLUS DE Di TP398 u54 3 97467 1 mt y 74LCX125M a SSES R586 97292 EXT SCNR SOS 5V SCANNER USB MINUS 14 s2 D2 15 e CY A T N 1 1 10 22R1 a lana 18 s1 0083W e en TP436 2 bas we s pa 10 Lees 0 SCANNER USB VA MBROSSOT u54 30V_500MA 97467 e 9 my EXT SCAN 74LCX125M e e 1 12 TETHER SEL 1 e ENS Da A lt o 1 053 C54 1 055 1 0 95621 95621 95621 1 e 8 INA A 100N 100N 100N e m 4 20 20 20 2 am 50v 2 am TP411 ep ava Ww 5 VA M TETHER SES e e 1 c5 c51 1 056 Ki 95621 95621 95621 1 0313 R16 el RIT Ss 100N 100N 100N TP439 97871 97320 97320 320
164. NSI Host Char Set 193 LU Name 2 3 LU Name Enabled 2 3 2 5 LU Name Prefix 2 5 Index M MAC address access point controller 757 MAC address 8525 151 Macro Keys 32 Macro keys accessing 134 executing amacro 74 Macros menu accessing 73 164 recording and saving 73 maintenance 8525 41 mapping keyboard Scan See 226 mapping viewport 227 match fields 138 MATM 187 Media Copy ANSI 186 memory resetting 159 menu local 45 Menu mode taskbar switching between apps 136 menus working with 53 message mask msk 1 52 messages enabling disabling next message 202 LOCK B 7 44 196 LOCK H 144 196 NEXT B 145 146 NEXT H 145 146 RESET Press Enter 137 Scan Indicator 774 scanner warning message 114 Scan Result 114 TESS status message 143 messages retransmitting 802 IQv1 xr See xr retransmissions 152 messages received rm 151 messages transmitted xm 151 milestone 202 Mixed AIAG 206 mnemonics ANSI 92 mode serial I O 203 Model 7000 Brightness 224 modifier keys 29 locking 30 One Shot Mode unlocking 30 Mod 10 Check 7 8 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 9 Index 10 Mod 10 Check Discrete 2 of 5 symbology 125 Mod 10 Check 12 of 5 symbology 124 Mod 43 Check 8 moving the display 169 196 MSI Plessey 125 msk message mask 1 52 multiple ANSI sessions 175 applications 175 hosts 145 TESS sessions 175 Multiple Area Transfer Mode MATM 187 N name servers assign
165. OGIX IN um MISSISSAUGA ONTARIO PAYO mE SCHEMATIC 8525 20 WAIN LOGIC BOARD ASIC SUPPORT ITRY ROJENE SE er 008014 E Som prer FIRE SHEET OF REL DATE 7 22 B c D c D B 3V3 SWITCHED 3V3 SWITCHED sva SUTTCHEP ays SWITCHED TP401 1 S2 D 15 0 e TP402 9003440 S2 D 15 0 TP383 oni 11232154 MINE a 5 NO7SPOSP5X CB apen ues R187 TP673 Ed m 9001584 TP O J6 B35 GND ASSIPC oppe 97296 100N KI CB apen 10K0 97296 2 15 e Tree Or 7 2 mo NS mes E 2 e CT Tm O CB AD22 7 soa apo onoi 2 o t1 u70 o A mea O CE AIS CB CDi 78 ggg CCDi A36 PC_ CD1 3 pepa N 5 NC7S02M5X 9002949 3 C8 ADO 79 Bo CADO APC Ds 4 SS SE PC CDi V CB AD2 30 Gene Gg S2 Dii 2 E ran ORANO PC_CD2 gt S2_PULL_UPS q Ss CB ADI 81 cani PERSE S2 D4 TP802 3V3_SWITCHED 1 CB AD4 82 i 7 S2 Di2 3 Sei EE pe B38 CAD4 A38 PC_D12 TIPS CB ap 83 S2 DS gt e 1 CH ADS B4 CAD3 A4PC D5 3V3 SWITCHED 9 e TPB04 SE 1 0487 1 ET ecNo 64 ons 3V3 SWITCHED 3V3 SWITCHED e 97871 1 Cab TPB05 O aang as m SED 100N 97871 u73 R620 mw 1 CB
166. OWN is pressed to display a full screen the TESS application will be displayed in the full screen e 18 Nov 2004 d 1 Ye b n 4 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 171 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Using The Asterisk As A Wild Card 6 19 1 4 Using The Asterisk As A Wild Card When a screen is split the application displayed in each pane is fixed in the View IDs parameter Using an asterisk in the View IDs parameter indicates that a particular pane in the split screen is not fixed to any particular application and can be changed as required For example suppose you want to split the screen into two vertical segments with the left pane containing the Parameters menu and the right pane containing no fixed application The Type and View IDs parameters would be completed as follows 042 Split screen Type 2 Way View IDs A To change the application displayed in the pane with no fixed application e If the cursor is not currently in the pane press lt CTRL gt RIGHT or LEFT arrow to move the cursor into the appropriate screen Press lt CTRL gt lt ALT gt lt 0 gt to display the startup Display Menu e Type the letter corresponding to the new application you want to display 6 19 2 Custom Characters Unicode KI Note The Unicode characters created here are accessible only within the Tekterm application To create Unicode
167. Ontario L5N 7J9 Canada Contact Name Mr S Dharwarkar Telephone No 1 905 812 6200 Emi sada dharwarkar teklogix com 1 1 Manufacturer s Details Company Name Psion Teklogix Inc Address 2100 Meadowvale Boulevard Mississauga Ontario L5N 7J9 Canada Contact Name Mr S Dharwarkar Telephone No 1 905 812 6200 Emai sada dharwarkar teklogix com WA 18 Nov 2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD TEST REPORT S No RFI EMCE1 RP46573JD02A Page 5 of 30 Issue Date 05 November 2004 Test Of Psion Teklogix Inc Vehicle Mount Terminal Model 8525 To 95 54 EC 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII 2 Equipment Under Test EUT The following information with the exception of the Date of Receipt has been supplied by the client 2 1 Identification of Equipment Under Test EUT Brand Name Psion Teklogix Model Name or Number 8525 Unique Type Identification ENG B TC 027 Serial Number None Stated Date of Receipt 13 September 2004 2 2 Description of EUT The equipment under test is a Vehicle Mounted Computer Terminal 2 3 Modifications Incorporated in the EUT During the course of testing the EUT was not modified VA 18 Nov 2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD TEST REPORT S No RFI EMCE1 RP46573JD02A Page 6 of 30 Issue Date 05 November 2004 Test Of Psion Teklogix Inc Vehicle Mount Terminal Model 8525 To 95 54 EC 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII 2 4 A
168. P2 to BSP9 are available for use The port is available as soon as it is activated SI Note The CH column shows the RFCOMM channel of the service IF the service is RECOMM based This information is not generally needed except for debugging purposes etiVation The Authentication and Encryption options can be changed only before RFCOMM channel number is saved in the registry Some remote evige IM y 2004 gt change their RFCOMM channel numbers when they reboot so you saved setting may not work when the remote device is rebooted In that case you mus the service and reactivate it to detect the current RFCOMM channel Chapter 5 Configuration The Server Tab Set PIN PINs can be set for each device by pressing the Set PIN button in the Devices tab or you can skip this step and try to connect to the device first N Important The remote device must have authentication enabled otherwise the PIN authentication will fail Highlight a device click on the Set Pin button and type the PIN You will receive a message either that the PIN has been successfully validated or that it has been rejected If the PIN has been validated an asterisk appears in the PIN column in the Devices list box indicating that this device has a PIN set Once a PIN is entered it is saved in the registry To remove the PIN e Tap on Set PIN and press ENTER If the 8525 attempts to connect to a remote device that has Authen
169. P66 3 axis Vibration 1 5g RMS PSD 4 500 Hz 3 axis Shock 30g ms saw tooth POWER MANAGEMENT Internal Power supply 10 90VDC designed for forklift power 12 6V Li lon standard 7530 battery for brown out Advanced Smart Battery Runs off battery under brown out conditions AC table adapter Built in fast charger 7 week real time clock backup NETWORK MANAGEMENT FUTURE SNMP MIB 2 support Remote software download Remote WLAN management ACCESSORIES ultiple mounting options APPROVALS Safety UL 60950 3rd Ed CSA 60950 00 LVD EN 60950 1 2001 EMC FCC Part 15 Class B Complies with European R amp TTE Directive Note this product will carry the CE Mark Specifications subject to change without notice c 18 Nov 2004 k rj V o e 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual October 18 2004 Part No 8000038 A ISO 9001 Certified Quality Management System Copyright 2004 by Psion Teklogix Inc Mississauga Ontario This document and the information it contains is the property of Psion Teklogix Inc is issued in strict confidence and is not to be reproduced or copied in whole or in part except for the sole purpose of promoting the sale of Teklogix manufactured goods and services Furthermore this document is not to be used as a basis for design manufacture or sub contract or in any manner detrimental to the interests of Psion Teklogix Inc c 18 No
170. PCD x E jos L DD14 GP72 TP25 ess T LDbiscpz CF STSCHG 1 1 Lnms em D CF PRDY TP39 TP38 R176 97282 Lopit_apes lt MOTION_DETECT as CLK_PXA_EXTAL AS E xa E T iii LppioGpes P9 EN COM2 PWR FSR327 1 0 069W PXTAL k 9001596 10 L DD9 GP67 SS PWR DWN e 1 4 e us TEXTAL L ppa apee CR EXT SCNR TRIG e DS TxTAL L ppy GPes A6 EXT SCNR ENA 1 cis DEN EM B L pps apes P EXT SCNR ACK M EXT SCAN 1 12P BOOT_SEL2 2 De zr 2 5 ais L DDS GP63 ASIC_ACK Go 50V e BOOT_SEL1 T t6 A gt See E u L DD4 GP62 Cous EN gt KS S EX BOOT SELO a B7 lt v g L DD3 eren COM2 AUTO ONLINE SA2 RESET e Jia RESET E m 4 L DD2 eren S2 CARD ERROR we TP24 19 Te kn RESET BUT 8 ES E Gres vi 3 L DDi GP59 MQ1188 PWRDN Mes lt COREVDD EN e PWR EN a 5 bee ae L DD0 GP58 SS CLK PWR EN VE BATT FAULT e BATT_FAULT VDD FAULT Ki3 pp rar 5 x L FCLK GP74 PC_IN i Ei PCM PCD ava ava ava ava Dams i ous L_LCLK_GP75 T m gt L PcLK apre B8 PCM STSCHG DaM2 E E a a AB PCM PRDY A R149 ma em R205 RU eae DOM1 Bi m L_BIAS_GP77 97206 97296 97296 97200 lt i 2 PTUS 10K0 10K0 10K0 10K0 4 22R1 Dawo M8 pomo 0 063W 0 063W 0 063W 0 063W 1 0062W C9 ACLINK BITCLK 4 H 7 t e am ioun 7 SDCS3 F2 Ee BITCLK GP28 SBS SDOSt Kee R172 mem mn os SDCS2 g SOATA Nt EAS m 97232 SDCAS E A6 ACLINK SDATAQUT 3 kem a 3 SDATA_IN1_GP32 Ws SDRAM CTL spcs1 2 22R1 g SATA OUT eps A10 22R1 vun Deg vun 0 063W SDCSO Fi sac
171. PIO m e e pen v D5 FDE_GPIO12 R368 EE rn 9004471 97296 GP LM a e gt MEDIAQ USB DEVICE ier D3 ENVDD GPIo10 BL SCH 0 063W 0 063W 1 ORO 25 z c2 TPi00 MQ GPIOC R237 pe FWMI GPIOTS place as close as possible to mq1188 BD D o PWMO pol PWM CCFL DIM TP101 DISPLAY_CFG D BDO SIE po 3V3 SWITCHED 1 Se prop EI e E gs cplo7 Z pm ODE SDIO CARD R250 MQ_GPIOA El E SS P 97296 E wp 96 HOST USB 10K0 MQ_GPIOB Eto 22 0 063W dos ER E7 re C386 H USB PLUS E En a P1024 Kee TP78 O 9 3 2 DTB PU DRIVE G11 E 100N R369 R370 GPlo23 Ke popp BI 2 15 97234 97234 TP INSTALLED F10_ one 25 Kg 16V 2784 27R4 R56 115 9 sem Al lt 7 0 063W 0 063W 9004472 5 16V Ma GPIOC eu E EDI ke vc PORTRAIT on Huey amp Calvin P1O2 Sg e s 2 iic si MINUS SCH SDIO DO Ge max sen P i TP157 y Se spo cPios0 SDIO CLK 1 2 Go z e SUED m SMCLK GPIO41 E li ze 2_ spp1_cPiost Eg d d mem m E g SCLK_GPIo42 D PWR_AMP_ON U67 i sDD2 GPlO62 2 8 E9 9000515 GND ppa m E 8 FSYNC GPlO43 AUDIO EN NC7SZ125P5X SDD3 GPIO63 2 q D9 F E oS SIN GPIO4 USB RESET SDCLK GPIO64 Em a m am m E sour GPlo4s 2 x 3va am 3va BUE Se ie B spcMD epes g VS R181 J6 re RAMS a R246 R184 ns a D a SS GPIOSO 97296 97296 97296 97296 97296 97296 SDIO WP 28 vipz cplo77 SVA SWITCHED 10K0 Jj TP_DCLK ava 10K0 10K0 10K0 10K0 10K0 e m m SCK_GPIO51 E 0 063W 0 063W 0 063W 0 063W 0 063W 2 vips opge TP403 k
172. Programs gt x a Ao us Q Shortcuts gt ML system Tray ran FEM D settings gt K Cycle Tasks EE O gun f Task Manager EEA Y shutdown NENNEN E A Tekrerm A i D Figure 4 11 Shortcuts Sub Menu The System Tray If your touchscreen is not enabled you can use the System Tray option to access the icons in the taskbar at the bottom of the screen The taskbar displays indicators such as a radio signal icon and the security level These indicators are attached to dialogue boxes that provide additional information e Choose System Tray from the Start Menu When System Tray is chosen the taskbar icons become accessible To display the dialogue box attached to an icon e Use the arrow keys to highlight an icon for example the security icon e Press ENTER to display the security level dialogue box Cyde Tasks When Cycle Tasks is selected and the Task Manager is not open you can cycle through active applications To choose this option e Choose Cycle Tasks or e Press ALT TAB c 18 Nov 2004 nm Ge a 4 0 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 55 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE NET Settings The Task Manager The Task Manager option allows you to switch to another task or to end an active task To display the task manager window e Tapon Task Manager in the Start Menu or e Press ALT lt ESC gt Task Manager Ctrl Panel Activ
173. R DOWNTIME COSTS ARIS ING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THIS LICENSE THE USE INABILITY TO USE OR THE RESULTS OF USE OF THE SOFTWARE WHETHER BASED IN WARRANTY CONTRACT TORT OR OTHER LEGAL THEORY AND WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES In no event shall MDC s total liability to you for all damages exceed the price paid for the license to use the Software regardless of the form of the claim Government End Users If the Software is supplied to the United States Government the Software is classi fied as restricted computer software as defined in clause 52 227 19 of the FAR The United States Government s rights to the Software are as provided in clause 52 227 19 of the FAR Controlling Law and Severability This License shall be governed by the laws of the United States and the State of New Hampshire As to any dispute relating to this License or the Software you fur ther agree to jurisdiction and venue in the Federal and State Courts located in the State of New Hampshire If for any reason a court of competent jurisdiction finds any provision or portion thereof to be unenforceable the remainder of this ase shall continue in full force and effect Acknowledgement terms and conditions Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual VII License Agreement MDC Acknowledgments This product includes software developed by MDC and its licensors This product includes software developed by the Open
174. RMS 150kHz 80MHz EN 61000 4 11 AC Mains Ports Manufacturer PSION TEKLOGIX INC 2100 Meadowvale Boulevard Mississauga Ontario Canada L5N 7J9 Year of Manufacture 2003 Manufacturer s Address PSION TEKLOGIX S A in the European La Duranne 135 Rue Rene Descartes BP 421000 Community 13591 Aix En Provence Cedex 3 France Type of Equipment Information Technology Equipment Equipment Class Commercial and Light Industrial I the undersigned hereby declare that the equipment specified above conforms to the above directives and standards Manufacturer Rob Williams Vice President of Engineering Psion Teklogix Inc Ontario Legal Representative Domique Binckly Vice President International Sales Psion Teklogix S A France Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual IX Approvals And Safety Summary This equipment complies with Class B Part 15 of the FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interfer ence that may cause undesired operation Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Psion Teklogix the party responsible for compliance may void the user s authority to operate the equipment 1 FCC Information to Users For Class B Unintentional Radiators This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to P
175. RT S No RFI EMCE1 RP46573JD02A Page 15 of 30 Issue Date 05 November 2004 Test Of Psion Teklogix Inc Vehicle Mount Terminal Model 8525 To 95 54 EC 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII 7 3 Radiated Broadband Emissions 7 3 1 Electric Field Strength Measurements Frequency Range 30 to 1000 MHz 7 3 1 1 Plots of the initial scans can be found in Appendix 3 7 3 1 2 The following table lists frequencies at which emissions were measured using a Quasi Peak detector at a test distance of 1 meter results incorporate antenna factors and cable losses Results Frequency Line Quasi Peak Margin MHz Level dB dBuV 87 000 21 30 54 97 33 60 EE Complied 87 000 21 20 54 97 33 70 e Complied 119 811 25 10 55 07 30 00 EE Complied 119 811 Vert 24 90 55 07 30 20 EE Complied 120 000 24 50 55 10 30 60 EE Complied 120 000 24 70 55 10 30 40 EE Complied 150 000 24 40 56 00 32 20 WEN Complied 150 000 24 80 56 00 31 80 EE Complied 190 000 22 80 58 10 35 30 EE Complied 190 000 23 10 58 10 35 00 Complied 231 000 22 70 61 39 38 69 fsa Complied 231 000 23 00 61 39 38 39 Complied 280 000 25 70 60 70 35 00 e Complied 280 000 25 50 60 70 35 20 EE Complied 380 000 28 80 62 70 33 90 e o Complied 380 000 Vert 28 80 lie 400 853 29 60 400 853 29 60 E mao f Compled_ 18 Nov 2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD TEST REPORT S No RFI EMCE1 RP46573JD02A Page 16 of 30 Issue Date 05 November 2004 Te
176. Recall 708 backup profile creating 08 backup profile restoring touch pen using 45 touchscreen recalibration 32 83 stylus using 45 touch pen using 45 Transfer Termination Mode TTM 87 transmissions waiting in queue TxQ 1 52 transmit LED 34 transmitted acknowledgements xa 151 transmitted initialized messages xi 151 transmitted messages xm 5 transmitting data 185 186 190 207 transmit on entry field 739 trigger double click 1 5 troubleshooting tips scanning 38 TIM 187 turning 8525 off 15 turning 8525 on 15 TxQ messages waiting to be sent 752 typ data stream type 52 Type 170 typing in upper case 200 U UCC 128 Code 128 720 underline ASCII decimal equivalent 200 video attribute 783 Unicode values entering 158 UPCA 122 UPCE 123 Upper ANSI Host Char Set 193 Upper Case 200 USB Setup Application C installing usbstor amp wceusbsh inf C 4 launching C 7 updating usbstor amp wceusbsh inf C 2 usbstor inf installing C 4 usbstor inf updating C 2 Use Increment X Increment 7 69 Y Increment 769 Useincrement 769 user permissions Exit 168 Font Change 68 Screen Switch 167 User security level 57 V Valid Numerics TESS 208 Variations Code 128 7 9 vehicle installation cables 237 Verify 116 Version 225 Version Scan See 225 version number TESS 143 vertical tab CTRL K 189 video attributes 183 207 All Fld Video 207 Blink 783 207 Bold 783 207 c 18 Nov 2004
177. Remove Programs Remove Programs Lists the programs that can be removed from your unit gram select it and then click on the Remove button Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 65 Chapter 5 Configuration Control Panel Icons Stylus Stylus Adjusts how Windows CE NET recognizes your double tap as slow or rapid successive taps Under the Calibration tab you can recalibrate your touchscreen by tapping on the Recalibrate button and following the directions on the calibration screen a System System Displays system and memory properties Under the Memory tab you can allocate memory between storage memory and program memory la Dialing Dialing Specifies dialing settings including area code country code dial type and the code to disable call waiting You can store multiple patterns for exam ple Work Home and so on using this dialogue box Certificates o Certificates A public key is transmitted as part of a certificate The certificate assigned through this icon is used to ensure that the submitted public key is in fact the public key that belongs to the submitter The client checks that the cer tificate has been digitally signed by a certification authority that the client explicitly trusts Certificate Assignment on page 84 directs you to the appropriate setup information aig PC Connection PC connection Enables direct connections to a desktop computer
178. SPACE gt Key Pressing this key inserts a blank space between characters In a Windows dialogue box pressing the lt SPACE gt key enables V or disables a checkbox The lt HOME gt Key The lt HOME gt key moves the cursor to the top of the form or page The lt END gt Key The lt END gt key moves the cursor to the bottom of the form or p 18 Nov 2004 Ly e o Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 31 Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 8525 The Keypad Backlight EL The lt PgUp gt And lt PgDn gt Keys The lt PgUp gt key displays the previous screen of information The lt PgDn gt key displays the next screen of information Function Keys And Macro Keys In addition to alphanumeric keys that are directly accessible on the keyboard no key combination is required and the keys described in this chapter the 8525 keyboard is also equipped with thirty function keys and twelve macro keys Function keys lt F1 gt through lt F30 gt and Macro keys lt M1 gt to lt M12 gt can be used with the CE operating system or another application All function keys and macro keys can be custom defined for each application The Tekterm application utilizes these keys Refer to Additional Keyboard Functions on page 133 for details 3 4 3 The Keypad Backlight The intensity of the keypad backlight and the conditions under which this backlight is activated can be configured using the Keyboard icon in
179. SSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Tool kit http www openssl org This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Complete Agreement This License constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the use of the Software and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings regarding such subject matter No amendment to or modification of this License will be binding unless in writing and signed by MDC NOTE EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW THESE WARRANTY TERMS DO NOT EXCLUDE RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICA BLE TO THE LICENSE OF THE SOFTWARE TO YOU Meetinghouse Data Communications Inc 150 Greenleaf Avenue Unit F Portsmouth NH 03801 Revised 8 12 2002 C 18 Nov 2004 x e VIII Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual APPROVALS AND SAFETY SUMMARY Declaration Of Conformity Product 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer Application of Council EMC Directive 89 336 EEC Directive s Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC Conformity Declared EN 55022 1998 Am 1 Class B to Standards EN 61000 3 2 EN 61000 3 3 EN 55024 1998 EN 61000 4 2 4kV CD 8kV AD EN 61000 4 2 4kV CD 8kV AD EN 61000 4 3 3V m 80 1000 MHz EN 61000 4 4 1kV Power lines EN 61000 4 5 1kV Differential mode EN 61000 4 6 3V
180. Shots Macros Unicode Mapping l Scancode Remapping F d Bluetooth Device Ar Mouse Macro Key Sequence Record Macro Delete Macro e Storage start TekTem Control Panel Rar ITAM Figure 6 6 Macro Dialogue Box Ch Cn Wh Important Refer to Keyboard Macro Keys on page 73 for detailed instructions about creating macros Important For information about using the macro keys you ve created refer to Macro Keys on page 134 6 17 1 2 Indicators When the Indicators parameter is enabled set to Y onscreen indicators are displayed to indicate the operating condition of the 8525 Refer to Onscreen Indicators on page 35 for a list of possible indicators 6 17 1 3 Softkeys Enabling setting to Y the Softkeys parameter displays softkey lal bottom of the screen to indicate the function of each softkey To block t softkey labels set this parameter to N gt gt 45 168Nov 2004 gt e display of Y fa k D e a 164 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Ctrl Panel Softkeys are function keys which are programmed to execute specific actions when pressed Refer to Table 6 1 on page 134 for a list of softkey labels 6 17 1 4 Ctrl Panel This menu item displays the Keyboard Properties dialogue box in which you can adjust the repeat rate of the keys the inte
181. Slide the volume button upward to increase the beeper volume or down ward to decrease the beeper volume e Under the heading Enable sounds Jar enable V the conditions under which you want the 8525 to emit a beep 5 5 4 Power Management Properties This icon displays a Power Properties dialogue box that indicates the unit s internal backup battery capacity and indicates the power source of the 8525 e In the Control Panel choose the Power icon File View x 2 al AD 00 gt b 9 9 RR gt A Bluetooth Certificates Date Time Dialing Display io IPv6 Keyboard Device Support ea e 2 1 d Mouse Network and Owner Password Power Regional ial up Co ee Settings Y o Y Wn i Ae Remove Storage System Teklogix Total Recall Volume amp rr _ A ened Ee Start A Control Panel Y TIE Figure 5 18 Choosing The Power Icon 80 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Power Suspend 5 5 4 Power Suspend KI Note A Battery tab is only available when the security level is set to Teklogix e In the Power Properties dialogue box open the Suspend tab File view Power Properties Suspend cara Slots Bluetooth di Device On External Power 5 ns d Switch state to Suspend Storage d Stat TekTerm Control Panel 3 Power Properties Figure 5 19 Power Suspend Properties Switch
182. State To Suspend When the 8525 is idle not receiving any user input a key touch a scan and so on or system activity serial data an activity initiated by an application and so on the the value assigned in the witch State To Suspend field determines when the unit will go to suspend state appear to be off When the time in the Suspend field elapses without any activity the unit enters Suspend state In Suspend state the 8525 CPU enters a sleep state and the radio is shut off The state of the device RAM contents is preserved Pressing ENTER wakes the system from suspend state When the 8525 is in suspend state the network connection will not be broken immediately If the connection is dropped you must re establish the network connection 18 Nov 2004 A b n q Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 81 Chapter 5 Configuration Card Slots 5 542 Card Slots File View Power Properties Suspend Card Slots Bluetooth Slot Power Status Device 5 Mouse SDIO SD Bluetooth A D Storage Start TekTerm J 2 Control Panel IF Power Properties 5M 1 su Figure 5 20 Activating Card Slots This tab is used to enable or disable power to the individual PC Card and SDIO slots in your unit 5 5 5 Stylus Properties KI Note Touchscreen calibration may not be enabled on your unit If your screen appears to require recalibration contact your su
183. TS Ald FFCTS_GP35 2 GP6_MMCCLK P4 gt TPS ve 3V3 PWR OFF F E a A bi COM2 DCD Ate eno ses E ops 1 0 RTC IROB e 97296 z E cow osn ent eme 3 cpa 2 EEN KH Bio zent apse 5 ces Ki4 Ma1188_IRQ 5 R363 COM2 DTR FM zeen Spo D apa Un TP IRA 97272 TOUCH BUS 4 3 K al cde on tl ae COM2 RTS P ees ege 2 VOCO POSITIVE SUPPLY FAR ALL I O EXCEPT MEMORY BUS AND PCMCIA ec L FIQ Tear 0050 9003429 9003429 9003429 VCCQ DVDD_3V3 C6 C10 C13 E14 G14 D15 M11 Geo Di RCON IO o 1 E 100 100 100 CONSOLE RXD SW B15 1 2 2 80 20 2 80 20 2 80 20 y PER 3 VCCN POSITIVE SUPPLY FOR MEMORY BUS AND PCMCIA D e LOW ENERGY LATCH 16V 16v tev cis E SA2_TXD IRTXD_GP47 o e e VCCN DVDD_3V3 A1 D4 F4 K4 M4 M14 H4 N5 N7 N9 N11 N13 P3 T16 T2 PSKTSEL Gps4 P 6 PSKTSEL CG ES a oe lap 2 pREG Gpss 1 MIS PREG O M E a TP30 Bi2 ER VSS CORE GROUND E E pe Pid PCE1 TP22 USB N ER 3 PCE1_GP52 avs SNE ava ava VSS DGND C16 J8 J9 HB H9 T1 E wees Gps 1 Pm PCE2 e e e e 20 TCK DS ve VSSQ GROUND SUPLLY FOR ALL I O EXCEPT MEMORY BUS AND PCMCIA 8 PIOR open gt T PIOR e C167 Ci68 C169 C170 C285 Ol HIS vo VSSQ DGND C11 C14 F6 G8 G10 C4 C8 J10 J14 L14 47 K7 K9 F15 F16 D16 15 E16 E ww cesi RIS PIOW 1 CiB4 PCON CONSOLE 1 97871 1 970 1 97e71 1 een 1 97372 8 97871 mm toon 100N 100N 10N TDO CPU mp mpg o VSSN GROUND SUPLLY FOR MEMORY BUS AND PCMCIA 8 poe Gras P S POE mW 2 tev o e o deV 2 iV 2 tev ms Ha E
184. Tekterm Application describes TESS and ANSI operations This chapter also provides descriptions of the Tekterm parameters Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories describes the peripherals and accessories available for your 8525 Chapter 8 Specifications details radio vehicle mount computer and battery specifications Appendix A Support Services And Worldwide Offices provides the helpdesk phone number at the Mississauga Ontario Canada and details the support services available This appendix also list wide office addresses and phone numbers Appendix B Port Pinouts includes 8525 pinouts I Appendix C USB Setup Application e describes the USB application Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 18 Nov 2004 A h 3 Chapter 1 Introduction Text Conventions Text Conventions KI Note Notes highlight additional helpful information AY Important These statements provide particularly important instructions or additional information that is critical to the operation of the equipment e Warning These statements provide critical information that may prevent physical injury equipment damage or data loss c 18 Nov 2004 la Y di p 4 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction About The 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer 3 About The 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer The 8525 is a ruggedized vehicle mount computer running the M
185. These keys are identified through softkey labels reverse video labels that are displayed at the bottom of the screen These softkey labels can be reconfigured using the menu attached to the Label F1 F10 parameter To edit a label Position the cursor in the appropriate function key field within the Label menu and type a new name preferably one that describes the corresponding key s function KI Note Although you can enter up to 8 characters for each softkey label the text will be shortened to better fit in the available space on your display c 18 Nov 2004 I d e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 197 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Characters Colour Override EL Note The menu is available only if your 8525 is equipped with a colour display 06 Colour Override Range Foreground Black see text Background Vhite see text Foreground And Background When Colour Override is set to Y the colours chosen in this menu are displayed in the TESS sessions These colour settings override the Default Colours set from within the View Manager menu Refer to Default Colours on page 175 for details The allowable values are Red Green Yellow Blue Magenta Cyan White and Black 6 20 2 3 Characters 05 Characters Range Char Set see text V Match Char 0 0 255 H Match Char 0 0 255 Fill Chr 46 H 2 55 Upper Cas
186. This sug gests a hardware problem in the 8525 Is the laser beam scanning across the bar code Once the scan beam has stopped check the scanner window for dirt or fogging 3 1 4 Operating One Dimensional 1D Laser Scanners Turn the 8525 on Wait until the unit has booted up completely A Important If an aiming dot is available on the scanner the dot will be enabled for a configurable time period including off after which normal scanning begins Refer to Dot Time msec on page 116 for details Double clicking the trigger will override the aiming delay and initiate an immediate scan Note that the aiming dot is standard on long range and high visibility internal scanners Aim at the bar code and press the trigger A scan beam and a warning indi cator appear until a successful decode is achieved or six seconds have elapsed 18 Nov 2004 A k n q Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 39 Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 8525 Connecting amp Disconnecting Tethered Peripherals 3 8 Connecting amp Disconnecting Tethered Peripherals Tethered peripherals such as scanners and printers connect to the vehicle mount computer with a quick release circular connector When a peripheral is connected to the vehicle mount the 8525 detects the peripheral and loads the necessary drivers for it An icon in the taskbar at the bottom of the screen provides a visual representation of the peripheral and
187. VAL AUTHORITY Rev 1 03 COMMUNICATION CONCERNING THE APPLICATION OF THE COUNCIL DIRECTIVE OF 20 JUNE 1972 ON THE APPROXIMATION OF THE LAWS OF THE MEMBER STATES RELATING TO A TYPE OF COMPONENT WITH REGARD TO RADIO INTERFERENCE SUPPRESSION 72 245 EEC AS LAST AMENDED BY 95 54 EC Type Approval No el1 72 245 95 54 3024 00 Reason for Extension Not applicable 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 7 0 8 An executive agency of the Department for Transport SECTION I Make trade name of manufacturer Psion Teklogix Type and general commercial description s Vehicle Mount Computer Model 8525 Means of identification of type if marked on the component Black on white label stock Location of that marking Refer to Document MFG label specification 8525 engineering specification Category of vehicle Not applicable Name and address of manufacturer Psion Teklogix Incorporated 2100 Meadowvale Boulevard Mississauga Ontario L5N 7J9 Canada In the case of components and separate technical units location and method of affixing of Mei type approval mark Refer to Document MFG label specification 8525 engineering specification 18 Nov 2004 Address es of assembly plant s As 0 5 above 72 245 EEC AS LAST AMENDED BY 95 54 EC SECTION II Additional information where applicable See Appendix 1 Technical service responsible for carrying out the tests Radio Frequency Investigation Limited Date of test report 5 November 2004
188. Vehicles Designation of Approval Marks Regulations 1979 as amended The conditions attached to this authorisation are set out overleaf 4 If this approval extension results in a change being needed to a vehicle information document issued under the goods vehicle or passenger car national type approval scheme you should notify us i e submit a notifiable alteration as soon as possible using the address VCA Whole Vehicle Room 1 2 The Eastgate Office Centre Eastgate Road Bristol BS5 6XX 5 VCA is continually scrutinising the quality of the service it provides to customers in order to discover more ways in which the standard can be improved If you have a specific complaint concerning the way this job has been dealt with our customer services leaflet gives guidance on the best approach If you would like a copy please contact the undersigned 6 Please note that when e mailing staff at VCA the address should be as follows firstname surname O vca gov uk 7 Please be aware that we are now using the Adobe 6 version of Acrobat This can be down loaded from the following site http www adobe com products acrobat readermain html Yours sincerely Elaine Hill Product Certification h s amp c forms manu1 doc CONDITIONS 1 This Approval may be withdrawn at any time and while held is subject to the following conditions 2 Conditions of Motor Vehicle Parts 2 1 The holder of this approval shall put the appro
189. W E E J8 TP DIN 97296 E E E E H E z MOSI pos D6 ving GPlo75 G 10KO R165 J9 TP_DOUT 0 063W 97296 m MISO GPIO53 n M en Ee VID4 GPIO74 ai rf lt u LED Gplos4 _G3 HEATER INSTALLED e EN TP855 i1P856 VID3 GPIO73 2 a T el e E vs GPIO72 E PCIMD GPlos EB e E e F4 yip GPIO7 i MD3 open E5 N D A 4 vio GPlo7o 3 MD2 en HEES or 5 Ha G5 EN USB PULLUP H verk apiove wn en S5 e EE EN USB HUB PWR 4 vHSYNC_GPlo79 MDo_Gploo H5 _ Sr TP93 wsyne_epioso iti MVDD2 um Hi si E R599 97296 Ki upps K1 MVDDi us H12 _ e Dc e 10K0 TP152 ava M Byppa M4 5 MGND2 G7 S7 Ja i Desch EN USB Di g 3 0 063w _ gt R166 Wie Sg Fi gyppi F12 z amp MGND1 H8 He EL lt 9 296 10k0 ALO Fypp Ato o SE C380 C381 C383 C384 C385 AS A M8 id 97871 1 men 1 971 1 gen 1 gen EVDDIZAS Reeg e xu ENSDIOPWR gt 100N 100N 100N 100N 100N AT gt 15 215 115 115 115 Pc e 2 tev 2 tev 2 16 2 16 2 tev Di CGND2 H7 MQ1188 PWR e e e Coup F7 ER DGND F F6 G6 H6 G8 e ee o e X 1 cago 1 css7 1 C388 1 cae case 97871 97871 97871 97871 97372 100N 100N 100N 100N 10N ch 2 B 415 115 2 115 15 ava d 16V 16V 16V 4 16V 16V 3V3 SWITCHED 044 x RI Is BSS84 97320 9000501 R135 bia 100K 50V 350MW 97276 Y 0 063W 2 1K50 E TP1075 0 068W TP65 H EN_USB_DEV S ii e zu 18 Nov 2004 4 IGNATURES DATE FA AUG
190. When you choose the Wireless LAN icon a Wireless Statistics window is displayed Ele Edit view AMTTETTET x E E m IP Information Wireless Statistics wireless Information RSSI dBm 45 Make New Serial Cablq Channel kHz 2417000 Connection on COM2 Network Name qwertyui Access Point 00 02 2d 60 d2 33 MAC Address 00 10 c6 25 65 65 Data Rate bps 11000000 Frame Size 1500 Packet Size 1514 Packets IN 7559 Packets OUT 6640 IN errors 46 OUT errors D Start TekTerm amp Network Connections PTXWLAGS4681 i 54 5 Figure 2 3 Wireless Statistics This tab lists your radio statistics Choosing the Zero button resets the statis tics of the last four items Packets IN Packets OUT IN errors and OUT errors e Tap the stylus on the Wireless Information tab 4 Wireless Information Tab File Edit View SITT EH 7 x Make New Serial Cable Le IP Information Wireless Statistics Wireless Information Select a network and press connect or right click for more onon To add a new network double click Add Mew Connection on COM2 New Connect i abcdefghidmnoparstuvwxyzabcef Advanced qwertyui preferred i SMC Ka View Log Status Connected to qwertyui Signal Strength Excellent Notify me when new wireless networks are available amp jStart TekTerm 2 Network Connections PTXWLAGS46B1 FETE E Figure 2 4 Wireless Infor
191. Windows CE nst LIE DD c 8 cp 6 Hen oooooooooooO0 o ooooooooooo rooOQo e PA ILE IY TTA Figure 3 5 Keyboard LEDs 3 6 1 1 PWR CHG Charge LED The lower right LED is reserved for internal charger power status This LED turns solid green when the unit is receiving AC power A blinking green LED indicates that the unit is taking power from the backup battery 3 6 13 RX TX Radio Traffic LED The upper left LED on your 8525 flashes either orange or green to indica Amen A radio transmits and receives data fe frNov 2004 KI Note Keep in mind that while the standard 802 11b radio support mit receive LED not all radios support this function 34 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 8525 Scan LED Function Radio Traffic LED Behaviour Radio Transmit LED flashes orange Radio Receive LED flashes green Table 3 1 Transmit and Receive LEDs 3 6 1 3 can LED Successful scans are indicated in two ways with a scan LED and with an audio tone Function Scan LED Behaviour Scan in progress LED displays solid red during scan LED displays solid green after decode Off when scan ended Unsuccessful scan LED flashes red Table 3 2 Scan LED 3 6 1 4 API User Application LED This indicator is available for user loaded custom Windows CE NET applications Refer to the 8525 SDK Manual for details about this LED Neither Wind
192. XIN Ba vocu 4 1K00 Mo SXABUS id ues Ml 0 063W d n DEN e ounen S 120 SOL si Ka 15 E ee 2007 at xouT vcc6o 6 2S REQUEST SSP XFER d eem 1 R221 E CL WW ayy SA2_RESET 97871 2 97296 WW 100N GND 10K0 87296 u22 se ww 10 RESET ren WRL wl 4 SVRESTANDBY Ve 115 2 ounie 4 2C SDA BO i M24co1WDWeT s spe A HICOREVDD EN TP87 98139 8 Noi 0 063W Ze e 98185 7 owes m 5 NG7SS2M5X 3V3 STANDBY leg E zd 9 Is z GEN TPa4 Ras 1 oo py een cora d SE E EE po et A 2 SSPSFRI 11 Soon LO we ni 86 40 11 M EN SW PWR ro DO P54 HLDA e N 15 E o m PCON A D BUS 0063W 3 8 2 16v e GC SCL e Ba eser g 3 TETHER POWER ON rm Di P55 HOLD Se gt E SA TP82 a BAT_PRES Bt P02 D2 P56_ALE 38 _ A2D_RATIOMETRIC_DRIVE bie y PCON CONSOLE e IPC SDA 5 ana vss 3 Sp EXT_KYBD_DETECT s rop 3 ps7_ RDY_oLKouT Pd eee 3 97272 v RADIO HEATER 82 P04 D4 3 ei NP 2 36 1 2 1K00 m xu E ren CTSO RTSO NEN LCD HEATER CTL b i P Pida M re om PCON_CLKO ilo ms PCON CONSOLE EN AUX PORT PWR ro De AO fig cg EN E E EEPROM MLB HEATER EN w P07 D7 g SS SES Ke TP129 PCON CONSOLE RXD i P63 TXDO Mm E z E P S 38 g P64_ CTS1_ RTS1_cLKS1 32 2 AN Sr A A CONSOLE BRS lt __KEYBOARD_HEATER_EN np S es cu St SOLK PROG e 1 5 EXT_KYBD_PWR_EN n P11_D9 5 S B CONSOLE TXD SEL y y 2917 76 wig oS PER 0 063W PCON_CONSOLE Sa dee 3 Seng E e 1500 11 CFG DONE 75 3 VEH UT R918 PCON CONSOLE TXD Pn CFG INIT 7
193. a oct ee 0 063W TP746 8 E Uu E sm pn e SCANNER USB 988 R300 S a TP457 d 97634 ls ABMC2 6 0000MHZ 18 R100 D 5 R30 R26 FDV303N 9003634 003 e 97872 97872 25V_350MW 1M00 1M00 R358 97232 1 E IH Sonia 4 e e ir RESET 0 063W 0 063W e ANG SCANNER_USB_MINUS P 004 e E Toon Set i e e R410 o Seen 21 0 063W TEST LOW ENERGY LATCH j C74 C75 97453 sees ase E TP744 1 97370 1 97370 ORO 15 25 0 063W XTALI 15 TP745 1 eL 50V 50v 15 NERA Du 22 e e DE da e SCANNER USB PLUS 2 P 2 18P 1 2 XTAL2 16 23 22R1 XINA or e si 0082W L R362 97232 PORT3 USB HOST MINUS TP461 k M n TP488 TP489 TP160 me 25 sta TP462 E HUBGL w 2 TP453 Ee 4 SEET 1 1 1 TP454 E UNT S geng DEE 1 Ra55 97292 PORT3 USB HOST PLUS H USB PLUS 25 1 e SS pen DP3 T z 97234 22R1 27R4 8 1 reng ond e e 29 VREG3 3 S 9 dick E e R383 DP4 97272 TP455 EE R16 Ris i Sen U y aes 20 gramm 97300 100N 0 063W DM5 e 1 1 R356 97232 PORT4 USB HOST MINUS 15K0 15K0 115 A 1 peg L2 e e 0 063W 0 063W 2 tev 10 1 2 E E e SP_ BP 22R1 a PP DS 28 1 0 063W 97276 s PSWi GLi 19 e 1K50 TE z ic SV SWITCHED R357 97232 PORTA USB HOST PLUS 0 063W OPTION SCL e 1 0 E 1 PSW2 GL2 1 pd Sw i e d s 0 063W e 12 IND_SDA PSW3_ GL3 12 TP458 a a TP456 R14 gt E Re RH R12 ES 97300 97872 97872 Ro mo Bi al Bo nl arme a a bv te p 1MO0 1MO0 97300 _ 97300 ZC Hi 15K0 Ke 0 063W 0 063W 15K0 15K0
194. adle Mounting Plate Attaching The Cradle To The Cradle Mounting Plate Next the 8525 and cradle must be attached to the cradle mounting plate e Align the tabs on the front of the cradle to the tab guides on the mounting plate and push the cradle back and down e Slide the fasteners on the back of the cradle until they snap to the posts on the mounting plate e Warning Never operate the vehicle if the quick release fasteners are not locked c 18 Nov 2004 A h X Y e Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Installing The Dual Ball And Socket Mount 1 4 3 Installing The Dual Ball And Socket Mount Standard Cradle PN 1008441 Standard RAM Ball Ends Vesa Plate also available Figure 7 4 Dual Ball And Socket Mount With the standard RAM ball end or vesa plate s installed on the RAM mount e Attach the RAM mount to a standard cradle PN 1008441 using the hard ware included with your kit e Attach the other end of the mount to almost any surface The ball design allows both ends of the RAM mount to be angled to suit the operator s needs 1 4 4 Wiring Guidelines Before installing the cables between the computer and other devices consider the following WA e Protect cable runs from pinching overheating and physical damage d 18 Nov 2004 gt h e Use plastic straps and tie downs to secure cables and com amp tors in their e desired location away from areas where they may get snag g
195. alled the viewport and is continuously updated to reflect that portion of the screen The Scan See viewport is defined as follows Anchor Line Anchor Column A location on the Scan See display the anchor is chosen as a reference point Line Offset Column Offset A predefined displacement the offset is added to the location of the 8525 cursor to create a point the pivot This pivot is mapped to the anchor and whatever is displayed in its vicinity is also displayed on the Scan See For example e the anchor is chosen as 9 0 whereas 9 is the column and 0 is the line on the Scan See display e the offset is chosen as 4 2 e the cursor on the 8525 is currently located at 7 5 e the pivot would thus be located at 7 4 5 2 or 11 7 e and so the area displayed on the Scan See will be 11 9 7 0 to 11 9 9 7 0 1 or 2 7 to 11 8 1 C 18 Nov 2004 A 5 e 1 These computations assume that Wraparound described on page 224 is disablec set to N and that Follow Cursor described on page 224 is enabled set to Y 222 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Scan See Sub Menu Mapping The Viewport 0123456 7 8 9 10 II 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2021 oa ter
196. alogue box The 8525 then disconnects File Edit Device Properties x 8 Port settings car options Connection Preferences Make New anual Dial user supplies dial Connection Gabes Baud Rate FEE Data Bits e y Terminals Use terminal window Parity None before dialing Stop Bits n H n1 Use terminal window after dialing Flow Control Hardware y start TekTerm Is Network Connections DeviceProperties 4 Ze il Figure 5 48 Port Settings Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 105 Chapter 5 Configuration The Bluetooth GPRS Phone 7 Under the Call Options tab turn off Cancel the call if not connected within and press ENTER to save your changes Device Properties S Port Settings Call Options Call S Make New Connection izo seconds Wait for dial tone before dialing Wait for credit card tone lo seconds Extra Settings special modem commands may be inserted into the dial string AAA gt gt gt Start TekTerm ls Network Connections DevicePropetes i al Figure 5 49 Call Options 8 In the Modem dialogue box select the Next gt button to display the Phone Number dialogue box Phone Number 7 x El Al GPRS network Make New Serial Ca Connection on CON Country region code Area code Phone number Force long distance Start_ TekTerm amp Network Connections
197. ange 900 MHz PC Card RFID reader writer future Tethered reader writers Multi protocol support INTERNAL EXPANSION SLOTS One SD I O MultiMediaCard slot One Type Il Compact Flash Two Type ll one Type Ill PCMCIA slot Convenient access to slots via sealed end cap EXTERNAL PORTS One Tether Port with One RS232 serial port decoded scanner printer Undecoded scanner port USB host port One Port with DB9 plug RS232 optional 5V 500MA on pin 9 Kei One Port with High density socket One RS232 serial communication port USB device port 2 USB host ports Speaker Mic connection future SIZE AND WEIGHT Size 11 3 4 W x 4 5 8 Hx 11 1 2 L Weight approximately 9 5 Ibs Includes standard battery standard radio ENVIRONMENTAL Standard Operating temp 20 C to 60 C 4 F to 140 F Storage temp 35 C to 70 C 31 F to 140 F Humidity 5 95 RH non condensing Psion Teklogix is a trademark of Psion Teklogix Inc Other product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks of Psion Teklogix Inc or trademarks or registered trademarks of other hardware software or service providers and are used herein for identification purposes only Freezer Operating temp 30 C to 60 C 22 F to 140 F Storage temp 35 C to 70 C 31 F to 140 F Humidity 5 95 RH condensing with internal heating Rain Dust IEC 529 classification I
198. antenna 9 1 6 The test equipment settings for radiated narrowband emissions measurements were as follows Bandwidth 120 kHz 120 kHz VEA 18 Nov 2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD TEST REPORT S No RFI EMCE1 RP46573JD02A Page 19 of 30 Issue Date 05 November 2004 Test Of Psion Teklogix Inc Vehicle Mount Terminal Model 8525 To 95 54 EC 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII 9 2 Radiated Broad Band Emissions Annex VII 9 2 1 These measurements were performed in accordance with the standard against appropriate limits for a Quasi Peak detector 9 2 2 All measurements were performed with an antenna height of 1 15m and a measurement distance of 1 0 m measured from the table edge to the nearest point of the measuring antenna using a measuring receiver incorporating a Quasi Peak detector 9 2 3 The frequencies to be measured were determined by the spot frequencies given in the specification and from the spurious emissions observed during the pre scan stage of the narrowband emissions test 9 2 4 For the main final measurements the EUT was arranged on a 1 0m high non conducting table this table may or may not have an earthed metallic ground plane depending on the earthing requirements of the EUT on an open area test site as detailed in the specification 9 2 5 All measurements on the open area test site were performed with a broadband antenna 9 2 6 The test equipment settings for radiated broadband e
199. ar PXA255 E A 0 063W 22R1 1 0063W En 1 2 ACLINK SYNC TP37 ax E 8 SYNC GP31 SEHEN RI73 97232 SSES GDPXA255A0E400 3 acreser P10 ACLINK_RESETB mo on T 2 F3 spcas lt TP211 Ae 0 083w TP605 S 1T OTP604 TP602 SDCLK2 ES wa 22R1 1 1 SSP BUS a m SSPSCLK GP23 ES i 2_SSPSCLK e 8 SDCKEO RI77 97232 E R131 97292 i SSPSFRM_Gp2s E9 _SSPSFRM a 41 0 069W SDCLK2 g 9 22R1 pe m 2 ssPTXD apos D9 SSPTXD R174 97232 SDCLKt SDCLKi E 1 0 063W S a SSPRXD Gpag 9 SSPRXD TP13 SDCLKO E Bo MEM_CTL SSPEXTOLK GP27 CAS LATENCY ASIC CSS u NEM TP150 Rig CS4_GP80 sears PR 5 aao aris BE Cou RXD CS3 GP79 E D13 Cou TXD Ma1188 CS2 P9 5 ETTO BPA FUSECOPTE t AIS COM1_CTS prep se Aen BTCTS_GP44 SS i ges See A COM1_RTS Ka R209 BEEPER 97296 MOE G5 35d TE 10K0 Di2 BEEPER VOLUME 0 063W MRDY MWE Ga ER E PWM1_GP17 ef 1 i ewmo cpie 2 BEEPER SIGNAL 7 e SSP BUS Led RD WR MB REQ MRDY ci N Lo RDY_GP18 GPi4 MBREQ Di MBREQ e m n NAND FLASH BUS NAND FLASH BUS SEU SEP een m GP13 MBGNT Z R178 9722 DREQ1_GP19 CLK 48MHZ g B6 NAND WRITE PROTECT i 2 S GPi2 32KHZ OUT NAND READY BUSY Ni2 5 22R1 DREGOLGF20 AT PXA 3MS864 OUT Mii dion 41 0 063W GP11 3M6864 OUT CLK 3M6864 SEN TP20 NAND ADDR LATCH ENABLE Mi2 one 1 2 F7 NAND CMD LATCH ENABLE NIS pay OPPTAK Au Dem GP9_MMCCS1 ES A 1 ASIC REQ Sous COM2_RXD Als FFRXD GP34 pe MMccso F TP2 GOM2_TXD Ela FFTXD_GP39 GP7 4BMHz Our S18 a 1 Kw PONG C
200. arcode input only character A value of 0 zero disables this feature Serial 10 Character Serial I O fields are special entry and fixed fields that accept input from and output to a serial port The application program distinguishes this field as Serial I O by preceding the field with a special character If this character precedes a fixed field the data will be sent to the 8525 s serial port If it precedes an entry field the field accepts data from the 8525 s serial port This parameter allows you to enter a decimal representation of the ASCII character code of this special character A value of 0 zero disables this feature Fixed Field Ovrhd This parameter defines the maximum number of characters allowed within two adjacent fixed fields that can be sent as a single field For example if two fields are 4 characters apart and this parameter is set to 5 these fields are joined into a single field of data The allowable range for this field is 0 to 80 This feature affects fields with the Normal display attribute only Enable Alarm If this parameter is set to Y the 8525 emits a beep when the word ALARM appears on the application screen in the location specified by the Command Region parameter Command Region Up amp Down And Command Region Left amp Right The value assigned to the Command Region Up and Command Region Down parameters represent rows on the 8525 screen The allowable values ran
201. art 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential instal lation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guaran tee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help 2 Warning to Users e Warning Changes or modifications not expressly approved by P Teklogix Inc could void the user s authority to operate the equipment c 18 Nov 2004 A h X Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Approvals And Safety Summary e RF EXPOSURE Warning To satisfy FCC RF exposure requirements for vehicle mount transmitting devices a separation distance of 20 cms should be maintained between the antenna of this device and persons during dev
202. artUp ceconfig h Oo a O sg O sg s cemgrc exe cetlkit dl cetlstub dl cezcliexe DbGprs csv X enrollexe FTPD tmp Em im ag m Stat Windows Figure 4 1 Working With Windows Icons Double tap on the appropriate icon either a folder icon a program icon or a file icon to open or launch your selection 4 3 The Startup Desktop When the 8525 boots up the startup desktop shell is displayed Any applications stored in the Startup folder start up immediately L Note The startup folder is located in Windows StartUp and Flash Disk StartUp netmui dll Remote Computer Desktop S ls Recycle Bin TekTerm A H Internet Explorer start Figure 4 2 The 8525 Startup Desktop e Double tap on the icon to open a window or in the case ofan MCA icon launch an application c 18 Nov 2004 gt i E VA e lt Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 47 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE NET The Desktop Icons 4 3 1 The Desktop Icons The icons displayed in the startup desktop operate in much the same way as those displayed on any standard PC desktop that is running Windows My Computer Choosing this icon displays the contents of your 8525 computer If you re not sure how to work with the files folders and programs displayed refer to Working With Files Folders And Programs on page 47 Recycle Bin This option temporari
203. ation An equivalent keyboard shortcut is also available for every point and click action Windows CE NET supports the same point and click user interface and keyboard shortcuts as desktop Windows with one difference the point and click action is accomplished using a touchscreen rather than a mouse Actions can be performed using any combination of keyboard shortcuts or touchscreen tapping provided your 8525 is equipped with a touchscreen 4 1 1 Navigating Using A Touchscreen And Stylus KI Note Ifthe touchscreen is not registering your screen taps accurately it may need recalibration Refer to Calibrating The Touchscreen on page 32 An 8525 equipped with a touchscreen has a stylus a pointing tool that looks like a pen that is used to select objects on the touchscreen L Note To prevent damage to the touchscreen use only the stylus pen supplied with your 8525 To open a file launch an applet or open a folder e Double tap the stylus on the appropriate icon To navigate through a dialogue box for example display the information in a tab choose a radio button check V a checkbox and so on e Tap the stylus on a tab radio button checkbox and so on VA 18 Nov 2004 x Y g Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 45 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE NET Navigating Using The Keyboard 4 1 2 Navigating Using The Keyboard If your touchscreen has b
204. ation Power Mgmt Ctrl Panel Important Refer to Volume And Sound Properties on page 79 for details AN about this dialogue box 6 17 3 Power Mgmt Ctrl Panel This menu item displays the Power Properties dialogue box File view Power Properties gt x Suspend cara Slots ZS Bluetooth d board Device On External Power Ve JD ss Mouse 4 h ove d Switch state to Suspend ram Storage ES Start TekTerm Control Panel IZ Power Properties 5M is Figure 6 10 Power Properties Dialogue Box N Important Refer to Power Management Properties on page 80 for details about this dialogue box 6 17 4 User Permissions 04 User Permissions Range Screen Switch Y Y N Font Change Y Y N Exit N Y N At User security level the operator is restricted to a small group of parameters AN Important Only Supervisor and Teklogix level passwords can change the values of the User options Screen Switch When set to Y the operator can use the Split screen parameter to BS Ke between screens when multiple applications are running on the 8525 Refer to Shi Screen on page 170 for details about using this function 18 Nov 2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 167 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Auto Start Font Change When Font Change is set to Y operators at the User level can change the font
205. ave been sent but not yet acknowledged by the Cellular Master decimal TxQ number of messages waiting to be sent decimal Exiting The Radio Statistics Screen Press lt CTRL gt ALT 0 zero to return to the Display menu C 18 Nov 2004 x e 152 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application The Tekterm Startup Display Menu 6 10 The Tekterm Startup Display Menu The values assigned to Tekterm parameters can be viewed and adjusted to optimize communication at the site in which an 8525 is operating While some parameters are accessible through the Parameter Manager others can be adjusted through the Windows CE NET Control Panel This section provides a description of all parameters and how to adjust them Press lt CTRL gt ALT 0 zero to work with the Display menu From this startup menu you can launch the Parameters menu along with TESS and or ANSI sessions You can also display the Radio Statistics screen m 01 Display Menu 4 A Parameters B TESS E ANSI AN Note Aside from the Parameters menu all other applications listed in the Display Menw are created in the Applications menu Refer to Appli cations on page 175 for details To launch an application either type the letter to the left of the application you want to use or tap the stylus on the item For example to display the Parameters
206. ay be restricted to supervisory use only In the Display Properties dialogue box open the Backlight tab Display Properties Background Appearance Ess Bluetooth Intensity a Device i Ira minutes y minutes y When using external power keep the backlight always ON System Teklogix Total Recall Volume amp Figure 5 5 Display Backlight Properties KI Note Backlight changes take affect immediately You do not the 8525 N h D AS Ngv 2004 Y amp 0 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 69 Chapter 5 Configuration Keyboard Properties Intensity This parameter is used to adjust the light intensity of the backlight Sliding the bar to the left lowers the light intensity and sliding it to the right raises the intensity Bright For The value chosen from this dropdown menu determines the duration of time that the backlight stays on at the configured intensity when a unit is not in use Dim For The value chosen from this dropdown menu determines the duration of time that the backlight stays on at half the configured intensity dimmed backlight when a unit is not in use External Power Checkbox When you select V the checkbox next to When using external power keep the backlight always ON the backlight remains ON at the configured intensity when the 8525 is operating with external power not internal battery powe
207. backup files should be stored C WINNT system32 drivers wceusbsh sys M CAWINNT system32 drivers usbstor sys Path CAWINNT system32 drivers phBackup Browse lt Back Next gt Cancel system directory gt drivers ptxBackup Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual C 3 Appendix C USB Setup Application Installation Installing The 8525 As a Device On Your PC C 1 3 Installation Installing The 8525 As a Device On Your PC 1 Install Dialogue Box The sys files you selected are copied to the backup directory If an unknown error occurs during the backup you are asked whether you d prefer to cancel the install or continue with the process The wceusbsh inf andusbstor inf files are updated If you indicated that the wceusbsh driver should be installed the Install dialogue box appears again The USB Setup application will attempt to install the drivers immediately This will succeed only if a valid USB connection to the device that is running Windows CE NET exists If the install fails due to an unknown error the install for this particular driver is aborted If the install fails because there was an inappropriate USB connection there are two possibilities e An appropriate USB connection was never established between the PC and the 8525 running Windows CE NET In this case when an appro priate USB connection with this device exists Windows will automati cally attempt to install the devi
208. bles serial port output fields Serial In This parameter enables the serial port input fields If enabled set to Y the TESS application has exclusive use of the serial port Acceptance of data in a SI field is determined by the SI prefix and suffix SI mode The possible values for this parameter are field the default and command When the SI mode is set to field data received through the serial port is displayed serial input fields If you are using serial input fields make sure thes SI ma parameter is set to field When SI mode is set to command data received by the serial port is itte Passthrough data to the host d 18 Nov 2004 KI Note Command mode is supported by SDKs but not by emi ations E e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 203 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Features SI prefix This parameter determines the start of message character on serial input Enter an ASCII numeric equivalent from 0 to 255 to represent the start character A value of 0 zero indicates no prefix SI suffix This parameter determines the end of message character on serial input Enter an ASCII numeric equivalent from 0 to 255 to represent the end character A value of 0 zero indicates no suffix SI CRC This parameter enables or disables CRC validity check on serial input When enabled set to Y a packet is rejected if the CRC is not valid Also when this param
209. ce driver e An appropriate USB connection exists between the PC and the 8525 running Windows CE NET but it has since been severed Windows may or may not attempt to automatically install the device drivers on the next appropriate USB connection A window is displayed where you can tap on Cancel to abort the wceusbsh driver installation and continue It also contains instructions to boot your device into Windows CE NET and establish a USB connection between the device and the PC When you create the appropriate connec tion Windows automatically installs the device drivers The Found New Hardware wizard may appear Your only interaction with this window is to click on the Finish button If this is the first appropriate connect between the device and the 1 e there was no previous devnode for the device in the syste Continue button is activated as soon as the connection is made V rkov 2004 there was a devnode present in the system and it has been mar ed for rein h C 4 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual C 1 4 Appendix C USB Setup Application Post Installation completed the driver installation and the device is no longer marked for reinstall Only one devnode per device can be unset when the device drivers are finally installed If you indicated that the usbst or driver should be installed the same steps as described above are carried out for usbstor except that the 8525 mus
210. channel of the 8525 The allowable range for this parameter is 1 to 20 The default value is 1 KI Note The Channel Number dropdown menu displays only the channels that have been enabled in the Channel Enable List Power Up Channel When this parameter is enabled V the 8525 begins communicating on the channel specified in the Channel Number parameter when the unit is powered up This setting may prevent the migration of 8525s to the same channel due to uneven coverage in some sites If this parameter is disabled unchecked the unit will continue communicating on the same channel that it was on before it was powered off c 18 Nov 2004 E e e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 89 Chapter 5 Configuration Channel Tab Channel Enable List e Tap on the Channel Enable List button to display a dialogue box listing available channels Channel Enable List ok xj Available Channels a M Channel 2 Channel 3 M Channel 4 Figure 5 32 Channel Enable Dialogue Box This dialogue box is completed by default with all channels that have frequencies configured A checkmark V indicates that a channel is enabled An unchecked check box indicates that the channel is disabled The maximum number of channels supported by the RA1001 Narrow Band radio is 20 Enabling a channel Gd allows the channel to be set to an operating channel Channel Number and makes it available for c
211. cified in the Manual Switch Table If this parameter is disabled unchecked the vehicle mount uses a standard algorithm to decide which channel it should switch to in the event of poor channel quality Warning Itis not recommended that the Manual Select parameter be used without a clear understanding of how to order the channel sequences for optimum performance Manual Switch Table e Tap on the Set Switch Table button to display the Manual Switch Table dialogue box Manual Switch Table p ok x Channel List Edit Channel List Figure 5 33 Manual Switch Table This feature is used rarely It is used when the order of channel switching needs to be tightly controlled The values in the Channel column are completed for you with the enabled channels when this dialogue box is opened For each corresponding enabled channel the List column contains 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 values by default Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 91 Chapter 5 Configuration Protocol Tab Editing The Channel List SE Selected Channel m Channel Switch List anne Only those channels that are enabled are displayed in the dropdown menus in the Edit Channel List dialogue box The allowable values range from 0 to 20 Tap on the arrow next to dropdown menu to scroll through the available channels Highlight the value you want to assign Once you ve assigned the switching order tap on the OK button to close the dialogue b
212. cold boot lone Profile for other devices creates a profile that automaticall restores after resuming from a cold boot but it will not contain the 10 settings A be saved The location for the profile will typically be Storage card e Tap on the Next button to display the next dialogue box Add Files 110 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Creating A Backup Profile Add Files All Files Databases Registry By File Figure 5 60 Adding Files By default All Files is selected so that all installed or copied files database entries and the Registry will be saved You can however limit the backup to database and or the registry only The backup By Individual File option allows you to select the exact file or files you want to backup The By File Type option allows you to select by predefined file types e Tap on the Next gt button to view your selections Figure 5 61 By File Type c 18 Nov 2004 H E e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 111 Chapter 5 Configuration Restoring A Profile View Selections Depending on what you have selected for inclusion in your profile you can view a list of the selected files databases and or registry View Selections Application Data desktop ini 3 21 2003 04 00 00 My Documents desktop ini 3 21 2003 04 00 00 Program Reis qt ini 312112003 04 00 00 3
213. con This AC icon is displayed in the taskbar when the unit is using AC power 3 6 3 Audio Indicators The 8525 beeper provides a variety of sounds and can be configured to emit a sound when a key is pressed a keyboard character is rejected scan input is accepted or rejected or an operator s entry does not match in a match field the Volume amp Sound Properties dialogue box C 18 Nov 2004 x e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 37 Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 8525 Scanning 3 7 Scanning The scanner used with your unit is configured using the Scanner Properties dialogue box in the Control Panel AN Note Refer to Scanner Properties Setup on page 114 for details The 8525 supports a variety of scanners one dimensional 1D laser scanners Scanning Techniques outlines the mechanics of a successful scan In addition review Scan LED Indicators on page 38 to better understand how to interpret whether or not a bar code has been successfully scanned Finally Troubleshooting on page 39 provides some helpful suggestions should the scan fail 3 7 1 Scanning Techniques KI Note External scanners can only be connected to the 8525 tether port Hold the scanner at an angle Do not hold it perpendicular to the bar code e Donot hold the scanner directly over the bar code In this position light can reflect back into the scanner s exit window and prevent a successful decode
214. ct the Short Code parameter in the Options menu see page 116 must be enabled set to ON Refer to Addendum on page 121 Prefix Suffix Chars See Prefix Suffix Chars on page 122 5 9 2 5 UPC And EAN Settings Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable UPC And EAN or off to disable it Field Size Char Refer to page 119 for details 5 9 2 6 UPC A Settings Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable UPC A or off to disable it Include Number Sys If this parameter is enabled set to ON the number system digit is included with the decoded bar code data Include Check If this parameter is enabled set to ON the check digit will be included with the decoded bar code data Addendum A Important Before Addendum can take effect the Short Code pe in the Options menu see page 116 must be enable Refer to Addendum on page 121 Prefix Suffix Chars Refer to page 122 for details c 18 Nov 2004 A h Y e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 123 Chapter 5 Configuration UPC E Settings 5 9 2 7 UPC E Settings Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable UPC E or off to disable it Convert to UPC A Setting this parameter to ON results in a non standard decoding that returns 12 digits from the 6 digit UPC E bar code Include Number Sys If this parameter is enabled set to ON the
215. d If the lt DEL gt key is pressed while cursor is in the right most position in the field the 8525 emits a keyboard error beep If the lt DEL gt key is used to clear data in a field that has been pre filled by the host application the field is flagged as modified and the updated information is sent to the host in the next response message Insert mode Fcursor mode In both left and right justified fields the lt DEL gt key erases the characters from one character position to right of the cursor to the end of the field If the lt DEL gt key is pressed while the cursor is in the right most position in the field the 8525 emits a keyboard error beep If the lt DEL gt key is used to clear data in a field that has been pre filled by the host application the field is flagged as modified and the updated information is sent to the host in the next response message Refer to Field Mode at the beginning of this table The lt DEL gt key operates in the same manner in Fcursor mode as it does in Field mode c 18 Nov 200 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application BKSP Key Behaviour In TESS 6 15 5 lt BKSP gt Key Behaviour In TESS Field mode Ina left justified field the lt BKSP gt key erases the character directly to the left of the cursor and then moves the cursor one position to the left When the last character in the field is de
216. d in full on the open area test site A peak detector was used in conjunction with the appropriate detector IF measuring bandwidth see table below repetitive scans were performed to allow for emissions with low repetition rates and for the duty cycle of the EUT The test configuration was the same for the initial scans as for the final measurements on a 1 0m high non conducting table this table may or may not have an earthed metallic ground plane depending on the earthing requirements of the EUT These initial scans were performed with the antenna in both horizontal and vertical polarisations 9 1 3 All measurements were performed using an antenna height of 1 05 m and a measurement distance of 1 0 m measured from the table edge to the nearest point of the measuring antenna Following the initial scans graphs were produced giving an overview of the emissions from the EUT plotted against the appropriate specification limit A tolerance line was set 10 dB below the reference limit and levels above this were re tested on the open area test site using a measuring receiver with a peak detector 9 1 4 For the main final measurements the EUT was arranged on a 1 0m high non conducting table this table may or may not have an earthed metallic ground plane depending on the earthing requirements of the EUT on an open area test site as detailed in the specification 9 1 5 All measurements on the open area test site were performed with a broadband
217. dditional Information Related To Testin CI Dimensions 30 W x 30 L x 12 H cm Transmit Output Power Characteristics LAN MgmemRmg RE iren O power SuppyReqirement le the device can be connected to can be any voltage between 10 VDC to 90 VDC i e 12 24 48 or 72 VDC Class Short Range Devices Only Class 2 Inconvenience to persons which cannot simply be overcome by other means The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG Inc and any use of such marks by RFI Global Services Ltd is under license Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners 2 5 Port Identification S N emm d RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD TEST REPORT S No RFI EMCE1 RP46573JD02A Page 7 of 30 Issue Date 05 November 2004 Test Of Psion Teklogix Inc Vehicle Mount Terminal Model 8525 To 95 54 EC 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII 2 6 Support Equipment Description Wireless LAN Adaptor Brand Name Cisco Systems Model Name or Number Aironet 350 Series Serial Number 00097 CAE5F42 Cable Length And Type Note Applicable Connected to Port Laptop VA 18 Nov 2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD TEST REPORT S No RFI EMCE1 RP46573JD02A Page 8 of 30 Issue Date 05 November 2004 Test Of Psion Teklogix Inc Vehicle Mount Terminal Model 8525 To 95 54 EC 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII 3 Test Specification Methods amp Proced
218. diting and the Media Copy function unless otherwise noted Consult the Teklogix ANSI Terminal Programmer s Manual for more information Kbd lock When this parameter is disabled set to N the 8525 does not lock the keyboard after a block mode transmission When enabled set to Y the keyboard is locked after a transmission The application program must unlock the keyboard by resetting the Keyboard Action Mode KAM using the Reset Mode RM or Enable Manual Input EMI controls Xmit key When this parameter is disabled set to N the key that causes the 8525 vehicle mount to transmit is not sent to the host as part of the transmitted data When enabl d set to Y the key that causes a transmission is sent after the page data4 been sent to the host This parameter applies only to block mode c 18 Nov 2004 A ly Y 186 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Xmit Modes FETM When the Format Effector Transfer Mode FETM parameter is disabled set to N Format Effectors are inserted in data sent to the host or included in data when transferred to the console or serial ports When enabled set to Y the Format Effectors are not inserted into the data sent to the host and are not included in the data transferred to the console or serial ports GATM When the Guarded Area Transfer Mode GATM parameter is disabled set to N
219. e primary port are directed to this port Scan See TESS and ANSI accepts input from the Scan See through the Tether or Console port c 18 Nov 2004 I d Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 217 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Tether Serial And Console Port Parameter Settings 6 21 2 Tether Serial And Console Port Parameter Settings The parameters for the Tether Port Serial Port and Console Port are identical F 04 Settings Rang Character Set see text Baud 9600 see text for range of baud rates Data Bits 8 6 8 Parity none none odd even mark space Stop Bits 1 1 1 5 2 Flow Ctrl None None Software Hardware Both Buffer 512 1 2048 Retries 3 1 100 Input Tmo 2 1 100 Output Tmo 5 1 100 Test Y Y N Character Set These menus define the character set for the 8525 port A N Important When a character sent from the host cannot be displayed a right arrow character is used as a substitute r Char Set ISO N IBM Y DEC N Misc N This menu contains all the character sets available with your Psion Teklogix computer In this menu the Y or N are used to visually guide you to the selected character set For example in the sample menu above the Y next to IBM indicates that a character set has been chosen from this group c 18 Nov 2004 E
220. e GND qo Ee i 10 20 R264 0 063W COMP VHSP 0 coo E E o 97296 q 3 Rise sl 1 S764 n al R83 10K0 97303 Res Y 1U0 SVREF 97320 0 063W 20K0 97320 120 400K E 0 063W 100K 2 2 c28 R270 0063W Se EDI 10 0 063W 17 3V3 STANDBY 97375 97296 E 2 50 a GND e M 1N0 10K0 TP226 e per KE 10 0 063W 9000928 S e 50v E i 3K32 So 0 063W e C295 AAA 2 e e PS A 1 97871 o _ w Wi 100N E R269 Eu E me e TEM 0063W 3V3 STANDBY E L ma 1 y R143 Ra 97248 97327 97273 100 3 200K 1K10 T o8 a R76 Teele 0 063 e 7 0 063W 0 063W 97634 R75 rose R273 97320 a cite 4 7 E E FDV303N 97320 97296 100k mod 4 1 97848 25V 350MW 100K 10K0 aen A 120P as e e 1 2 e 2 1 KC ED 15 S E EDI 2 50 R277 97866 z 3V3_STANDBY Sa VAS E LPV321M7 TP225 e 2 e e lt BAT ID 4U7 0 063W B C297 e 10 E o 1 1 een 2CELL gt 1V6 ey y 37 e e 100N 3 CELL 0V3 115 3V3 STANDBY Guy Ap UE e PCON_A D_BUS Wm Gart ser 3V3 STANDBY 2 16 a 0294 gran juo C27 al e R144 e R154 97871 100N 10 wy 97375 1 R25 97327 97276 100N e SE d 1NO 97872 200K lt 1K50 15 S37 C296 16v 10 1M00 0 063W 0 063W 16V e R390 97871 x el ios sov l2 0 063W H H _ 9001577 100N Y 1 TP154 Il aa z 280K BAT_PRESENCE 15 eces N EES LMC7215IM5 0063W 2 e Res 4 are 9000940 J a 3V3_STANDBY 12C_SDA 4 6 37 Ww Ww Bs 5 N 1 TP223 C L E AJ P272 miss 3V3 STANDBY VIR
221. e e e ero e e SYS PWR IN s i 1 i 1 14 A R267 E 3 D9 Y og zm AAS Passo ba 7 9002936 gt AA MMBZ52488LT1 9002936 93285 3V3 STANDBY wij D wj D FDS6675 OW 4 18V 225MW FDS6675 y zx si rug rud 30V 11A H 30V 1A 1 30V_200MA ES ps TP217 e R79 97872 DOW rud ech dlls 9000556 e 2 97320 1M00 x Se sl 281 1 MMBZ52488LT1 E m 100K 0 063W 1 i22 1 SVREF 3V3 STANDBY 0 063W an 9001852 R388 1 93037 SE Ton e e R162 33U pegs 95559 e e i MMBT4403LT1 ou R78 9000586 20 0R05 cs 2 TP260 97634 97320 4R02 149 025W Teast FDV303N 100K pie 0 063W A H E ER 95621 MMBT4409LT1 Dem 3 L 25V_350MW oossw e T a at E LOHRG 0 24 100N E 93037 i Bo AAA iv Y 2 2 20 Q40 d 1 4 h e 2 EL Joe ie TO SOSA m e e e ee o e e e e e e FN AGPRES N i 97320 1 95621 1 892NCS 330M P3 e Q9 e nL a e 100K 100N e 1 1 SC ons js d 000 e wy O56 2 0 063W 420 R69 ci c2 1 86 j Rze BSS84 H 2 50 wats U36 97320 9003428 8003428 oer D ck 97224 9003429 9003429 d i bep EUM iss E 9 206 9000501 bk BQ24702PW 100K 104 100 3 D8 7 87688 10RO 100 100 fem Y 2 E 10K0 s 50V 350MW NA 1 9001860 0 063W 2 809 205 2 10 A 9000559 FDC658P E 11 2 80 20 2 80 20 1 SAL 9000559 97272 E TES 97303 0 063W ED 50V 50v A MMBZ5248BLT1 30V 4A 0063W tev 16v 029 3 Dio 100 3 omo am 7 EA SS e o D a C44 1 18V 225MW 9002936 0 063W 00 H 7 E er pm Dei 2 Pen e vena e TP240 1 Y C140 20 R349 KL e EA 1 94054 50v 97224 D
222. e N Y N Char Set F 06 Char Set ISO N IBM Y DEC N Misc N This menu contains all the character sets available with your Psion Teklogj A computer In this menu the Y or N is used to visually guide you to the me character set For example in the sample menu above the Y next to IBM indicates that a character set has been chosen from this group C Lk 18 Nov 2004 198 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Characters To choose a character set Position the cursor on the appropriate item for example ISO and press F1 to display the character set options e To activate a character set press the RIGHT or LEFT arrow key to set it to Y AN Important If you choose a Chinese character set from the Misc menu and a character sent from the host cannot be displayed on the 8525 screen a shaded box character is used as a substitute Please review Default font on page 208 If you are using a Korean character set a right arrow character is used as a substitute V Match Chr This parameter enables visible field matching and defines the character that identifies visible field match data from the host Field matching allows the host to pre load data into an entry field that is compared with the user s input The vehicle mount beeps if the entered data do
223. e TCP gt prompt e Type telin lowercase letters followed by the Host Name or IP address e Press lt ENTER gt e Log in as usual to begin working with the new session 6 8 5 2 Listing Sessions And Moving To Other Sessions To list the current sessions e Press CTRL and type a lowercase a At the TCP gt prompt e Type sess in lowercase letters and press lt ENTER gt To move to another session e At the TCP gt prompt type sess in lowercase letters followed by the session number to which you want to move e g Type sess 2 to move to session 2 e Press ENTER 6 8 5 3 Closing A Session To close a session e Press lt CTRL gt and type a lowercase a e Atthe TCP gt prompt type cl in lowercase letters followed b number you want to close e g Type cl 2 to close session 2 e Press ENTER freA c 18 Nov 2004 E a e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 149 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Printing A Screen 6 8 5 4 Printing A Screen To print each line of a screen with a CR LF between each line e Press CTRL and type p The screen will be printed using the port configured as Print 6 8 5 5 Smart Echo Disabling In some circumstances like entering a password you many want to temporarily disable smart echo disguising the characters you type with periods e Press CTRL ALT lt P gt and type a period e Type the nec
224. e Tasks PTXWLAGS46B1 Supervisor AjStat TekTerm PT XWLAGS46B1 ive Figure 4 12 Task Manager 4 4 5 Settings e Tapon Settings to display a sub menu of options TEKLOGIX 8525 Exec H234n 1 Display Menu H rs 4 Desktop bai Security ir 7 Programs Shortcuts gt ngs EE IR t SE 107 Figure 4 13 Settings Sub Menu Control Panel The Control Panel contains applets used to configure hardware the operating e and the shell If your 8525 is running with the Psion Teklogix Tekterm application or another application additional configuration applets may appear in the Control Panel d S Sm dii D Nov 2004 56 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE NET Run Network And Dial Up Connections The Network and Dial up Connections window allows you to configure the 8525 radio or execute an existing configuration Refer to Configuring An IEEE 802 11 Radio Installed In The 8525 on page 15 for radio setup details Taskbar And Start Menu The Taskbar and Start Menu option displays a dialogue box in which you can customize the taskbar choosing which options will be displayed Refer to Customizing The Taskbar on page 49 for additional details about this option 4 4 6 Run Choosing the Run option from the Start Menu displays a dialogue box in which you can enter the name of the program folder or document you want to open
225. e ac ca en 64 5 5 Basic Setup EE 68 5 5 1 Display Properties o 00200000004 68 5 5 1 1 Display Background 0 68 5 5 1 2 Display Appearance o o 69 5 5 1 3 Display Backlight llle 69 5 5 2 Keyboard Properties o 00000000005 70 3 5 2 1 Key Repeat o 2328 eek oe che ee eee eee Ew a 71 5 5 2 2 Keyboard Backlight o 72 5 5 2 3 Keyboard One Shot Modes 0 72 5 5 2 4 Keyboard Macro Keys 73 5 5 2 5 Unicode Mapping 75 5 5 2 6 Scancode Remapping 77 5 5 3 Volume And Sound Properties 79 5 5 3 1 VolumeAdjustments ss s see ai llle 80 5 5 4 Power Management Properties a ooa ae 80 5 5 4 1 Power Suspend soe s c oeras a ae e aee a a 81 5942 Catd SIOlS a ies IEN a ee Ree ee ex Ga 82 5 5 5 Stylus Properties 82 5 5 5 1 Setting Double Tap Sensitivity 83 5 5 5 2 Touchscreen Calibration 83 5 5 5 3 Options Disabling The Touchscreen 84 5 5 6 Certificate Assignment 5 5 7 Narrow Band Kado 5 547 1 Into Tab ws sx xxxn 5 5 7 2 Channel Tab 5 5 7 3 Protocol Tab 92 5 5 7 4 PowerTab M c 18 Nov 2804 A 5 5 7 5 Radio AAA e b o e EEN Je y Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 61 Chapter 5 Configuration 3 6 1 The Devices Tab 2063464 go b DR ERR 99 56 2 The Server Tab ici Rot ut RUD RR o Re 101 3 6 3 The Properties Tab 4 5n x uomo mom ex mE 102 6 3 1 Activ
226. e beep that is emitted lo indicate Sounds i events like warnings key clicks and screen taps Chapter 5 Configuration Control Panel Icons Sounds wave files cannot be reproduced on 8525 units The beeper volume and the conditions under which it sounds are tailored from within the application installed on your unit D Mouse Properties Mouse Allows you to customize the sensitivity and speed of the stylus double tap Q2 Owner Owner Provides fields in which you can specify owner information A Notes tab allows additional information to be entered and displayed when the unit is powered up Network ID tab information is used to access network resources This information should be provided by your System Administrator Password Password Allows you to assign a password to restrict access to elements of the unit Once assigned password access cannot be circumvented so it is important that you write down your password and keep it in a safe place Refer to Security Levels on page 51 for details Power Allows you to switch to Suspend state define which Card Slots are active and to turn power for the card slots PCMCIA and SD MMC on and off Note that a battery status tab is visible only when the 8525 is set to the Teklogix security level Ee Regional Settings Regional Allows you to specify the local language the display text will use along with the format of numbers currency time and date for your regi
227. e keyboard Value Function Bright Arrow keys control Scan See display brightness Horiz Arrow keys control Column Offset Vert Arrow keys control Line Offset Table 6 5 Arrow Parameter Options KI Note For Horiz and Vert changing the offset will take affect only after the 8525 display has been updated Version Scan See units with serial numbers that read 1594120224 or higher contain firmware that implements a different communication protocol with the 8525 than older units The Version numbers represent the following unit versions Value Scan See Version 0 First LED version up to serial number 1594080275 these are encased in grey plastic 1 Model 7000 LED units versions after the serial number above these are also encased in grey plastic 2 e Metrologic 7000M LCD units these are encased in grey plastic e Psion Teklogix 7000M LCD units these are encased in black plastic Table 6 6 Scan See Versions L Note To interface the 8525 to the Scan See units with older firmware serial number lower than 1594120224 set Parity space all other parameters are identical to the newer firmware c 18 Nov 2004 A h X Y e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 225 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Scan See Keyboard Mapping Ge 3 2 Scan See Keyboard Mapping Digits 0 9 are passed
228. e law notwithstanding this limitation SOFTWARE TRANSFER ALLOWED BUT WITH RESTRICTIONS You may permanently transfer rights under this EULA only as part of a per manent sale or transfer of the Device and only if the recipient agrees to this EULA If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade any transfer must also include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE e EXPORT RESTRICTIONS You acknowledge that SOFTWAR do subject to U S export jurisdiction You agree to comply with all vi international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE including the U S Export Administration Regulations as well as end user e destination restrictions issued by U S and other governments tional information see http ww w microsoft com exporting d iy i Nov 2004 gt Il Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual License Agreement Meetinghouse Data Communications Inc End User License Agreement End User License Agreement ATTENTION PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT LICENSE CAREFULLY BEFORE INSTALLATION USE OF THE SOFT WARE IS SUBJECT TO THE SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS SET FORTH BELOW USING THE SOFTWARE INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE LICENSE TERMS IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THESE LICENSE TERMS YOU MUST RETURN THE SOFTWARE FOR A FULL REFUND IF THE SOFTWARE IS SUPPLIED WITH ANOTHER PRODUCT YOU MAY RETURN THE ENTIRE UNUSED PRODUCT FOR A FULL REFUND Software License Terms The following terms govern your use of t
229. e smaller than the length of the vehicle mount computer s display Display panning is used if the page is longer than the display KI Note The value in this parameter must be an even number Origin Scroll When enabled set to Y the display window moves to the origin upper left corner after LOCK H or LOCK B messages Field Scroll When enabled set to Y the display window moves to the left after ente new entry field C 18 Nov 2004 x e 196 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Screen Pages Saved This parameter determines the number of pages that can be stored and recalled at the 8525 Storing frequently used page data at the 8525 reduces the need for the host to retransmit complete page data over the radio link Retransmitting data can reduce the system response time Increasing the number of saved pages decreases the available memory for other functions App Parameter The Application parameter is sent to the host system as part of the response to the TESS query command Enter zero to disable this parameter Label FI FIO KI Note This menu uses string entry fields For detailed information about com pleting this type of field refer to String Entry Parameters on page 156 06 Label F1 F10 F1 F10 Softkeys are function keys that have been programmed to perform specific actions in your application
230. e to lock it on it is displayed as CTRL KEY in the taskbar 4 3 2 1 Using The Taskbar e Using the stylus tap on the indicator you want to view the radio icon for example to display a dialogue box outlining radio communication information 4 3 2 2 Customizing The Taskbar To customize the taskbar so that it displays only those icons you require e From the Start Menu tap on the Settings option and then on the Taskbar and Start Menu option The Taskbar and Start Menu dialogue box is displayed TEKLOGIX 8525 Exec E184c 81 Display Men Parameters Taskbar and Start Menu Properties General advanced E M Show active app Auto hide Show Start button J Show Clock Teklogix Select Stat TekTerm Taskbar and Start Menu i PA Figure 4 4 Taskbar And Start Menu Settings e Tap the stylus on the items you want to activate or deactivate indicates active items the Documents folder Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 49 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE NET The Start Menu 4 4 The Start Menu Note Some of the Start Menu items may be disabled based on the 8525 s current security settings The Start Menu lists the operations you can access and work with It is available from the startup desktop or from within any application To display the menu e Tap on the Windows Start button in the taskbar Tap on the item in the m
231. e value chosen from this dropdown menu determines the duration of time that the keyboard backlight stays on when a unit is not in use KI Note Tapping in the checkbox next to When using external power keep the backlight always ON y forces the keypad backlight to remain on when the unit is operating with external power such as vehicle battery or A C adaptor 5 5 3 Keyboard One Shot Modes e In the Keyboard Properties dialogue box open the One Shots tab d Bluetooth Device Keyboard Properties Repeat Backlight Blue Key Storage Start 1 TekTerm Control Panel Ire oard Properties Figure 5 9 Keyboard One Shot Properties SAE 72 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Keyboard Macro Keys When these options are enabled V the ORANGE and BLUE keys only remain active until the next key is pressed If the One Shots options are disabled the checkbox is left blank the ORANGE and BLUE keys are locked on when pressed only once they remain on until they are pressed a second time to unlock them SI Note Keep in mind that checking the taskbar lets you know whether or not these keys are locked on When the ORANGE and BLUE keys are locked on the taskbar at the bottom of the screen displays them in uppercase characters BLUE KEY and ORANGE KEY If these keys are dis p
232. echoed by the host to the characters placed on the page and fixes the display if the host echoes are different The maximum number of characters waiting for echo is 25 Any additional characters are sent to the host but not displayed When the 8525 is in insert mode smart echo is disabled Key Function In newline mode this key moves the cursor to the first ENTER column of the next line In line feed mode this key moves the cursor to column one of the current line CTRL G Bell The 8525 beeps CTRL H Backspace The cursor moves back one space CTRL I Tab The cursor moves to the next horizontal tab stop CTRL J Line Feed CTRL L Form Feed The cursor moves down one line in the same column CTRL K Vertical The cursor moves down to the next line with a vertical Tab tab set This key deletes the character to the left of the cursor x and moves the cursor to the left by one position Table 6 4 Function Of Special Keys In Local Echo Mode DEL Key This parameter determines whether the DEL key acts as a delete key erasing the character to the right of the cursor or a backspace key erasing the character to the left of the cursor or as a clear key erasing the contents of a field ds BKSP Key This parameter determines whether the lt BKSP gt key acts as a b kspag Pair E erasing the character to the left of the cursor as a delete key erasi o acter 90 the right of the cursor or as a clear
233. ector with a waterproof heat shrink material e Wrap the connector securely with a waterproof electrical tape in an area out of the vehicle operators reach All other installation requirements outlined in this document should also be followed for High Voltage vehicles to insure safe installation and operation of the 8525 vehicle mount c 18 Nov 2004 A h X Y e 238 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories 8525 Installation In Vehicles 1 4 6 8525 Installation In Vehicles KI Note The metal chassis of the 8525 is equipped with a ground lug located on the underside of the 8525 beside the cable management bar to provide an additional ground to the vehicle if desired The grounding strap must connect from the ground stud on the 8525 to a solid reliable contact point on the main portion of the vehicle chassis It must not be connected to bat tery negative or a terminal block As with other vehicle cables the routing of the ground strap should be carefully considered to ensure it does not pose a hazard to the operator or the safe operation of the vehicle If necessary secure the ground strap with cable ties or some other mechanical means to prevent loops or loose lengths of wire that could catch on stationary items when the vehicle is in motion 1 4 7 Wiring Vehicle Power To The 8525 e Warning The 8525 accepts DC power sources between 10V and 90VDC no
234. een disabled you can use the keyboard rather than a stylus to choose icons and navigate dialogue boxes display the desktop and so on If your unit has already been fully configured and your application is launched at startup you ll have little need for keyboard navigation Operation Key or Key Combination Switch between active applications ALT TAB Open task manager ALT lt ESC gt Move the cursor Arrow keys Open file folder or icon ENTER Exit amp Save ENTER Close Exit amp Do Not Save lt ESC gt lt TAB gt To move cursor up lt SHIFT gt lt TAB gt To display the contents of the next tab in a dialogue box CTRL TAB Select Radio Button Press Button SPACE Go to Start Menu lt BLUE gt lt 0 gt Table 4 1 Keyboard Navigation Navigate Dialogue Boxes Keep in mind that unlike a desktop computer the 8525 does not support key chording pressing two keys at the same time You must press one key followed by the next in sequence Refer to Working With Files Folders And Programs on page 47 for additional details about keyboard navigation 46 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE NET Working With Files Folders And Programs 4 Working With Files Folders And i Ele Edit view Go Favorites zslel E adwes wrdows E Windows p ov c OOOO Ig Favorites Fonts Profiles Programs Recent St
235. ehicle Mount Computer User Manual stylus touch pen using 45 Stylus Properties 82 Double tap stylus sensitivity 83 sub menus accessing 134 155 suffix serial I O 204 suffix serial I O 204 Suffix Char 1 9 121 Supervisor security level 51 support services 4 Suspend Shutdown menu 58 suspending power 81 Suspend State SI symbologies IATA 2 of 5 126 symbologies bar code 716 displaying type of barcode 114 System parameters Tekterm 163 system tray 35 T tab CTRL I 789 tab vertical CTRL K 789 TAB Key 3 Tab stop mode 797 target dot duration of 5 taskbar onscreen indicators modifier keys 36 power AC 36 radio signal quality 36 security level 36 using 48 task manager 56 TCP Direct connection 177 195 Teklogix security level 51 Tekterm 133 Telnet connection 177 195 Telnet connection ANSI 177 terminal Terminal ANSI 77 Terminal ANSI 177 Terminal TESS 194 Terminal 8525 mac displaying 151 Terminal Type ANSI Telnet Settings 178 Term Type 2 5 TESS 137 of Cols 196 Index of Rows 196 All Fld Video 207 Append Enter 205 Append F0 205 Applications menu 175 BKSP key behaviour 4 Blink video attrib 207 Bold video attrib 207 Colour Override 198 configuration 138 Conn Type connection type 195 Cont Nxt Fld 205 CTRL commands 7 40 cursor movement in edit modes 140 DEL key behaviour 42 displaying version number 143 Display menu using 138 edit modes 740 Enh Edit
236. eig 1 The Eastgate Office Centre EE Switchboard 44 0 117 951 5151 Eastgate Road Main Fax 44 0 117 952 4103 Bristol BS5 6XX af E mail general vca gov uk United Kingdom Web Site www vca gov uk VEHICLE CERTIFICATION AGENCY Mrs S Boyle Your Reference Psion Teklogix Incorporated C o RFI Global Services Limited Our Reference EAE059966 Date 18 November 2004 Dear Mrs Boyle MANUFACTURER OR ACCREDITED AGENT Psion Teklogix EEC DIRECTIVE 72 245 Job No Vehicle Type Component Approval No Index Rev No EAE059966 Vehicle Mount Computer e11 72 245 95 54 3024 00 Not applicable Model 8525 1 This vehicle type component has been tested and meets the requirements of the above EEC Directive I enclose a set of approval documents comprising the approval test report and your documentation duly authenticated 2 If you think there are any errors in the enclosed package please contact Andrew Meadows telephone 0117 952 4187 immediately Please be aware that from the date of issue we have a three week holding period any corrections required after this time will need to be corrected via an extension index revision or correction certificate as appropriate ROAD TRAFFIC ACT 1988 SECTION 80 3 The Secretary of State for Transport authorises under section 80 of the Road Traffic Act 1988 the above manufacturer or accredited agent to apply to the motor vehicle type part specified the appropriate mark designated in the Motor
237. elnet Settings 178 Login ANSI Telnet Settings 179 Login Failed ANSI Telnet Settings 180 Login Prompt ANSI Telnet Settings 179 Password ANSI Telnet Settings 779 Password Echo ANSI Telnet Settings 180 Password Prompt ANSI Telnet Settings 179 connection host 177 195 connection list table Bluetooth Controls 102 Conn Type connection type 177 195 Cont Nxt Fld 205 control codes 792 control panel accessing 63 basic setup 68 Display Properties 68 icons 64 keyboard properties 70 power management properties 80 stylus properties 82 Convert to UPC A 123 country code 120 CR LF CTRLJ 189 LF character 190 Newline 790 CRC serial VO 204 205 CTRL commands CTRLa 149 CTRLc 144 CTRLf 140 CTRL G Bell 789 CTRLh 7 45 CTRL H Backspace 7 89 CTRL h host select 44 CTRLi 7 40 CTRLI Tab 189 CTRL J Line Feed 189 CTRL K Vertical Tab 189 CTRLL 145 CTRL L Form Feed 89 CTRL p reprint 144 CTRLr 140 CTRLs 43 CTRL s status displaying continuously 144 CTRLt 143 CTRL t status display with unit 144 CTRLu 40 CTRLw 143 CTRL Key 37 cursor changing shape of 169 Enh Edit mode 208 Field Order 206 linefeed mode ANSI 7 89 moving between fields 188 206 newline mode ANSI 89 Custom Characters 172 cycle tasks 55 D data entering 139 208 SS VA c 18 Nov 2004 gt I Y e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Ign Bcode fld 208 with a bar code reader 237 serial O 204
238. en if the default font is not acceptable An escape sequence must be sent from the host before a vehicle mount can switch to either 80 col font or 132 col font e Use the RIGHT or LEFT arrow keys to scroll through the size options for these parameters c 18 Nov 2004 A ly Y 7 182 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Screen Video r 06 Video Range Bold NONE see text Blink BLNK see text Reverse REV see text Underline ULIN see text The possible attributes for these parameters are BLNK blink ULIN underline REV reverse and NONE normal Bold This parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the Bold ANSI attribute Blink This parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the Blink ANSI attribute Reverse This parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the Reverse ANSI attribute Underline This parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the Underline ANSI attribute Label FI FIO KI Note This menu uses string entry fields For detailed information about com pleting this type of field refer to String Entry Parameters on page 156 06 Label F1 10 F1 F10
239. ens rarely require recalibration However if your touchscreen has never been calibrated or if you find that the stylus pointer is not accurate when you tap on an item follow the directions in the Calibration tab e Choose the Calibration tab and then tap on the Recalibrate button Stylus Properties Ele View D Double Tap Calibration Options Bluetooth T If your Windows CE device is not responding properly to your taps you Device Em A may need to recalibrate your screen ex Recalibration involves tapping the center of a target If you miss the 2 center keep the stylus on the screen slide it over the target s center Mouse and then lift the stylus To start tap Recalibrate Remove orage ylus SKIGOIX Ota kecal Volume Wireless Programs Manager Scanners Sounds WAN amp Stat TekTerm s Control Panel a Stylus Properties i5 all Figure 5 23 Calibrating The Touchscreen e Follow the directions in the Calibration tab to recalibrate the sc c 18 Nov 2004 h ra e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 83 Chapter 5 Configuration Options Disabling The Touchscreen 5 5 5 3 Options Disabling The Touchscreen File View Stylus Properties 2 x Double Tap calibration i Exc a Bluetooth board Device 5 Mouse Bional D tings Remove Storage Stylus System Teklogi Total Recall Volume am
240. entry parameters the UP arrow DOWN arrow ENTER and lt BKSP gt keys have the following functions e The UP and DOWN arrow keys move the cursor between entry fields in the direction of the arrow ENTER completes the entry field e BKSP deletes the character to the left of the cursor e DEL key combination BLUE lt BKSP gt clears the entire field Choosing An ASCII Character With The Arrow Keys AN Important Make sure the lt CTRL gt and lt SHIFT gt keys are turned off By pressing either the lt RIGHT gt or lt LEFT gt arrow key you can cycle through a set of printable characters not directly accessible from the keyboard e Press the RIGHT arrow to display the next character in this sequence and the LEFT arrow to display the previous one Adding Additional ASCII Characters When you ve chosen an ASCII character and want to add another one in the same field the cursor must be moved to the right of the existing character Normally pressing the lt RIGHT gt arrow key moves the cursor to the right but in a string entry field pressing the lt RIGHT gt arrow key cycles through the available ASCII characters instead If you ve already chosen an ASCII character and want to add another one in the field you need to take a few extra steps to move the cursor to the right To add another ASCII character in the string entry field next to the one you ve already chosen e Type a
241. enu with which you want to work TEKLOGIX 8525 Exec H234n 61 Display Menu E rs 4 Desktop a Programs gt fe ActiveSync ul Shortcuts id M3 Command Prompt Er uz y Settings gt Internet Explorer o Go SQ Remote Connect io RP shutdown gt 2 TekTerm Windows Explorer Figure 4 5 Start Menu AM i 07 4 4 1 The Desktop Choosing the Desktop option from the Start Menu displays the 8525 desktop c 18 Nov 2004 d fa I 50 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE NET Security Levels 4 4 2 Security Levels Choosing the Security option from the Start Menu displays a dialogue box in which you can define the access level for the 8525 Supervisor or User Security Level Supervisor User Password a Set Password Configure Figure 4 6 Security Level Assigning The Supervisor Security Level The security level is represented by an icon in the shape of a lock in the taskbar The security levels define the options accessible to the operator in the Mart Menu and the taskbar By default the security level is set to User restricting access to only the most basic Start Menu items To allow access to all the Start Menu and taskbar options e Tap on the radio button next to Supervisor e Tap the stylus in the Password field and type the Supervisor level password default password is 123456 e
242. er 1 38 Shared Mode network authentication 79 SHIFT Key 30 Short Code 5 Shutdown Bootloader 58 Cold Reset 58 Suspend 58 Warm Reset 58 Shutdown Start Menu 57 SICRC 204 SI Fkey 204 signal quality radio 36 SI mode 203 SI prefix suffix 204 size of fields 118 Size Chars bar code scanning 118 Smart echo mode 88 SO CRC 205 softkey function keys 134 softkeys 165 softkeys Function keys 134 softkey labels changing Label F1 F10 797 softkey labels changing Label F1 F5 183 Softkeys parameter 65 SO prefix suffix 204 sound 65 Sound Ctrl 166 SPACE Key 37 specifications battery 250 for 8525 243 Split Screen dividing and displaying 70 moving the cursor between split screens 771 parameters used 770 toggling between full and split screens 171 Type and View IDs 170 using a Wild Card asterisk 172 Split Screen 70 Standard Code 128 720 Start ANSI 792 Start Menu 50 cycle tasks 55 desktop 50 programs 53 Run 57 Security 31 Settings 56 Shutdown 57 system tray 55 task manager 56 start up menu 153 statistics screen 802 1Q 150 status displaying continuously 144 status displaying unit 144 status area Tekterm 137 status message TESS 143 Stop Bits 2 9 ES string entry parameters 155 156 15 MA adding special characters tg Bs cycling through special c key function description Strip Leading 9 121 Strip Trailing 9 121 sts session status 52 14 Psion Teklogix 8525 V
243. erleaved 2 of 5 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Interleaved 2 of 5 or off to disable it Mod 10 Check If this parameter is enabled set to ON the Mod 10 check digit is calculated This calculation is the same as the Code 39 Mod 10 check digit ITF Check If this parameter is enabled set to ON the ITF 14 16 Mod 10 che calculated c 18 Nov 2004 H E Y 7 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 125 Chapter 5 Configuration MSI Plessey Include Check If this parameter is enabled set to ON the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data Field Size Chars Refer to page 119 for details 5 9 2 12 MSI Plessey Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable MSI Plessey or off to disable it One Check Digit If this parameter is enabled set to ON it is assumed that the last digit is a check digit Include Check If this parameter is enabled set to ON the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data Field Size Chars Refer to page 119 for details 5 92 13 Discrete 2 of 5 Mod 10 Check If this parameter is enabled set to ON the Mod 10 check digit is calculated This calculation is the same as the Code 39 Mod 10 check digit ITF Check If this parameter is enabled set to ON the ITF 14 16 Mod 10 check digit is calculated Include Check If this parameter is enabled set to ON
244. erminal 0 3 Means of identification of type if marked on the component Black on white label stock 0 3 1 Location of that marking Refer to DOC MFG LABEL SPEC 8525 ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION 0 5 Name and address of manufacturer Psion Teklogix Inc 2100 Meadowvale Boulevard Mississauga Ontario L5N 7J9 Canada 0 5 1 Name and address of manufacturer s representative Psion Teklogix S A La Duranne 135 Rue Rene Descarted BP421000 13591 Aix EN Provence Cedx 3 France 0 7 Location and method of affixing of the EEC approval mark Refer to DOC MFG LABEL SPEC 8525 ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION VA 18 Nov 2004 INFORMATION DOCUMENT RELATING TO VCA JOB NUMBER EAE059966 RELATING TO TYPE APPROVAL OF AN ESA WITH RESPECT TO ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY 72 245 EEC AS LAST AMENDED BY 95 54 EC 0 8 Address es of assembly plant s As manufacturer 1 This ESA shall be approved as a Component STU Component 2 Any restrictions of use and conditions for fitting None The restrictions for use as regards this application are the test configuration used during the test Any deviation from this configuration may compromise the EMC performance of the system Appendix 1 The ESA chosen to represent the type Vehicle Mount Computer Model 8525 Further details about the equipment under test accessories support equipment and interconnection cables are provided in RFI test report serial number RFI EMCE1 RP46573JD0
245. es Range Xmit Count 99 SOS Xmit Wait 1 0 999 Dev Attr 602 1 2 060c see text Auto Answer see text 7 bit X Y N Block Mode see text 184 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Xmit Modes Xmit Count This parameter determines how many characters from the keyboard or scanner are buffered by the 8525 before being transmitted to the host If 0 zero is selected the vehicle mount transmits only according to the Xmit Wait parameter If the ANSI block mode features are used this parameter should be set to 99 KI Note Ifthe 8525 is not in local edit mode the ENTER arrow lt CTRL gt and function keys cause an immediate radio transmission regardless of the Xmit Count parameter setting Xmit Wait This parameter determines the length of time the 8525 collects keystrokes before transmitting them to the host This value is specified in increments of one 10th of a second i e a value of 10 represents 1 second If 0 zero is selected the computer transmits only according to the Xmit Count parameter KI Note Ifthe 8525 is not in local edit mode the ENTER arrow lt CTRL gt and function keys cause an immediate radio transmission regardless of the Xmit Wait parameter setting Dev Attr This string entry parameter specifies a device attribute string This string can be up to 16 characters long The computer sends thi
246. es and Queuing on page 201 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 145 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Queuing Mode 6 7 12 Queuing Mode In some applications queuing mode can decrease the computer lock time In queuing mode the host computer may send several pages to an 8525 without waiting for a response These pages are stored in a queue within the 8525 vehicle mount The operator completes the entries on the first page and then presses a function key The 8525 simultaneously transmits to the host and displays the next page in the queue The computer does not lock allowing the operator to enter data on the next page immediately This continues as long as there are pages in the queue Queuing mode is used for repetitive tasks and the queued screens look identical The 8525 displays a Next message indicating that a new page is on the display Next messages also contain information about radio communications NEXT B indicates that the 8525 has data to transmit to the base station NEXT H indicates that the base station has acknowledged a transmission Unlike lock messages Next messages do not lock the keyboard Keying is allowed while Next messages are displayed While queuing mode may improve apparent response time it can present difficulties to hosts that are operating in real time It should only be used after careful consideration of the host environment The 8525 must be config
247. es not match Visible field matching means that the data to be matched is displayed in the entry field Enter the decimal value for the ASCII character that will be used by the host to identify visible match field data Enter O zero to disable this feature KI Note Another method of field matching is available directly through the TESS data stream H Match Chr This parameter enables hidden field matching and defines the character that identifies hidden field match data from the host Field matching allows the host to pre load data into an entry field that is compared with the user s input The 8525 beeps if the entered data does not match Hidden field matching means that the data matched is not displayed in the entry field ga the ho Y e c 18 Nov 2004 gt KI Note Another method of field matching is available directly Rough the k TESS data stream Enter the decimal value for the ASCII character that will be used E identify hidden match field data Enter O zero to disable this fea a amp Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 199 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Tests Fill Chr This parameter specifies the character that identifies empty entry fields Enter the ASCII decimal equivalent of this character The most commonly used characters are underline Enter 95 period Enter 46 KI Note 8525s in some systems may use the space character with the host using reverse video a
248. essary information using the keyboard and then press lt ENTER gt to return to smart echo mode 6 9 The Radio Statistics Screen To access the radios statistics screen you ll need to use the Applications menu to assign a radio title e Inthe More Parameters menu choose Applications e Inthe Type field choose RadioStats e Inthe Title field type a name for the radio screen e g Radio e Press F4 to save your changes and then reset the 8525 press and hold down the BLUE and ENTER Keys for a minimum of 6 seconds e Inthe Display menu type the letter corresponding to the radio statistics screen For example in the sample screen below you d type d to display the radio statistics screen 01 Display Menu A Parameters B TESS C ANSI D Radio c 18 Nov 2004 E a e 150 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application 802 IQ Stats Screen 6 9 1 802 10 Stats Screen AP Controller MAC 00 00 00 00 Terminal MAC 00 00 00 00 00 00 bootnum C33B rm 12 xm 7 rb 50 xi 1 ra 7 xa 12 bt O xr 1 rt avg lst 10000 0 fr 00 ar 00 fh 00 ah 00 Ca 0 tn 0 sts 0 typ 0 msk 0 Q 0 AcQ 1 TxQ 1 Address Info Radio Address O0 End of statistics 802 10 Stats e AP Controller mac MAC address of the Teklogix access point controller Terminal MAC bootnum
249. essible to application prog ANSI control functions Next Page NP and Previous page PP fe used t select another page These pages are independent of each other so that if Sieg t scroll off a page the other pages are unaffected required by the selected number and size of pages exceeds the mem the computer V Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 181 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Screen of Rows This parameter defines the logical page length in lines used by the host computer application Emulator systems trim the host application screens to this length This page length cannot be smaller than the length of the vehicle mount s display Display panning is used if the page is longer than the display KI Note The value in this parameter must be an even number of Cols This parameter defines the logical page width in characters used by the host computer application Emulator systems trim the host application screens to this width This page width cannot be smaller than the width of the display Display panning is used if the page is wider than the display L Note The value in this parameter must be an even number Default font This parameter determines the default font that appears when the 8525 memory is reset Use the RIGHT or LEFT arrow key to scroll through the available options 80 col font 132 col font These parameters are used to set the font size on the scre
250. eter is enabled set to Y each time a DLE P 0x10 character is encountered in the serial input it is removed and the character following it will be replaced with its 1 s complement SI Fkey This parameter allows you to choose the function key you want appended to the serial input For example entering a value of 1 appends F1 to serial input A value of 0 zero disables this parameter a suffix is not added KI Note Data is transmitted as soon as the function key has been appended 0 prefix This parameter determines the start of message character on serial output Enter an ASCII numeric equivalent from 0 to 255 to represent the start character A value of 0 zero indicates no prefix S0 suffix This parameter determines the end of message character on serial output Entera ASCII numeric equivalent from 0 to 255 to represent the end character A vg 0 zero indicates no suffix c 18 Nov 2004 A ly Y 204 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Scanner 0 CRC When this parameter is enabled set to Y a CRC16 value is appended to the serial output message Also when this parameter is enabled set to Y for each control character in the serial output stream a DLE is inserted to precede that character The control character is replaced with its 1 s complement 6 20 2 6 Scanner 05 Scanner
251. etwork carrier requirements press lt ENTER gt to save your changes 11 At this point you ll need to return to the Control Panel and select the Network and Dial up Connections icon Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 107 Chapter 5 Configuration The Bluetooth GPRS Phone 12 In the network connection window the new network configuration in this case GPRS Network is displayed Choose the new icon Be Ei en Advanced xx i ss A T gt ES Make New Serial Cable USB Cable UN Connection on COM2 amp jStart Tekrerm amp Network Connections i54 Figure 5 53 GPRS Network Connection This onscreen message indicates the status of your connection connected disconnected error messages and so on Bs Ea wow aaron La ER Ss 2 Make New oe Connection network Connected to GPRS uus A Connected Hide this message Start Tekrerm JE Network Connections ILi547 Figure 5 54 Successful Connection Select the Hide button to move this message to the background You can now access the internet TEE EE El eww sl Address http www msn com Great Deal MSN 9 Internet Access Friday May 14 Today on MSN Arm in arm in arm in OS Hotmail Giant octobus finds love Autos Careers amp Jobs 4 http fg msn com 0USIs5 31472_315529 HP 1001 http entertairn Start TekTerm amp Network Connections pM Figure 5 55 Acces
252. ey and press the C key three times within a two second period e Press ENTER This procedure restarts the TESS session without affecting the rest of the 8525 c 18 Nov 2004 A h X Y e 144 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application The Local Menu 6 7 10 The Local Menu The host can store local procedures in the 8525 for use when the unit is off line A menu of these procedures appears whenever lt CTRL gt lt L gt is pressed see Figure 6 3 e Press the function key corresponding to the procedure you want to perform Local procedures will not function when the Lcl Process and Queuing parameters are disabled see Lcl Process Save on Reset on page 201 and Queuing on page 201 Although using local procedures eliminates the advantages of an on line 8525 it allows work to continue when the host is unavailable The LOCK B H messages are replaced with NEXT B H in this mode LOCAL MI Select Host Figure 6 3 Local Menu 6 7 11 Selecting Another Host Computer e Press lt CTRL gt lt H gt or F9 from the local menu to display a menu of available hosts This menu appears only when more than one host is available Select Host Fl Host 1 F2 Host 2 WA Figure 6 4 Select Host Screen EL Note This feature will not function when the Lcl Process parameters are disabled see Lcl Process Save on R
253. ey you want to insert in the dialogue box attached to this parameter The ASCII Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed Pressing the lt ESC gt key in this dialogue box resets the data to zero Strip Leading This parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the beginning of the bar code before the prefix character is added EL Note For Code 39 bar codes the AIAG Strip is performed before the Strip Leading Strip Trailing The value entered in this parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the end of the bar code before the suffix character is added 5 9 2 2 Code 128 Settings Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Code 128 or off to disable it Include Sym Setting Include Sym to ON causes the group separator s and start code contained in this type of bar code to be displayed on the screen EA Note This option is available only when EAN UCC 128 is selected eig Variations VA When using Code 128 you can choose the variation or type of bar code scanner will recognize The options available are Standard UCC and These options are described below N UCC Ete Nov 2004 120 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration EAN 13 Settings Standard Enable set to ON Standard if Code 128 is desired UCC 128 UCC is a variation of Code 128 EAN UC
254. forward host number 152 Emulation 209 i Field mode 140 emulation keys IBM 5250 139 Fidd Dux 206 Enable Alarm 2 7 fields enabling disabling Y N parameters 154 Arrow mode 88 156 Encryption Bluetooth Controls 99 ca med 138 END 51 completing a data field 139 207 End ANSI 192 Enh Edit mode 208 END Key 31 entry fields 138 200 Enh Edit Mode TESS 208 Field Order 206 ENTER key 47 Field Scroll 196 completing a data field 739 Field Size 778 CR LF character 190 fixed fields 138 Enter on Arrows 207 hidden match 99 Local Echo mode ANSI 189 Ign Bcode fld 208 Sg Es ANSI 189 insert mode 190 208 mit Enter 90 match fields 38 Enter On Arr 207 replace mode 190 208 18 Nov 2004 ENTER Pmpt ANSI Telnet Settings 178 serial I O fields 138 A E Enter To FO 207 Serial In Out 203 A o ENT Key 226 size 118 Ba 6 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual transmit on 739 video attributes 53 207 visible match 799 Fields parameters for TESS Settings 206 Fill Chr 200 Fixed Field Overhd 2 fixed fields 138 F Keys function keys 226 FKEY0 39 2 4 2 6 Flow Control 2 9 Follow Cursor 224 font Default Font 7 82 208 Font Change 68 Font Override 174 Foreground amp Background Colour Override 184 198 Foreground amp Background Default Colour 175 Format Effector Transfer Mode FETM 187 form feed CTRL L 189 forward host number fh 52 forward remote number fr 152 fr forward rem
255. ftware and documentation have been developed entirely at private expense and are provided as Commercial Computer Software or restricted computer soft ware They are delivered and licensed as commercial computer software as defined in DFARS 252 227 7013 Oct 1988 DFARS 252 211 7015 May 1991 or DFARS 252 227 7014 Jun 1995 as a commercial item as defined in FAR 2 101 a or as Restricted computer software as defined in FAR 52 227 19 Jun 1987 or any equivalent agency regulation or contract clause whichever is applicable You have only those rights provided for such Software and Documentation by the applicable FAR or DFARS clause or the MDC standard software agreement for the product Export Law Assurances You may not use or otherwise export or reexport the Software except as authorized by United States law and the laws of the jurisdiction in which the Software was obtained In particular but without limitation the Software may not be exported or reexported 1 into or to a national or resident of any U S embargoed country or ii to anyone on the U S Treasury Department s list of Specially Designated Nationals or the U S Department of Commerce s Table of Denial Orders By using the Software you represent and warrant that you are not located in under control of or a national or resident of any such country or on any such list Limited Warranty on Media if applicable MDC warrants the media on which the Softwa
256. g parameter is enabled y The allowable range for this parameter is 1 to 60 5 5 7 5 Radio Tab EIS ET Info l Channel l Protocol Power Radio Mode UNLOCKED Modulation Baud Rate 2 Level 4800 Data Squelch Data Squelch 50 Test Squelch Frequency Statistics Advanced Figure 5 37 Radio Tab Modulation Baud Rate The options listed in the Modulation Baud Rate dropdown menu are 2 Level 4800 2 Level 9600 4 Level 9600 and 4 Level 19200 The value assigned to this parameter must be identical to the corresponding parameter in the Psion Teklogix Base Station This parameter is stored in the radio s non volatile memory The default value for Modulation Baud Rate is 2 Leve1 9600 Data Squelch Data Squelch controls the radio receiver cutting it off when the signal is too weak for reception of anything but noise Receive Signal Strength Indicator values beto de the Data Squelch threshold prevent further processing of the receive signal while A higher values allow further processing The allowable range is 0 to 100 wi default value of 0 C 18 Nov 2004 x e 96 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Radio Tab In noisy environments this value can be increased to reject noise In environments with less noise this value can be decreased to allow the received signal and increase range This parameter is stored in the radio s no
257. g so may cause damage to the 8525 and or the tethered device B RS232 Port Pinout Pin di No Description DCD Data Carrier Detect RXD Receive Data TXD Transmit Data DTR Data Terminal Ready GND Signal Ground DSR Data Set Ready RTS Ready To Send CTS Clear to Send 09 5V POWER co A DA M Ww N VA CAUTION If enabled software configurable 5V power will appea amp ec No v 2004 which may be the Ring Indicator line on some devices su E modems gt 1 2 Amp Max AL Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual B 1 Appendix B Port Pinouts DB 26 Auxiliary Port Pinout B 3 DB 26 Auxiliary Port Pinout Pin No Signal And Description 1 EXT 5V SW Configurable 5V power for External devices such as USB 1 2 Amp max EXT 5V SW Same as above MIC IN Microphone input MIC GND Microphone signal ground Speaker positive Speaker negative GND Signal Ground coo A DA M B Ww N USB_HOST_PORT_4 PLUS for connecting external devices such as key boards mice printers USB_HOST_PORT_4 PLUS for connecting external devices such as key boards mice printers 10 GND Signal Ground 11 USB DEVICE PLUS For connections to USB Hosts such as computers 12 USB DEVICE NEGATIVE For connections to USB Hosts such as com puters
258. ge from 0 to 24 The value assigned to Command Region Left and Command Region Right parameters represent columns on the 8525 screen The allowable values range from 0 to 80 c 18 Nov 2004 A h X Y e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 211 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Emulation 3274 Telnet Emulation rm 05 Emulation E Range Fujitsu Host N Y N Intl EBCDIC N Y N Nulls in Fields N Y N IP for SysReq N Y N BRK for Attn N Y N LU Name Enabled N Y N LU Name see text Features see text FKEYO 7 see text FKEY8 15 see text FKEY16 23 see text FKEY24 31 see text FKEY32 39 see text Fujitsu Host If this parameter is set to Y data is sent in Fujitsu format Enabling Fujitsu Host causes the standard IBM formatting codes for start of field setting buffers etc to be replaced by the codes used by Fujitsu host computers Intl EBCDIC If this parameter is enabled set to Y the international EBCDIC character set is used swapping the positions of the and characters Nulls in Fields Setting this parameter to Y allows null characters e g hyphens or periods to fill in empty entry fields IP for SysReq When the system request key is pressed a Telnet Interrupt Process command is generated The Interrupt Process command is sent to the h
259. greement INFRINGEMENT IF YOU HAVE RECEIVED ANY WARRANTIES REGARDING THE DEVICE OR THE SOFTWARE THOSE WARRAN TIES DO NOT ORIGINATE FROM AND ARE NOT BINDING ON MS e Note on Java Support The SOFTWARE may contain support for pro grams written in Java Java technology is not fault tolerant and is not designed manufactured or intended for use or resale as online control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail safe performance such as in the operation of nuclear facilities aircraft navigation or communica tion systems air traffic control direct life support machines or weapons systems in which the failure of Java technology could lead directly to death personal injury or severe physical or environmental damage Sun Microsystems Inc has contractually obligated MS to make this disclaimer No Liability for Certain Damages EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW MS SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PER FORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PUR POSE IN NO EVENT SHALL MS BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U S TWO HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS U S 250 00 Limitations on Reverse Engineering Decompilation and Disassembly You may not reverse engineer decompile or disassemble the SOFTWARE except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicabl
260. gs 176 193 character attributes TESS 198 Character Sets TESS 198 Fields parameters TESS 206 Host Conn ANSI 177 Host Conn TESS 195 menu Applications 775 Scanner parameters TESS 205 Screen parameters ANSI 181 Screen parameters TESS 196 TESS Settings 194 209 Type and Title 176 approvals 8525 244 ar acknowledged remote number 1 52 arrow keys 147 completing a data field 1739 207 cycling through special characters 157 Enh Mode using 208 moving the cursor 37 Arrow mode 788 Arrows 225 ASCII decimal equivalents of characters 200 FullAscii 7 matching fields 199 Async In 192 attributes video 183 207 Audio 765 audio indicators description of beep conditions 37 Authentication Bluetooth Controls 99 authentication network 19 Auto Answer 785 Auto Login ANSI Telnet Settings 179 Auto Radio Addr 762 227 AutoRep Fn function key sent to host 200 AutoRep T O 200 Auto Start 168 auto tab fields 138 Auto Term ANSI 176 194 Auto wrap 791 B backlight display 69 keyboard 32 backspace CTRL H 189 backup profile creating Total Recall 708 backup profile restoring Total Recall 111 bar code AIAG 206 appending to 715 119 121 connecting bar code reader 237 decodes required 716 decoding edge to edge 116 displaying type of bar code 4 parameters 116 127 prefix character 118 121 Security 116 stripping characters 119 121 suffix character 119 121 symbologies Codabar 123 Code 11 124 Code 128 119 C
261. h failed to transmit CD Number of carrier detect changes detected Coll Number of collisions detected TxD Actual difference in time in RTC ticks between when the most recent trans mit with timestamp was scheduled to start and when it actually started TxMD Maximum Tx D value Number of extra characters received for last received message due to delay in host reporting back actual body size RxMx Maximum Rx X value MChg Number of completed mode changes Rx X Table 5 2 Low Level Statistics Descriptions Default All Parameters e Tap on the Default all Parameters button to return all registry parameters to default values When this button is pressed a screen appears asking if you re sure you want to return all parameters to their default values e Tap on the Yes button to return values to their default settings KI Note This button does not default the radio parameters set under the Re pa c 18 Nov 2004 H A YA d 88 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Channel Tab 5 5 7 2 Channel Tab Narrow Band Radio ok sl Info Channel Protocol Power Redio Channel Number zu lr Power Up Channel Chamel Enable List Channel Stitch Spaced Siow Fast Chamel Selection E Manuel Select Set Switch Table Figure 5 3 Channel Tab Channel Number This parameter determines the operating radio
262. hannel searching For example if Channel is the operating channel and all other channels are enabled v the 8525 can roam through all 20 channels Channel Switch Speed This parameter changes the threshold the 8525 uses to determine when communication quality with a base station is unacceptable When this threshold is exceeded the unit starts channel searching for a new base station Setting this parameter to Slow means a higher threshold the 8525 is more tolerant of poor communication quality When the channel quality of the vehicle mount radio drops below 46 the unit monitors the channel quality for 15 timeout periods before searching for a new channel If Channel Switch Speed is set to Fast the current channel is only monitored for up to 2 time out periods before channel switching begins A N Important Fast switch speed is most effective where coverage are largely overlapping If the coverage areas barely overlap have dead spots or if the 8525 frequently operates on the fringe Ofbbv V 2004 erage this parameter should be set to Slow I e 0 90 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Channel Tab Channel Selection Enabling V Manual Select allows you to set the channel search order the 8525 will use if communication quality drops and channel switching is required If this parameter is enabled the 8525 uses the channel switching lists spe
263. hat field the cursor does not shift to the left when that character is erased it remains in the right most position in the field When the last character in a field is erased the field remains empty i e any pre filled data is not displayed Pressing the BKSP key in the empty field sounds a keyboard error beep The lt BKSP gt key can delete data pre filled by the host application If data is entered into a field and then deleted before the field is com pleted the field remains unmodified when the cursor leaves the field or when the screen is transmitted Fcursor mode Refer to Field Mode at the beginning of this table The lt BKSP gt key operates in exactly the same manner in Fcursor mode as it does in Field mode 6 1 6 TESS Status Message Press lt CTRL gt lt S gt to continuously display the status message in the lower left corner of the screen Press CTRL S again if you want the status message to appear only during transmit lock H The message should look similar to the sample below V6 0 is the TESS version number fld indicates that TESS is currently mode nsert and replace mode are represented as ins and rep res number 0 6 indicates the response time of the last transmission i CTRL T to display the unit number instead of the TESS ve V6 0 fld 0 6 oem he secon sion Bue c 18 Nov 2004 h x amp Psion Teklogix 8
264. he associated information Textbox A textbox requires that you type information Highlight the textbox with the stylus and then type the appropriate information Dropdown This type of menu is identified by up and down arrows next to the dropdown menu to indicate that additional options are available Tap the stylus on the arrow to display the options in the menu Checkbox This box allows you to select or deselect an option To select or deselect a checkbox tap the stylus on the checkbox to select V or deselect it Radio buttons These buttons allow you to choose from a number of options For example in the sample screen in Figure 4 16 on page 59 you can choose to Obtain an IP address via DHCP or Specify an IP address Tap the stylus on the button to select or deselect it Buttons This type of button allows you to Save Delete and so on the options you ve chosen in a dialogue box Tap the stylus on the button to activates Saving Your Choices Once you ve made all your changes tap o changes and exit the window KI Note A dialogue box item that is displayed in grey text indicat currently available Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 59 c 18 Nov 2004 A k z d e CONFIGURATION 5 1 Remote Desktop Connection lens 63 52 Pocket PC Compatibility een 63 3x3 The Control Panel 5 sos sse wohnen sog eg ee ws 63 5 4 Control Panel ICOS sa
265. he SSID of your access point and the security methods implemented in the network including access keys A Important Ifthe 8525 is equipped with a radio that has never been config ured the radio settings dialogue box opens automatically when the unit is powered on In this case skip to Step 4 on page 17 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 15 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Configuring An IEEE 802 11 Radio Installed In The 8525 To configure the 802 11b radio 1 Tap on the Windows Start button in the taskbar and tap on Set tings gt Network and Dial up Connections TEKLOGIX 8525 Exec H234n O1 Display Henu gt bal Security be F Programs ze CjShorteuts gt am E Settings gt amp Control Panel ES Oran Eeto and Dialup Connections E A ER METTE O A TH Figure 2 1 Network And Dial Up Connections KI Note You can also press CTRL lt ESC gt to display the Start Menu 2 Choose the radio icon to open the Wireless LAN Settings window in the Mein screen below this is labelled PTXWLAG Serial Cable X USB Cable on COM2 AJE A PTXWLAG Start TekTerm amp Network Connections Figure 2 2 Wireless Settings Window ise C As Nov 2004 h po Li 16 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Configuring An IEEE 802 11 Radio Installed In The 8525 3 Wireless Statistics Tab
266. he enclosed Software unless you have a separate written agreement with Meetinghouse Data Communications Inc herein also known as MDC License Grant MDC grants you a non exclusive and non transferable license to Use one copy of the Software Use means storing loading installing executing or displaying the Software Software means software documentation and any fonts accompanying this License whether on disk in read only memory on any other media or in any other form You may not modify the Software or disable any licensing or control features of the Software If the Software is licensed for concurrent use you may not allow more than the maximum number of authorized users to Use the Software concurrently The Software is licensed as a Shareware version on one computer only You may use the Software distributed and licensed as Shareware on a trial basis only The shareware version of the Software may be distributed freely without any associated fees to other parties who wish to try the software as long as the Software is distrib uted within an exact copy of the original MDC self extracting installatie other words nothing may be left out of the Shareware as distributed site at http www mtghouse com C As Nov 2004 P h po Li Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Ill License Agreement All permanent licenses are prepaid and the Software is licensed to you by MDC You own t
267. he media on which the Software is recorded but MDC and or MDC s licensor s retain title to the Software The Software and any copies which this License authorizes you to make are subject to this License Permitted Uses and Restrictions This License allows you to install and use the Software on a single computer at a time This License does not allow the Software to exist on more than one computer at a time You may make one copy of the Software in machine readable form for backup purposes only The backup copy must include all copyright information con tained on the original Except as expressly permitted in this License you may not in whole or part decompile reverse engineer disassemble modify rent lease loan sublicense distribute or create derivative works based upon the Software or trans mit the Software over a network You may not copy the Software onto any bulletin board or similar system You agree that you will not utilize any information obtained from MDC or obtained or learned in the course of using the Software to develop or improve technology with similar functionality to the Software nor will you directly or indirectly assist any other party in doing so You further agree that you will not separate the various modules of the software for their different purposes if any High Risk Activities The Software is not fault tolerant and is not designed manufactured or intended for use or resale as on line control equipment in
268. he options 6 11 1 5 String Entry Parameters You ll need to use the keyboard to enter values in string entry fields Refer to String Entry Parameters on page 156 for details 6 11 2 Using The Keyboard To Navigate Through Menus e Press the UP and DOWN arrow keys to move the cursor up and down the current menu The currently selected parameter name will be displayed in reverse video 6 11 2 1 Sub Menus The character appearing to the right of the menu item indicates that it has a sub menu Displaying Sub Menus To display a sub menu e Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to position the cursor on the menu item with the sub menu you want to display e Press Fl the NEXT menu function key Returning To The Previous Menu e Press F2 the PREV function key or e Press lt ESC gt c 18 Nov 2004 A h X Y amp Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 155 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Numeric Parameters N 6 11 2 2 Numeric Parameters Numeric parameters are displayed in reverse video To increment or decrement a number e Press the RIGHT or LEFT arrow keys or ka the desired number in the field Negative values are entered by typing minus sign and then the number e Press ENTER Each numeric parameter has a preset range of numbers assigned to it for example a preset range of 1 through 10 If you attempt to ente
269. he right most character position of the field the cursor does not shift to the left when that character is erased it remains in the right most position in the field When the last character in a field is erased the field remains empty that is any pre filled data is not displayed Pressing the lt BKSP gt in the empty field results in a keyboard error beep If data is entered in a field and is then deleted before the field is com pleted the field remains unmodified when the cursor lea i theigldoy 200 4 or when the screen is transmitted The lt BKSP gt key can delete data pre filled by the host app fication Vf gia 142 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual A h x amp Insert mode Chapter 6 Tekterm Application TESS Status Message In a left justified field the lt BKSP gt function erases the character on which the cursor is positioned unless it is at the right end of the char acter string in this case it erases the character to the left of the cursor When the last character in a field is erased the field remains empty and any further lt BKSP gt functions in the empty field result in a key board error beep In a right justified field the lt BKSP gt function erases the character that is to the right of the cursor and then shifts the data remaining to the right one position If the lt BKSP gt key is pressed while the cursor is in the right most character position of t
270. hicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application IBM 5250 Emulation Keys 6 7 4 IBM 5250 Emulation Keys The following keys allow the Psion Teklogix computer to better emulate the functions of a true IBM 5250 terminal AN Note These keys are active at all times in TESS applications Key Sequence Cursor Movement Cursor moves to the first position in the next lt PgDn gt key input field If already in the last field the cursor moves to the first input field on the screen Cursor moves to the beginning of the current lt PgUp gt key field If already in the first position the cursor moves to beginning of the previous field Current field is cleared from the cursor position lt End gt key to the end of the field and the cursor moves to the next input field lt Home gt key Cursor moves to the first input field on the screen 6 7 5 Data Entry The 8525 accepts data until the operator presses a key that sends a transmission to the host computer The following actions cause the 8525 to transmit e Pressing a function key or the ENTER key which is considered to be lt FO gt causes the 8525 to transmit Completing data entry into a transmit on entry field also causes the 8525 to transmit There are several ways to configure the 8525 vehicle mount to complete a data field e Pressing ENTER after entering data e Pressing a function key after entering data e Pressing an a
271. ice operation To ensure compliance operations at closer than this distance is not recommended T Do Not Remove Covers On OPEN ENCLOSURES To avoid injury the equipment covers and enclosures should only be removed by qualified service personnel Do not operate the equipment without the covers and enclosures properly installed A AN Caution Use of the Vehicle Mount Computer while charging the fork truck battery is prohibited A CAUTION Use of additional wiring and attachments not recommended or sold by the manufacturer may result in fire electric shock or personal injury CAUTION If using an AC adaptor use only the AC adaptor recommended by manufacturer N Dm Do not operate the vehicle mount computer with a damaged cord or plug Replace immediately A AN Caution C Make sure the cord is positioned so that it is not stepped on tripped over or otherwise subjected to damage or stress Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual XI Approvals And Safety Summary AY CAUTION An extension cord should not be used unless absolutely necessary Use of an improper extension cord could result in fire or electric shock A CAUTION To reduce risk of electric shock unplug the vehicle mount computer from the DC source before attempting any maintenance or cleaning e Warning Physically disconnect the 8525 from the vehicle battery during battery charging into AC outlet c 18 Nov 2004 E a di e Xl
272. icrosoft Windows CE NET operating system It is intended for use in commercial and light industrial applications with a focus on real time wireless data transactions AII possible bar code input methodologies are supported by a variety of scanners available 3 Features e Processor And Memory 400MHz ARM RISC 400 MIPS 32KB instruction 32KB data cache on board RAM 128mByte SDRAM on board ROM 64 MByte FLASH e Operating System Windows CE NET 4 2 e Wireless Communication IEEE 802 11b 11 Mbps 2 4 GHz Compact Flash radio external and internal antenna IEEE 802 11b 11 Mbps 2 4 GHz external antenna PC Card Slot radio standard antenna integrated onto radio card Future radio additions IEEE 802 11g 22Mbps 2 4GHz Compact Flash radio IEEE 802 11a 54Mbps 5 GHz Compact Flash radio IEEE 802 11a 54Mbps 5 GHz PC Card radio NextGen Narrowband 400 500 MHz radio GSM GPRS PC Card radio for future release Bluetooth SD I O radio 2 4 GHz 5m range e Application Software VA c 18 Nov 2004 1250 HP 2392 wi Internet Explorer 6 for CE Open Tekterm ANSI TESS terminal emulations IBM 3270 IBM e User Interface Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 5 Chapter 1 Introduction Features Colour display 1 2VGA 640x240 Transmissive TFT industrial temp 30 C to 85 C 8 8 inch 18 bit Sunlight readable Embedded Memory Display controller resolution 16bpp
273. ide N see text Default Colours see text Display Shift If this parameter is enabled set to Y the display in application screens shifts so that there are no blank columns on the left most side of the display Block Cursor When this parameter is enabled set to Y the cursor is presented as a flashing block When Block Cursor is set to N the cursor is presented as a flashing underline character Use increment When Use increment is enabled set to Y and the cursor is moved off the display the screen contents shift by the values specified in the X increment and Y increment parameters X increment This parameter determines the number of spaces the screen shifts once the cursor moves out of view The value assigned here doesn t take effect until Use Increment is set to Y Y increment moves out of view The value assigned here doesn t take effect until Increment is set to Y Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 169 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Split Screen 6 19 1 Split Screen 04 Split screen Type 2 Way View IDs A This parameter allows you to split the display view so that more than one application screen can be displayed at the same time The split screen parameters Type and View IDs are used to tailor the screen view for your needs Type And View IDs The Type parameter determi
274. ield Ovrhd 5 0 80 Enable Alarm N Y N Command Region Up 0 0 24 Command Region Down 0 0 24 Command Region Left 0 0 80 Command Region Right 0 0 80 lear Entry Fields When this parameter is set to Y an empty entry field is created in place of an entry field filled with spaces KI Note This operation is only performed on screens received from the host Data sent to the host remains unaffected Passthru Printing Setting this parameter to Y allows the host to send data directly to the 8525 serial port This option is most commonly used for printing AIAG Character This parameter is used to enter a decimal representation of the ASCII character code of the AIAG character A value of 0 zero disables this feature When a bar code data is scanned the 8525 searches for AIAG fields on the current page that can accept the bar code data The application program distinguishes an entry field as AIAG by preceding the field with this special mode character whi indicates the existence of AIAG fields Barcode Character Barcode input only fields are special entry fields that only accept input code reader The application program identifies a barcode input only e preceding the field with a special character 210 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Emulation This parameter is used to enter a decimal representation of the ASCII character code of the b
275. ific BA 116 None er Hygrometer S201 Site 1 RFI 1 S212 Site 12 RFI 12 NB In accordance with UKAS requirements all the measurement equipment is on a calibration schedule VA 18 Nov 2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD TEST REPORT S No RFI EMCE1 RP46573JD02A Page 21 of 30 Issue Date 05 November 2004 Test Of Psion Teklogix Inc Vehicle Mount Terminal Model 8525 To 95 54 EC 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII Appendix 2 Test Configuration Drawings This appendix contains the following drawings Drawing Reference Number Title DRG 46573JD02 001 Test configuration for measurement of radiated emissions DRG 46573JD02 002 Schematic diagram of the EUT support equipment and wiring harness VA 18 Nov 2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD TEST REPORT S No RFI EMCE1 RP46573JD02A Page 22 of 30 Issue Date 05 November 2004 Test Of Psion Teklogix Inc Vehicle Mount Terminal Model 8525 To 95 54 EC 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII DRG 46573JD02 001 1 0m high table with earthed metallic top with 50mm spacer if necessary LISNs Support Harness or 1 5m cabling From nearest part of table to 1 Phase Centre of Bicon Antenna 2 Tip of Log Periodic Antenna or 3 Calibration Point of Bilog Antenna Receiving antenna A 18 Nov 2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD TEST REPORT S No RFI EMCE1 RP46573JD02A Page 23 of 30 Issue Date 05 November 2004 Test Of Psion Te
276. igin 193 209 INDEX y origin 193 209 ANSI of Cols 182 of Pages 181 of Rows 182 Applications menu 175 arrow keys 147 auto answerback string 185 Auto Login Telnet Settings 1 79 Auto Term 176 194 Group 177 194 block mode 148 186 188 Colour Override 784 configuration 146 Conn Type connection type 177 CR character 790 device attribute requests 147 device attribute string 785 disabling the keyboard scanner 790 Edit Modes 91 192 ENTER key 147 189 ENTER Pmpt Telnet Settings 178 ESC Prompt Telnet Settings 79 Func Key Remap Telnet Settings 180 Function key equivalents 147 Group Auto Term 177 194 Host Telnet Settings 78 Kbd Modes 188 190 keyboard lock 186 LF character 190 local editing mode 1 48 185 Login Telnet Settings 1 79 Media Copy 186 mnemonics 792 multiple sessions 179 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 1 Index 2 Port 178 sessions closing 149 sessions establishing new 149 sessions listing 149 sessions moving between 149 settings 176 193 Telnet connection 777 Terminal 77 Terminal Type 78 transmitting data 7 9 121 186 Xmit Modes 184 188 802 IQ connection 177 ANSI Settings Connection Type Telnet amp TCP Direct 177 Screen settings 181 AP Controller mac displaying 151 App parameter 797 appearance display colour scheme 69 Append Enter 205 Append F0 205 appending to bar codes characters 5 119 121 Applications ANSI Settin
277. in E w KE ES i 15 15 15 Ce Go oe ced SE e s al sw 2 sw T Gr Ww Czp ome ox ew sl se al So 7 97871 1 a 100N V8 SWITGHED L32 96321 2A O lt C ES S 15 5 TW e wy M4 se7 SCH 7 v v c wv 2 vec k e d BLM21PG221SN1 EL COMMAND 2 3V3_STANDBY ad L31 96321 2A e R391 GND 10 T V2 97296 usa e 10K0 S 9000515 BLM21PG221SN1 0 063W NC7SZI25P5X ch ns HEATER POWER gt si TP523 TP531 D C116 L28 96321 2A 9003428 mr d EISE HEATER POWER Dee 2 e I m HEATER POWER GE e R288 a 7 a BLM21PG221SN1 97296 GAN INTERNAL KEYBOARD INTERFACE i ie i 0 063W a33 5V_SWITCHED TP532 97634 zp ce TP787 paro L30 96321 2A 1 8 Noe 004 TP548 PM d 30V 11A Cr 7 25V 350MW LE e c E s IGNATURES DATE 1 px e e BLM21PG2218N1 Ze SC ni NGT TEAM 2003 PSION TEKLOGIX IN i KEYBOARD HEATER EN Be N Lz s STANDBY TP533 a MISSISSAUGA ONTARIO a i ni 2 e da ME SCHEMATIC 8525 30MA BOARD 100K 7 KEYBOARD INTERFACE Ge y BLM21PG2218N1 ROJENE Er De ST er xi 008014 E Som prer FIRE SHEET OF E REL DATE 20 22 B c D TPS67 TP564 1 1 ava ava ava ava ava ER T R623 e R624 R342 R343 R344 97296 97296 97296 97296 97296 JTAG BUS lt 10k0 10k0 gen 10k0 10K0 0063W 0 063W 0 063W 0 063W 0 063W e e j
278. indicates that it is ready for operation To attach the peripheral to the round tether port on the side of the 8525 e Insert the barrel of the plug into the tether port and rotate slowly until it clicks into place The red dot on the port and on the connector should be aligned Tether Port Figure 3 7 The Tether Port To remove the peripheral e Grasp the shell of the plug and pull it back gently to unlock and release the connector A Important Never attempt to disconnect a peripheral by pulling the connector by the wire The connector is locked into place and can only be unlocked and removed by pulling back the plug shell 3 9 Monitoring The Network Connection indicates the relative strength of the communication link 40 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 8525 Connecting An 8525 To A PC To access the radio signal icon from the keyboard e Tap on the radio icon in the taskbar to display the Wireless Statistics dialogue box KI Note Moving in and out of the radio coverage area can have varying effects on a network session At times you may need to renew your connection by logging in again 3 10 Connecting An 8525 To A PC To pass information between an 8525 and a PC or laptop you ll need to connect them using an Auxiliary Port Cable PN CA2200 This cable is equipped with two USB Host I F connections for devices such as a mouse or keyboard and one USB Device I
279. ing 22 network Ad Hoc 18 connection monitoring 39 control panel settings 226 infrastructure 18 Network addresses 226 network authentication 19 Network Key assigning 20 Newline 790 NEXT B message 145 146 NEXT H message 145 146 NEXT key Fl 134 Next X 202 Null In Fields 2 2 Nulls In Fields 2 5 number of columns ANSI 1 82 of columns TESS 196 of pages ANSI 181 of rows ANSI 182 of rows TESS 196 Terminal ANSI 146 177 Terminal TESS 38 number system digit 22 123 numeric fields Rjct if Alpha 206 numeric parameters 54 156 numeric parameters minimum maximum limits to 154 156 O Off amp On buttons 15 26 offices list 4 off line 8525 using local procedures 745 offset viewport 227 On amp Off button 5 28 One Check Digit 25 one dimensional internal scanner 38 One Shot Mode 72 ON For 72 Open network authentication 79 Open Fky Only 208 ORANGE Key 30 order of fields in TESS screen 206 Origin Scroll 196 Output 27 output input fields serial port 203 Output Tmo 220 P pages of Cols TESS 196 of Columns ANSI 82 of Pages ANSI 181 of Rows ANSI 82 of Rows TESS 196 positioning 196 queuing mode 46 reprinting 144 size shape 182 Pages Saved TESS 197 Panning 224 parameters Alpha parameters 155 156 numeric 154 156 saving changes to 158 string entry 155 156 157 Y N boolean 7 54 156 Parity 2 9 Passthru Printing 2 0 Password ANSI Telnet Settings 179
280. ing GSM GPRS handsets scanners printers and so on The range of the Bluetooth radio in the 8525 is limited to between 2 and 5 meters Psion Teklogix provides built in support for the Bluetooth peripherals listed below e GSM GPRS tri band universal handset Bluetooth printer Keep in mind that Bluetooth and IEEE 802 11b radios both operate in the 2 4GHz band Although the 8525 includes features to minimize interference performance of the system will not be optimal if you use both radios simultaneously Typicall when both radios operate in the 8525 at the same time they cannot trans simultaneously this has a negative impact on overall system thro minimize the impact on the backbone 802 11b network Psion Te recommends using Bluetooth peripherals that have low transactiq printers and scanners 18 NOV 2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 231 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories GPS Unit Bluetooth peripherals are configured using the Bluetooth control panel applet Refer to Bluetooth Setup on page 98 for information about setting up your Bluetooth devices for communication In addition review the manual shipped with your Bluetooth device to determine the method used to associate with the 8525 host 1 3 GPS Unit The 8525 can support an optional GPS unit This unit a Garmin GPS 35HVS TLX PN 30969 is a complete GPS receiver and antenna contained in a small water res
281. ions on page 175 A unique number must be assigned in the Terminal parameter for each TESS session Refer to Terminal in the section titled TESS Settings on page 194 for details 6 1 2 Working With Multiple Sessions To display another session in TESS e Go to the startup Display Menu If you are in a TESS session press lt CTRL gt lt ALT gt lt 0 gt to go to the Display Menu e Type the letter corresponding to the application you want to launch For example suppose the sessions are listed in the Display Menu as D TESS1 and E TESS2 To launch the session named TESS2 type the letter e 6 1 3 The Field Types Fixed Field displays information that cannot be changed from the keyboard Entry Field allows the operator to enter data This type of field is usually shown DI ASE Tassen Match Field the host computer loads data in the format of the expected entry If the entered data does not match the expected format the unit emits a long beep Auto tab Field automatically moves the cursor to the next field when the current field is filled Bar code only Field is filled with data from a bar code reader Keyboard entries are not accepted in this type of field Serial I O Field is filled with data coming from a serial port Keyboard not accepted in this type of field c 18 Nov 2004 A h X Y e 138 Psion Teklogix 8525 Ve
282. is disabled set to N the Scan See viewport does not move when the cursor moves one position to the right and the pivot 1s still inside the Scan See display However the Scan See display is updated to reflect the changes within that viewport If the pivot goes outside the viewport or if the 8525 display changes without the cursor being moved the viewport is re synchronized to coincide the pivot with the anchor Line Scrolling When Line Scrolling is enabled set to Y the Scan See display is treated as two separate one line by 10 column displays The top line always displays the previous value of the bottom line In an application where the cursor skips from one entry field to another the field that the cursor just entered is displayed on the top line and the next field is displayed at the bottom KI Note When this feature is enabled set to Y the Panning option should be disabled to prevent updates to both lines after every keystroke Brightness The Brightness parameter controls the backlight brightness of the display It only has an effect on Model 7000 Scan Sees scanners equipped with LED light emitting diode displays c 18 Nov 2004 E a e 224 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Scan See Sub Menu Mapping The Viewport Arrows The Arrows parameter assigns one of three possible functions to the two arrow keys on the Scan Se
283. istant package The Garmin GPS 35HVS can track up to 12 satellites at a time while providing fast time to first fix and one second navigation updates The GPS unit was designed to be used in conjunction with the Psion Teklogix Powered Sled Model 7937B the Lithium Ion Battery Pack PN 20605 003 and the Psion Teklogix Port Replicator TLX PN 21655 The GPS unit plugs directly into the Port Replicator which supplies the GPS unit with power from the Powered Sled supply and connects the data lines to the 8525 The GPS unit should be mounted with a clear unobstructed view of the GPS satellites For optimal performance the GPS unit should be mounted in an area that provides exposure to as large a swath of unobstructed sky as possible a vehicle roof is an excellent choice A N Important Keep in mind that some windows have thermal and or UV filter or tint coatings that may shield satellite signals from the GPS receiver Psion Teklogix provides four types of Garmin mounting brackets to secure your GPS unit in position 1 4 Mounting Accessories There are two mounting options for the 8525 e Quick Release Mount includes two adaptor plates quick release and cradle mount along with necessary hardware Kit PN 1008424 Dual Ball and Socket Mount 18 Nov 2004 A h Y Ey 232 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories 8525 Mounting Recommendations
284. it D3 3 Z S 119 44 S2 A23 S2 D12 NB Se CB FRAME gt B54 CFRAME AS4 PC_A23 eos gt u xd CB CBE2 120 45 S2 Ai2 S2 Di3 28 ipie Ge TM O CB AD24 B21 0CBE2 AQUPO_A12 J EST mede SE pem CB vcc cB ver Mars mpe CB_AD17 dl aaan PE S2 A24 PLACE CAPACITOR NEAR CF CONNECTOR 1 CB ADIB 122 47 S2 AT TPS70 men mem mes i E D15 D D Se D7 R298 R292 eder CB AD26 Kee MANK F F 97296 97296 CB ADI9 123 48 S2 A25 P gt is TP587 e S2 CE 8 ce2 CEt T e E TP5B1 10K0 10K0 t CB AD27 BS6 CADI9 ASG PO_A25 s2 Ven 33 8 S2 A10 FEE Tres OX CB AD20 324 B23 CAD20 oan As 49 8246 o 8 Ato 0 063W 0 063W CB_AD28 34 9 ii AR ER SS 125 B57 cvs2 ASTIPC ve 52 S2 ep e IORD oE PE CB AD29 S2 VS2 126 5i S2 IOWR e 36 IOWR A9 10 S2 A9 d i CB AD30 e GNO 126 DND 51 CB apen 127 52 S2 AS 1 SERE e 38 we PUE S2 Ap B24 CAD21 A24 PC_AS 128 E 53 Se ee Sr eee EC S2 A7 m CB mer B58 CRST AS8 PC_RESET S2 ber TP616 CB AD22 129 54 S2 A4 men rem TP576 TPS77 38 voce woen 13 PER 1 URON ANNE B 39 dee op 14 S2 A6 0 men CB SERR gt e 130 gs9 CSERR ASS PC WAIT 5 S2 WAIT rs i S2 D e s2 vs2 15 S2 AS 9 Te CB_AD23 181 B26 CAD23 apo as EE 8243 Ke i s2 Dig res CB VCC CB VCC 132 57 Sener e 41 eae PUE S S2 A MEER 1 A c8 REQ e B60 CREQ AG PC INPACK S2 INPACK TP612 CB AD24 133 p 58 s2 A2 Ses Warr ee lar PNE 20 S2 AS m 1 ANE mw CB apen B27 CAD24 A27 PC_A2 ren 97206 97296 134 59 S2 INPACK eo LS
285. ity level and enter the existing password in the Ra e Choose the Set Password button 52 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE NET Programs A dialogue box labelled Password Properties is displayed e Type the new password in the Password text box e Inthe Confirm Password text box retype the new password Configuring Security Choosing the Configure button displays the Configure Security dialogue box Configure Security OK E Show Icons For M Teklogix Y Supervisor User TT Allow Teklogix Security Level Figure 4 9 Configuring Security In addition to allowing the operator to access the Teklogix security level see Accessing Teklogix Level Security on page 51 this dialogue box allows you to determine which security levels will have an associated icon displayed in the taskbar By default a security icon is not displayed for user level security e TaponPrograms to display a sub menu of options TEKLOGIX 8525 Exec H234n 1 Display Menu eem rs DE z Security S fli Programs gt Activesync bel 7 Shortcuts gt M8 Command Prompt Figure 4 10 Program Sub Menu C Ae Nov 2004 P h po Li Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 53 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE NET Programs This sub menu allows you to choose ActiveSync and Command Prompt and you can access the Internet Explorer ins
286. k LOCKED 0 LOCKPENDING 1 LOWC QWAIT 2 SCANNING 3 STARTUP 4 ABANDON 5 rm Number of received messages complete application messages xm Number of transmitted messages complete application messages rf Number of received polls with attached message xf Number of transmitted frames ra Number of received radio link aborts xi Number of transmitted radio link initialization messages rp Number of received polls Xr Number of transmitted retries pt Number of poll timeouts xe Number of transmitted errors rssi Received Signal Strength Indicator Table 5 1 Protocol Statistics Descriptions Low Level Screen e Tapon the Low Level tab to display the Low Level statistics screen Protocol Low Level 4lvl 19200 450420 2 RxOk 0 RxHd 0 RxBd 0 RxEr 0 RxOv 0 TxOk 0 UGEREEST Col O TxD 0 e 18 Nov 200 4 k n q Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 87 Chapter 5 Configuration Info Tab Figure 5 30 Low Level Statistics Screen Table 5 2 defines the elements of the Low Level statistics screen Statistic Description RxOk Message buffers discarded due to lack of available receive buffers RxHd Message headers successfully received RxBd Message bodies successfully received RxEr Message buffers received with detected errors RxOv Number of transmitted messages complete application messages TxOk Message buffers successfully transmitted TxEr Message buffers whic
287. key erasing the contents of a Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 189 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Kbd Modes PrintScreen Key This parameter determines the hot key for printing the screen contents via the 8525 serial port The default is lt CTRL gt P 16 KI Note The 8525 s port must be set to printer see Ports Tether And Con sole on page 217 Xmit Enter The ENTER key normally enters data into a field and moves the cursor to the next field However some applications require that the ENTER key start a transmission from the 8525 When enabled set to Y this parameter causes the ENTER key to start a transmission Insert When this parameter is disabled set to N it behaves in replace mode a character entered at the keyboard or received from the host replaces the character at the cursor position The cursor then advances one character position When enabled set to Y the character entered at the keyboard or received from the host is inserted at the cursor position after shifting the characters at and following the cursor forward one position The cursor is advanced one position The extent of the characters affected by the shift depends on the setting of the Edit Extent parameter see page 191 Newline When this parameter is disabled set to N an LF character received from the host causes the cursor to move down one line in
288. klogix Inc Vehicle Mount Terminal Model 8525 To 95 54 EC 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII DRGM6573JD021002 Configuration of EUT and Local Support Equipment Integral Antennas 8525 EUT Antenna To 24V DC Supply RF Air Link Antenna LAN Adaptor and Bluetooth Card Configuration of Remote Support Equipment VA 18 Nov 2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD TEST REPORT S No RFI EMCE1 RP46573JD02A Page 24 of 30 Issue Date 05 November 2004 Test Of Psion Teklogix Inc Vehicle Mount Terminal Model 8525 To 95 54 EC 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII Appendix 3 Graphical Test Results This appendix contains the following graphs which are not included in the total number of pages for this report GPH 46573JD02 001 Mode 1 Active VA 18 Nov 2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD TEST REPORT S No RFI EMCE1 RP46573JD02A Page 25 of 30 Issue Date 05 November 2004 Test Of Psion Teklogix Inc Vehicle Mount Terminal Model 8525 To 95 54 EC 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII GPHM6573JD021001 Mode 1 Active 9554B6 9554NB dBbwm so 30 0 100 0 1000 0 c 18 Nov 2004 ly Y e ry RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD TEST REPORT S No RFI EMCE1 RP46573JD02A Page 26 of 30 Issue Date 05 November 2004 Test Of Psion Teklogix Inc Vehicle Mount Terminal Model 8525 To 95 54 EC 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VII
289. kterm Status Area 6 6 The Tekterm Status Area Tekterm provides a status area just above the softkey labels The status area indi cates the operating condition of the vehicle mount 84 Keyboard Macro Ctrl Panel W Indicators Y Softkeys Y Ctrl Panel Supervisor noe wore Figure 6 2 Status Area In the sample screen above the security level assigned within the Tekterm application is displayed in the status area One of the following levels can be displayed Supervisor or Teklogix 6 1 TESS Emulation TESS Teklogix Screen Subsystem is the normal operating mode of Psion Teklogix computers Teklogix protocol emulation software resident on network controllers or a Psion Teklogix Software Development Kit SDK and installed in the host converts host screens to TESS commands The 9150 Access Point is also equipped with protocol emulation software KI Note If the message RESET Press Enter flashes at the bottom of the TESS screen when you turn on the 8525 press the ENTER key once c 18 Nov 2004 nm Ge a 4 O Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 137 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Configuration 6 7 1 Configuration KI Note Each TESS session must have a unique name assigned to it The title you assign will be displayed in the Display Menu The process of renaming an existing TESS session and adding a new session is described in the section titled Applicat
290. l Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual NTRODUCTION 1 1 About This Manual e 3 1 2 Text Conventions Aa scm opo ew E a da os da 4 1 3 About The 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer o o 5 1 3 1 Features o 22 9 BSR eee Bw ee wed ee Re owe SES 5 1 3 2 The 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer llle 8 1 3 4 Regulatory Labels s gt eco cascca sresassaara dret 9 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 1 Chapter 1 Introduction About This Manual 1 About This Manual This manual describes how to configure operate and maintain the Psion Teklogix 8525 vehicle mount computer Chapter 1 Introduction provides a basic overview of the 8525 vehicle mount Chapter 2 Basic Checkout describes the steps required to get the 8525 ready for operation Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 8525 describes the 8525 features and provides a description of the keyboard how to navigate in Microsoft Windows CE and so on Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE NET describes the Microsoft Windows CE desktop and how to use it This chapter also outlines the basics of moving around a Windows CE NET window selecting and opening icons files folders and working with a Windows dialogue box Chapter 5 Configuration provides a description of the Windows CE NET Control Panel and how to use it to configure the 8525 along with the scanners attached to the unit and so on Chapter 6
291. l quality scanner message 38 security level 36 e 18 Nov 2004 36 X Y e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 7 Index 8 status area 737 task bar 48 inf usbstor installing C 4 usbstor updating C 2 wceusbsh installing C 4 wceusbsh updating C 2 Infrastructure network 18 initialized messages transmitted 802 IQv1 x1 See xi transmitted initialize messages 151 Initial RTT 7 63 228 Input 27 input bar code only fields 138 bar code reader 237 VO fields 203 Input tmo 220 insert mode 1 90 208 Open Fky Only 208 Output tmo 220 replace mode 190 208 serial VO 204 serial I O fields 138 Serial In Out 203 Input Tmo 220 Insert mode 740 insert mode 190 208 INS Key 51 installation 8570 cables to devices 237 integrated scanner option 37 Intensity 7035 backlighting 70 72 Interleaved 2 of 5 724 Internet Explorer 55 Intl EBCDIC 272 215 IP address assigning 2 IP for SysReq 2 2 ISM band Bluetooth radio 97 ITF Check Discrete 2 of 5 symbology 125 ITF Check IATA 2 of 5 symbology 126 ITF Check I 2 of 5 symbology 124 12 of 5 Short Code 715 K Kbd lock 186 Kbd Locked 202 Kbd Modes 188 190 keyboard compatibility with VT220 ANSI keyboard 147 disabling the keyboard 790 function keys 147 Kbd modes 188 190 key repeat 70 72 lock 186 202 lock messages 144 one shot mode 72 Keyboard Tekterm 1 64 keyboard backlight 32 keyboard keys 29 ALT 31 arrow keys
292. lash memory and memory card are preserved When the 8525 is reset the screen displays the Psion Teklogix and Microsoft Windows CE net splash screen before displaying the startup desktop 6 13 The Parameters Menu e Atthe Display menu type a to display the Parameters menu 01 Parameters Range More Parameters see page 1 Security User S page 160 Display see page 160 dde level With a Supervisory or Teklogix password you can also access TERNOS listed in the More Parameters sub menu ov 2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 159 160 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Security Settings 6 13 1 Security Settings To access the More Parameters sub menus the Security parameter must be set to either a Supervisor or a Teklogix level password The default security level is User 01 Parameters Range More Parameters See page 161 Security see text Display see text e Tap on the Security parameter to display the Security Level dialogue box Refer to Security Levels on page 51 for details about setting the security level for your 8525 6 14 Display Options The Display sub menu is used to adjust your unit s display properties e Press lt F1 gt to access the Display sub menu 02 Display
293. layed in lowercase characters in the taskbar you ll know that the Blue Key and the Orange Key are not locked They will become inactive following a key press 5 5 2 4 Keyboard Macro Keys e In the Keyboard Properties dialogue box open the Macros tab d Bluetooth Device c ei Mouse Keyboard Properties Repeat l Backlight One Shots Macros Unicode Mapping Scancode Remapping Macro Key Sequence Record Macro Delete Macro E Storage Stat Tekrem Control Panel Besar AMIA Figure 5 10 Macro Dialogue Box SOB Oh A macro has 200 programmable characters or positions The macro keys can be programmed to replace frequently used keystrokes along with the function of executable keys including ENTER lt BKSP gt and DEL lt BLUE gt lt BKSP gt function keys and arrow keys Recording And Saving A Macro You can program up to 12 macro keys ela VA velis Nov 2004 k Es Se As e In the Macro menu highlight a macro key number for e assign a macro to macro key lt M1 gt Tap on the Record Ma Y a e A Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 73 Chapter 5 Configuration Keyboard Macro Keys A message screen is displayed instructing you to Please Enter Key Strokes Bluetooth Device A Mouse e Storage start TekTerm 11
294. led set to Y the erase functions can erase characters regardless of their protected state Tab stop mode When this parameter is disabled set to N the setting and clearing of horizontal tab stops apply to the same horizontal position of all lines on the page When enabled set to Y horizontal tab setting and clearing apply only to the current line Edit extent controls and received character insertion The possible values are L Display or Fld The shifting caused by ICH DCH and characte confined to the selected extent e 18 Nov 2004 E a e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 191 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Serial Disp controls When this parameter is disabled set to N any control codes received from the host are performed as described When enabled set to Y any received control functions are displayed and are not performed If any CO or C1 controls are received from the host their standard ANSI mnemonics are displayed in reverse video Other characters are displayed as normal characters This mode can also be set with the Set Mode SM control but can only be reset from the Parameters menu 6 20 1 6 Serial 05 Serial Range Primary Port Any Available see text Secondary Port Any Available See text Async In N Y N Start 0 Ose DO End 0 0 2255 Primary Port amp Secondary Port ANSI print commands such as MC
295. lete as applicable e If the means of identification of type contains characters not relevant to describe the vehicle component or separate technical unit types covered by this information document type approval certificate such characters shall be represented in the documentation by the symbol e g ABC 123 H As defined in Annex II A to Directive 70 156 EEC VA e 18 Nov 2004 eig 1 The Eastgate Office Centre E Switchboard 44 0 117 951 5151 Eastgate Road Main Fax 44 0 117 952 4103 Bristol BS5 6XX auf E mail general vca gov uk United Kingdom Web Site WWW vca gov uk VEHICLE CERTIFICATION AGENCY APPROVAL NUMBER e11 72 245 95 54 3024 00 INFORMATION PACKAGE CONTENTS INDEX REVISION NUMBER Not applicable Total number of sheets 327 Three hundred and twenty seven Number of separate drawings 0 Nil Number of separate photographs 0 Nil Reasons for Revision Not applicable EAE059966 Revision date amp Office stamp VA 18 Nov 2004 An executive agency of the Department for Transport INFORMATION DOCUMENT RELATING TO VCA JOB NUMBER EAE059966 RELATING TO TYPE APPROVAL OF AN ESA WITH RESPECT TO ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY 72 245 EEC AS LAST AMENDED BY 95 54 EC Vehicle Mount Computer Model 8525 0 GENERAL 0 1 Make trade name of manufacturer Vehicle Mount Terminal Model 8525 0 2 Type and general commercial description s Vehicle Mounted Computer T
296. leted the field displays the value that it contained before it was modified and the field is opened In a right justified field the lt BKSP gt key erases the character on which the cursor is positioned and shifts the remaining characters to the right by one position When the last character in the field is deleted the field displays the value that it contained before it was modified and the field is opened If the lt BKSP gt key is pressed when the field is empty the 8525 emits a keyboard error beep The lt BKSP gt key does not delete data pre filled by the host applica tion If the lt BKSP gt key is pressed in a field that has not been modified the 8525 emits a keyboard error beep If data is entered into a field and is then deleted before the field is completed the field remains unmodified when the cursor leaves the field or when the screen is transmitted Replace mode In a left justified field the lt BKSP gt key erases the character on which the cursor is positioned unless it is one position to the right of the last character in the string in this case the lt BKSP gt key erases the char acter to the left of the cursor In a right justified field the lt BKSP gt key erases the character on which the cursor is positioned The remaining characters are then shifted to the left of the cursor and the cursor is shifted to the right by one position If the lt BKSP gt key is pressed while the cursor is in t
297. lt Gateway 10 132 0 1 i Renew Details amp Start Tekrerm Network Connections prxwiAGS46Ei i 25a Figure 2 7 Configuring An IP Address KI Note Choosing the Renew button forces the 8525 to renew or find a new IP address This is useful if for example you are out of communication range for a longer period of time and your 8525 is dropped from the network h amp c 18 Nov 2004 A Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 21 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Name Servers Tab To define a static IP address e Tap the Configure button TEKLOGIX Exec E184 PTXWLAGS46B1 Settings IP Address Name Servers An IP address can be i automatically assigned to this SE computer If your network O Specify an IP address 81 Displ A Parame does not autornatically assign IP Address Crrrl IP addresses ask your network eege administrator for an address Subnet Mask T IT TJ and then type it in the space e provided Default Gateway LITT Supervisor Stat TekTerm ETXWLAG546E1 i 24 Figure 2 8 Defining An IP Address e Tap on the radio button next to Specify an IP address Tap on each field and type an IP Subnet Mask and Default Gateway address Tap on OK to save your information 2 2 4 Name Servers Tab KI Note If DHCP is enabled name server addresses are assigned automatically e In the IP Information tab tap on the Configure
298. ly contains items that were deleted allowing you to either permanently delete or restore these items Internet Explorer Choosing this icon launches Internet Explorer a standard Windows CE NET version Keep in mind that your supervisor will need to set up access using the Internet Options and the Network and Dial up Connections icons in the Control Panel Remote Desktop Connection This option allows your 8525 to communicate with a remote desktop PC Remote Desktop Connection on page 63 provides a website with step by step instructions 4 3 The Taskbar y Remote Computer Desktop la Recycle Bin TekTerm n H Internet Evninror Figure 4 3 The Taskbar 48 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE NET Using The Taskbar The 8525 is equipped with a taskbar at the bottom of the screen It displays icons through which you can view the internal battery capacity the radio signal quality of your unit and so on If the vehicle mount is attached to a peripheral device an associated icon is displayed In addition the taskbar displays the application s currently running on your unit and the security level assigned to your 8525 The taskbar also displays active modifier keys lt SHIFT gt ALT lt CTRL gt BLUE and lt ORANGE gt Keys that have been locked on are displayed in uppercase letters For example if you press the lt CTRL gt key twic
299. m Applying a voltage above 90VDC or reversing polarity may result in permanent damage to the 8525 and will void the product warranty A 1 8 meter 6 ft extension power cable P N 13985 002 std or 001 display off is supplied with your 8525 This cable should be wired to a filtered fused maximum 10A accessory supply on the vehicle The 8525 draws no more than 8A less if the accessory supply is greater than 12V Any additional wiring minimum 18 gauge connectors or disconnects used should be rated for at least 90 VDC 10A When connecting P N 13985 001 display off version ensure that the screen blanking wires clearly labelled and the power wires red black leads are reliably secured away from each other or are separated with reliably secured certified insulation Minimum 2 8mm distance or 0 4mm distance through insulation is required for the separation The red lead of the power cable attaches to the positive vehicle supply The bta lead connects to the negative supply this should be connected to a pfope Va Y block and not to the vehicle body The 8525 is fully isolated and can be uM wi both negative and positive chassis vehicles Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 239 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Wiring Vehicle Power To The 8525 You may have the option of connecting power before or after the key switch It is preferable to wire the 8525 after the key switch that i
300. mation Tab Connect button To force connection to a specific existing ne buts A Nov 2004 highlight the network to which you want your 8525 to connect und tap the Connect button i A h L n E Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 17 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Configuring An IEEE 802 11 Radio Installed In The 8525 This tab lists available networks any access points that are broadcasting an SSID and it lists preferred networks networks that you have config ured Since access points are generally secure they will most likely not be listed here By default the 8525 attempts to connect to preferred net works This behaviour can be changed by enabling V Automatically connect to non preferred networks in the Advanced dialogue box page 23 e To add a new configuration double tap on the Add New item listed with the networks A blank Wireless Properties dialogue box is displayed 5 Wireless Properties e Edit View JEE DEE El le El vga Network name SSID sample TI This is an ad hoc network wireless access points are not used Make New Serial C4 Connection on CON Encryption WEP Authentication Open Network key 12345 Key index n 7 The key is provided automatically V Enable 802 1X authentication EAP type Tus y Pi E Stat TekTerm ls Network Connections JPTXWLAGS46B1 Ta Figure 2 5 Wireless Properties Dialogue Box Network name
301. meter is used to assign a host IP address using the format fHHt THEE HHH HHH or a host name if DNS is used Port Port specifies the 9010t TCP Direct or Telnet port number The default 9010t port number assigned is 9999 the maximum allowable value The default Telnet port number assigned is 23 with a maximum allowable value of 32767 Terminal Type This parameter allows the 8525 to perform its own emulation as opposed to the controller The value assigned to this parameter informs the host of the termina type the session is emulating ENTER Pmpt This string indicates that the 8525 is waiting for the user to press E time of connection E e 178 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Host Conn ESC Prompt This string indicates that the user can press the lt ESC gt key to terminate a connection attempt before the connection is established Auto Login Auto Login Range Login Prompt gin see text Login see text Password Prompt word see text Password see text Password Echo Y Y N Login Failed incorrect see text The Auto Login parameters are used to define whether or not the 8525 will attempt to log in automatically The Auto Login sequence is as follows 1 Host sends Login Prompt 8525 responds with Login Host sends Password Prompt 8525 responds with Password Host may send password echo
302. milliseconds Scan Tone And Scan Time Scan tone 1 and Scan time 1 determine the frequency and duration of the first beep of a multiple beep Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds Scan Tone 2 And Scan Time 2 Scan tone 2 and Scan time 2 determine the frequency and duration of the second beep of a multiple beep Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds can Tone 3 And Scan Time 3 Scan tone 3 and Scan time 3 determine the frequency and duration of the third beep of a multiple beep Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds Sounds Ctrl Panel This option displays the Volume amp Sounds Properties dialogue box Volume amp Sounds Properties D Volume Sounds Bluetooth Loud Enable sounds for Device V Events warnings beeps and system events Y Applications program specific and all other sounds 2 z Notifications alarms appointments and reminders Mouse Enable clicks and taps for M Key clicks loud O Soft tp vl Soft M Screen taps Loud Soft Remove D TUTTI Programs Manager Scanners Sounds Start TekTerm 2 Control Panel zo Volume amp Sounds Pro Figure 6 9 Adjusting The Volume This dialogue box is used adjust the beeper volume and to select the co eae lOve 2004 under which the 8525 will emit a beep A b n A 166 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Applic
303. minal cursor 3 4 7 5 Y 5 B 4 6 7 NU EA 2 anchor 1 7 g Ui isa H ole 9 9 0 10 pivot te ulla offset Scan See Display Terminal Display superimposing the anchor on the pivot 0 1 2345 6 7 8 91011 I2 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 HI Scan See Viewport C 0 To enter negative values press the minus key and then type the number you want to use The LEFT arrow key can also be used to decrement the value assigned to the parameter Each time the LEFT arrow is pressed the number is decremented by one For example to enter a value of 5 s zero and press the left arrow key five times c 18 Nov 2004 E e e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 223 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Scan See Sub Menu Mapping The Viewport Follow Cursor When the Follow Cursor parameter is disabled set to N the cursor is always assumed to be located at the origin Using the previous example e the area displayed will be 4 9 2 0 to 4 9 9 2 0 1 or after clipping values that are negative or higher than 80 0 2 to 4 3 Wraparound When Wraparound is enabled set to Y the Scan See display is treated as a one line by 20 column display rather than 2 lines by 10 columns Panning If Panning
304. missions measurements were as follows Bandwidth 120 kHz Amplitude iiis 20 dB ENNNA ts VA 18 Nov 2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD Test Of Psion Teklogix Inc Vehicle Mount Terminal Model 8525 To 95 54 EC 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII Appendix 1 Test Equipment Used TEST REPORT S No RFI EMCE1 RP46573JD02A Page 20 of 30 Issue Date 05 November 2004 Instrument Manufacturer Serial No A051 ESH3 Z6 V Network Rohde amp Schwarz ESH3 Z6 892 563 007 A052 ESH3 Z6 V Network Rohde amp Schwarz ESH3 Z6 892 563 008 A1306 N Type Connector Narda 370 BNM 0210 A1307 N Type Connector Narda 370 BNM 0210 A259 Bilog Antenna Chase CBL6111 1513 A276 OATS Positioning Rohde amp Schwarz HCC Controller A392 3 dB attenuator 9 Suhner 6803 17 B None A459 Bi log Antenna Chase CBL6111A 1593 A553 Bi log Antenna Chase CBL6111A 1593 C320 Cable Rosenberger UFA 210A 1 96A0123 0788 50x50 C341 Cable Andrews None None C461 Cable Rosenberger UFA210A 1 98H0305 1182 704704 C468 N Type Coaxial Cable Rosenberger UFA210A 1 98L0440 3937 504504 M003 Spectrum Monitor Rohde amp Schwarz EZM 883 580 008 M044 ESVP Receiver Rohde amp Schwarz ESVP 891 845 026 M088 Receiver Spectrum Rohde amp Schwarz ESBI DU 835862 018 RU 835387 006 Analyser System M209 Thermo hygro meter RS Components RS212 124 M209 RS212 124 M244 Thermometer Baromet Oregan Scient
305. n Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 117 Chapter 5 Configuration Code 39 Settings The bar code settings do not affect the operation of external decoded scanners These scanners must be configured by scanning special configuration bar codes These configuration bar codes affect the communication speed or data format between the scanner and the 8525 and must not be changed The scanner manufacturer provides programming manuals for configuration purposes e For Symbol refer to Programming Guide P300 e For PSC refer to Powerscan Programming Guide PSC File View E Properties OK E x d si Options Barcodes Translations GA gt thi Certificates Datei IPv6 Keyboard Enabled on Support ki Ch Full ASCII off Sd Z gt Include Check off Mouse Network and Owr AIAG Strip off Regional Remove Dial up Co Error Accept off Settings Programs c Mod Checks None e e Field Size Chars E Storage Stylus Systd fN A Start Ir Control Panel Figure 5 69 Code 39 Bar Code Settings A plus sign to the left of the each bar code listed in this Barcodes tab indicate that that a sub menu of parameters is attached To work with a sub menu e Tapon the plus sign to display the sub menu e To change a parameter value double tap on the parameter or press the SPACE Key 5 9 2 1 Code 39 Settings Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable C
306. n volatile memory Test Squelch e Tap on the Test Squelch button to prompt the radio to use the Data Squelch value without committing it to the radio s non volatile memory in other words to test the value assigned to the Data Squelch parameter To commit the new Data Squelch value to the radio s non volatile memory e Tap on the OK button the dialogue box is closed and the new value is saved To discard the new value and keep the old Data Squelch value e Tap on the X button at the top of the dialogue box The old value is sent to the protocol driver Frequency Table e Tap on the Frequency button to display the Frequency Table dialogue box ch1 5 ch6 10 ch 11 15 ch 16 20 Channel Receive MHz Transmit MHz L 446 837500 446 837500 Figure 5 38 e Tapon the Copy Receive to Transmit button to copy the contents of the Receive fields into the corresponding Transmit fields When you tap on this button a warning box is displayed asking Cof frequencies to the Tx frequencies e Tap on the Yes button to go ahead or No to stop the copy p bec 8 Nov 2004 gt A e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 97 Chapter 5 Configuration Bluetooth Setup Statistics e Tap this button to display communication statistics Refer to Statistics Screen beginning on page 86 for details about this screen Advanced This button launches
307. nd macro keys 6 2 1 Function Keys And Softkeys 6 2 1 1 Function Keys The 8525 is equipped with a series of function keys each of which is defined in the application software Accessing Function Keys lt FI gt to lt FI0 gt Function keys lt F1 gt to lt F10 gt can be directly accessed by pressing the function keys labelled in yellow along the top of the keyboard No key combination is required Accessing Function Keys FII To lt F20 gt These keys are labelled in orange in the top left corner of the function keys To access these keys press the lt ORANGE gt key followed by F1 to lt F10 gt e To access function key lt F11 gt press the lt ORANGE gt key followed by lt Fl gt e Press ORANGE F2 to access function key lt F12 gt and so on Accessing Function Keys lt F21 gt To lt F30 gt These keys are labelled in blue in the top right corner of the function keys these keys press the lt BLUE gt key followed by lt F1 gt to lt F10 gt e To access function key lt F21 gt press the BLUE key foll e Press BLUE F2 to access Function key lt F22 gt anc Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 133 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Softkey Function Keys 6 2 1 2 Softkey Function Keys To speed the process of moving through menus and changing parameters function keys F1 to F5 have been programmed to perform specific actions in the Tekterm menus Table 6 1 desc
308. ndi Network and Owner Password Power Regional Dial up Co Codd Settings a M i Je System Teklogi Total Recall Volume amp S Bun wil amp 2 4 Figure 3 3 Stylus Icon e Select the Calibration tab and then tap on the Recalibrate button D Double Tap Calibration options Re La Bluetooth Tf your Windows CE device is not responding properly to your taps you Device may need to recalibrate your screen e Recalibration involves tapping the center of a target If you miss the 2 center keep the stylus on the screen slide it over the target s center Mouse and then lift the qum To start tap Recalibrate Remove orage ylus SKIGOIX Gta keca volume Y Wireless Programs Manager Scanners Sounds WAN Start TekTerm ge Control Panel OS Stylus Properties isd all Figure 3 4 Calibration Screen e Follow the directions on the calibration screen to calibrate the screen 3 6 8525 Indicators 8525s use LEDs Light Emitting Diode onscreen messages and audio tones as indicators 3 6 1 LEDs The 8525 is equipped with four tri coloured LEDs This section outli LEDs indicate A Important Ifan LED is illuminated in red the operator s as this generally indicates an abnormal operati active laser emission Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 33 Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 8525 PWR CHG Charge LED mE PSION TEKLOGIX
309. nectto a Psion Teklogix device via USB Itis highly recommended that you shut down all applications before continuing Build 11231 TZ Cua e Shut down all other software programs especially ActiveSync to avoid a restart request during installation e Tap on the Next button The program checks that ActiveSync is installed and that it is a supported version 3 1 or later If the version installed on your PC is not supported you ll need to exit the USB Setup application and install a later version of ActiveSync 2 Device Driver INF File Selection Dialogue Box This dialogue box allows you to choose the paths of the appropriate inf files Default file paths are provided in this s box E Psion Teklogix USB Setup 0 This program will make copies of the installation scripts inf files for the following class of drivers and update the copies with information specific to Psion Teklogix devices To choose different scripts click Browse USB connection to Windows CE wceusbsh inf Needed for connecting to a terminal via ActiveSync Path ES Microsoft ActiveSync drivers wceusbsh inf Browse USB mass storage usbstor inf Needed for connecting to a terminal running BooSt so thatthe Removable Disk is mapped in Windows Explorer C 1 8 N ov 2 00 4 Path ICAWINNT inf usbstor inf Browse E h amp lt Back Next Cancel C 2 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Ma
310. nes how a screen will be split The 8525 supports up to four application screens The View IDs parameter determines which application screens will be displayed in each pane of the split screen Moving Between Split Screens on page 171 describes how to move the cursor from one split screen to the next 6 19 1 1 Splitting And Displaying Screens Before splitting the screen you need to determine which applications should appear in each pane of the split screen The available applications are listed in the main Display Menu Each application listed in the Display Menu is preceded by a letter for example Parameters is preceded by an A This letter is used in the View IDs string entry field to fix each pane of a split screen to a corresponding application If you need to display the startup Display Menu e Press lt CTRL gt lt ALT gt lt 0 gt To split a screen e With the cursor on the Type parameter use the RIGHT or LEFT arrow key to scroll through the types of split screens available The vertical and horizontal lines displayed at the Type parameter indicate how the screen will be split for example in the sample screen on page 172 the verti di lines indicate the screen will be vertically split into two segments The scr en n A also be split horizontally 3 ways or 4 ways c 18 Nov 2004 h X Y 4 170 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual
311. ng touchscreen 32 83 cellular address ca 152 CH Bluetooth Controls 99 changing password Start Menu security 52 changing softkey labels Label F1 F10 183 197 Character parameters TESS 198 characters appending to bar codes 119 121 Char Set choosing TESS 198 cycling through 157 decimal values of 200 EOB chars 7 88 EOL chars 187 Lower ANSI 193 prefix 116 121 stripping 119 121 suffix 119 121 Upper ANSD 193 character set Tether amp Console Port 2 8 Character Sets Host Char Set 193 character sets choosing inTESS 198 Lower ANSI 193 Upper ANSI 19 Char Set TESS 9 Check Digit 124 c 18 Nov 2004 check digit 120 123 124 125 Check Digit One 7254 Clear Entry Fields 2 0 ly e o Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 3 Index 4 Click Data scanner double click 5 Click Time scanner double click 115 CLR DEL key Local Echo mode ANSI 1 89 CLR Key 226 Codabar 23 Codell 124 Code 128 119 Code 39 117 118 Code 93 123 Cold Reset Shutdown menu 58 Colour Override 784 198 Column Offset 222 columns number of in ANSI screen 82 number of in TESS screen 796 COM Bluetooth Controls 02 Command Prompt 53 Command Region Up Down Left amp Right 2 configuring IEEE 802 11 radio 5 configuring softkey labels Label F1 F10 197 configuring softkey labels Label F1 F5 183 connecting Auto Login ANSI Telnet Settings 179 ENTER Pmpt ANSI T
312. nge Standard and Intermec compatible 6 9 x 11 2 x 18 3 cm 2 7 x 4 4 x 7 2 in Scanner 280 g 9 9 ozs Cable 82 3 cm 32 in 176 g 6 2 ozs Collapsed 81 cm 32 in Max working 183 cm 72 in 4 VDC to 14 VDC Undecoded 75 mA 5 VDC Decoded 100 mA 5 VDC lt 50 uA 5 VDC Extra bright 650 nm Visible Laser Diode VLD Frictionless lifetime flexure mechanism 35 scans sec nominal Paper Labels decoded 7 5 mil 6 to 10in 15 to 25 cm 10mil 5 to 20in 13 to51 cm 15mil 5 to 32in 13 to 81 cm 20mil 5 to 48in 15 to 122 cm 40 mil 8 to 85in 20 to 216 cm 55 mil 15to 108 in 38 to 2 Reflective Labels decoded 40 mil 22to 100in 56 55mil 30to 104 in 76 70 mil 40to 180in 102 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 247 Chapter 8 Specifications PowerScan LR and XLR Industrial Scanner Specs Depth of Field Extra Long Range Print Contrast Ratio Pitch Skew Ambient Light Immunity Environmental Temperature Rating Humidity Shock at 23 C Vibration Water and Dust Decoding Capabilities Auto discriminates between Safety Regulatory Electrical Emissions 100 mil 45to 264 in 114 to 671 cm Paper Labels decoded 15mil 28to 60in 71 to 152 cm 20mil 28to 72in 71to 182 cm 40mil 28to 144 in 71 to 144 cm 55mil 40to 1801in 102 to 457 Reflective Labels decoded 40 mil 40to 180 in 102 to 457 cm 70 mil 80to 300 in 2032 to 762 cm 100 mil 80to 432 in
313. nse window in order to accommodate the receive transmit switching characteristics of the radio The value assigned must be compatible with other units and base stations in the system The default setting of 19 is based on the requirements of a 2 level modulation narrow band radio operating at 9600 baud Poll Timeout This parameter in units of 16 6 ms sets the time out value used for automatic channel switching Poll Timeout is the time during which the 8525 should detect at least one poll from a base station As each Poll Timeout passes without a successful poll from the base station the 8525 channel quality decreases If the channel quality falls to below 46 the terminal begins searching for a new channel A value from 1 to 200 can be assigned to this parameter Late TX Limit The value entered for this parameter measured in milliseconds sets the maximum allowable deviation time from the start of a response window during which an 8525 can make a transmission After this threshold the transmission will not be attempte and the 8525 will try again at the next opportunity For example suppose thi parameter is set to 5 From the beginning of the response window the 8525 can Ve A up to 5 milliseconds late sending a transmission Beyond this threshold the transmission is not attempted The vehicle mount waits for the next oppor Nov 2004 The allowable range for this parameter is from 1 and 10 the default val
314. nsity of the keyboard backlight and the behaviour of the BLUE and ORANGE keys File View Keyboard Properties ok x Bluetooth Id Device d e D Repeat delay AN Repeat rate 2 Long Slow Fast Mouse x e Tap here and hold down a key to test Storage Figure 6 7 Keyboard Properties bd amp jStart TekTerm 2 Control Panel Keyboard Properties SAM i 07 Important Refer to Keyboard Properties on page 70 for details about this dialogue box 6 17 2 Audio ds Ctrl Panel see te Soun r 04 Audio Range Beep Tone 3000 800 3000 Beep Time 250 0 2000 Error Tone 1000 800 3000 Error Time 1000 0 2000 Scan Tone 1 1500 800 3000 Scan Time 1 100 0 2000 Scan Tone 2 2000 800 3000 Scan Time 2 100 0 2000 Scan Tone 3 2500 800 3000 Scan Time 3 100 0 2000 18 Nov 2004 gt Figure 6 8 Audio Menu e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 165 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Audio Beep Tone And Beep Time These parameters regulate the frequency and duration of beeps emitted in a TESS or ANSI session when one of the following is received at the 8525 an advisory a hey you or a bell character Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds Error Tone And Error Time These parameters determine the frequency and duration of each error tone Tone is measured in hertz and time in
315. nt When this parameter is enabled set to Y the page displayed on the 8525 computer is spooled as is except for trailing white space removal When disabled set to N each line of the page displayed on the vehicle mount is preceded by a linefeed LF and followed by a carriage return CR Queuing This parameter enables and disables queuing mode see Queuing Mode on page 146 It also enables TESS procedures to be loaded into the 8525 This parameter should be enabled if local procedures and the ability to switch between hosts within a TESS session are required Changes to this parameter take effect only after the 8525 is reset Lcl Process Save on Reset The menu item Local Process has a sub menu attached to it When this parameter is enabled set to Y data stored in the 852 DEN EH 4 unit is reset Local procedures are defined on page 145 A E e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 201 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Features Send Mile This parameter controls the sending of a milestone from the 8525 after a hey you command Consult the Teklogix Screen Subsystem TESS User Manual for more information on milestones Next X This parameter enables and disables the next messages used in queuing mode Kbd Locked This parameter allows you to lock set to Y or unlock set to N the keyboard for all alphanumeric input in TESS When the keyboa
316. nts Windows 2000 or XP e ActiveSync 3 1 or later The two driver classes that control USB communication are usbstor for commu nication with a device running BooSt and wceusbsh for communication through ActiveSync with a device running Windows CE NET These drivers must be updated with 8525 specific information so that the 8525 can be recognized by your PC The install program e updates copies of the device installation scripts usbstor inf and wceusbsh inf with Psion Teklogix specific information e sets up a USB connection between the PC and the 8525 and e installs the 8525 as a device on your PC This may require notifying the PC OS that the device should be reinstalled and then reconnecting the USB device LIT Launching The Application The log file is initialized and the program introduction is written to i VA 18 Nov 2004 rat AY Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual C 1 Appendix C USB Setup Application Pre Installation Updating usbstor inf And wceusbsh inf C 1 2 Pre Installation Updating usbstor inf And wceusbsh inf 1 Welcome Dialogue Box You can click on the lt Back gt and lt Next gt buttons to navigate between the pre install windows At any time during the pre installation process you can tap on lt Cancel gt to exit the program E Psion Teklogix USB Setup Eo i SECH Welcome This program will attemptto configure your computer so that it may con
317. nual KI Note Both drivers are selected for backup by default The bac b Appendix C USB Setup Application Pre Installation Updating usbstor inf And wceusbsh inf If necessary tap on the Browse buttons to select different paths for the inf files Device Driver Install Selection Dialogue Box You can choose to have the device drivers installed immediately by selecting the check box N or you can leave the check box blank and Windows will install the 8525 the next time it is connected It is recom mended that the device be installed immediately i 7 Thes program can also at As to update the device drivers corresponding to the driver installation scripts Choose from the list below which drivers you would like to install USB connection to Windows CE wceusbsh F USB mess storage usbstor lt Beck Next gt Cancel Select the drivers you want to update wceusbsh and usbstor Tap on the Next button None of the drivers are updated by default To complete the process you must establish USB connections Device Driver Backup Selection Dialogue Box The USB Setup application will attempt to back up the driver sys files before attempting the installation It specifies which files it will try to back up and the location to which it will back them up n Teklogix USB Setup FS emm A program can make backup copies ofthe driver files it is replacin g Ee files to backup and the path where the
318. o Features 2392 Telnet beginning on page 210 FKEYO 7 FKEY8 15 FKEY16 23 FKEY24 31 And FKEY32 39 06 FKEYO 7 gt FKEYO ENTER FKEY1 F1 FKEY2 F2 FKEY3 F3 FKEY4 FA FKEYbD ES FKEY6 F6 FKEY7 E7 The sub menus attached to these parameters allow you to map the 8525 function keys C 18 Nov 2004 A S e 216 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Ports Tether And Console 6 21 Ports Tether And Console 03 Ports Tether Port Console Settings 1 Console Port Disabled Settings 2 6 21 1 Tether And Console Port Peripheral Options The Tether Port and Console Port options allow you to enable disable and specify the accessories attached to these ports Both the Tether Port and the Console Port have the same options These are Disabled Serial Console Printer and Scan See To scroll through the options for each port e Press the RIGHT or LEFT arrow key These ports operate differently depending on the accessories selected e Disabled indicates that the serial port is not being used e Serial standard serial port Console used to connect another PC to the 8525 A communication program is required so that communication can proceed between the 8525 and the PC e Printer all TESS print operations are directed to the port All ANSI media copy operations to th
319. od Weak No Radio Reception Reception Link Narrow Band Radio Signal Quality anii Increasing radio signal quality is represented by longer filled bars within this icon all ll all vil vil Good Weak Reception Reception The radio signal is now determined when the 8525 receives a message If the unit receives no messages within a second the no signal icon is wd or 2004 gt 50 bar 51 to 75 bar and 15 to 100 bar 36 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 8525 Audio Indicators ink Link Status ag KI Note Refer to Volume And Sound Properties on page 79 for detai The Narrow Band radio has three link state icons displayed in the taskbar An uppercase LINK with a green background indicates the radio is powered on and that the unit is online and locked onto a channel A lowercase Link with a yellow background indicates that the radio is powered on but the 8525 is not online or not locked onto a channel A lowercase Link with a yellow background and a red X through it indicates that the radio is not powered on is not online and is not locked onto a channel Bluetooth Radio If a Bluetooth radio is installed in your 8525 this icon is displayed in the taskbar Security Level Security levels can be set to limit user access to 8525 settings In addition applications can be restricted to prevent inadvertent changes AC Power I
320. ode 39 117 118 Code 93 123 C 18 Nov 2004 A Discrete 20f5 125 Ai E EAN 13 120 V e EAN8 121 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual IATA20f5 126 Interleaved 2 of 5 124 MSIPlessey 125 UPCA 122 UPCE 7 23 Barcode Character 2 0 bar code only fields 138 bar code reader external specs 246 external scanner operation of 231 integrated scanner operation of 37 batteries installing 28 power suspend dialogue box 67 removing 28 specifications 250 Baud 2 9 beacons received rb 151 beacon timeouts bt 752 Beam Lockout 206 beep conditions 165 beeper description of beep conditions 37 beeper sounds 165 Beep Tone and Beep Time 7 66 bell CTRL G 189 Binary print 207 BKSP 31 BKSP DEL Key TESS sessions BKSP key behaviour in 141 TESS sessions DEL key behaviour in 142 BKSP Key 37 BKSP key BKSP key ANSI 189 blinking video attribute 183 207 Block Cursor 169 block mode ANSI 7 48 186 188 BLUEKey 30 Bluetooth radio changing device name 1 02 device service profiles 99 ISM band 97 PINs for devices 100 radio configuration 97 102 Bluetooth setup 97 GPRS setup 103 peripherals 237 Index bold video attribute 183 207 Bootloader Shutdown menu 58 bootnum 802 1Q 151 802 1Q displaying 151 Bright For backlight 70 Brightness 224 Brk for Attn 2 3 BSP Bluetooth Controls 702 bt beacon timeouts 52 Buffer 220 ca cellular address 152 cable diagrams B cables installing in vehicle 237 calibrati
321. ode 39 or off to disable it Full Ascii If this parameter is enabled set to ON the characters and are useda escape characters The combination of an escape character and the next charact is converted to an equivalent ASCII character Indude Check If this parameter is enabled set to ON the check digit is included with decoded bar code data c 18 Nov 2004 118 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Code 39 Settings AIAG Strip If this parameter is enabled set to ON the AIAG data identifier is removed from each decoded Code 39 label The data identifier occurs in the first position next to the Code 39 start character It can be a single alphabetic character or a series of numeric digits followed by an alphabetic character This identifier defines the general category or specific use of the data contained in the rest of the bar code EL Note If your unit is operating with the Psion Teklogix TESS application this parameter should not be used in conjunction with the TESS AIAG feature This is because the 8525 vehicle mount performs the strip function before it processes the data through the AIAG feature if the prefix is stripped the data is not identified as AIAG Error Accept If the Err Accept and AIAG Strip parameters are enabled set to ON all label data without an AIAG identifier character is accepted If the Err Accep
322. ode Remapping tab accessed from the Keyboard Properties dialogue box Keyboard Properties Repeat Backlight One Shots Macros Unicode Mapping Scancode Remapping Es Bluetooth Device A Mouse e Edit Remove Remove All Storage D y Start TekTerm 2 Control Panel Keyboard Properties JE 2107 Figure 5 14 Scancode Remapping The first column in the Scancode Remapping tab displays the Scancodes in hexidecimal If the scancode is remapped to a virtual key that virtual key is displayed in the next column labelled V Key A virtual key that is Shifted or Unshifted is displayed in the third column labelled Function If the scancode is remapped to a function or a macro the first second columns remain blank while the third column contains the function name or macros number e g Macro 2 18 Nov 2004 A h A Y amp d Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 77 Chapter 5 Configuration Scancode Remapping Adding A Remap To add a new remapping e Tap the stylus on the Add button at the bottom of the dialogue box The Remap Scancode dialogue box is displayed HD Scancode E Bluetooth Label E Device ek O Virtual Key CANCEL 2 Function MBUTTON Mousa O Macro BACKSPACE Ge O Force Shifted grams e O Force Unshifted No Force Storage
323. of characters are typed in the Xmit Count parameter or after some time has elapsed the Xmit Wait parameter or both This reduces overhead on the radio link and improves response time See page 185 for more information about these parameters You can also determine whether the 8525 transmits immediately after the ENTER key an arrow key or a function key is pressed The 8525 computer also responds immediately to the device attribute requests CSIc CSIOC and ESCZ EL Note For a more detailed description of the parameter settings for ANSI refer to ANSI Settings on page 176 6 8 3 Psion Teklogix Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent Keys The Psion Teklogix keyboard differs from most ANSI terminals Table 6 2 maps the equivalent VT220 keys Psion Teklogix Key Equivalent VT220 Key UP arrow Up arrow DOWN arrow Down arrow RIGHT arrow Right arrow LEFT arrow Left arrow lt F1 gt lt F4 gt PF1 PF4 F5 None lt F6 gt lt F10 gt F6 F10 lt F11 gt F11 ESC lt F12 gt F12 BS di lt F13 gt F13 LF VA lt F14 gt F14 lt F15 gt Help c 18 Nov 2004 lt F16 gt Do a lt F17 gt lt F20 gt F17 F20 e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 147 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Block Mode Local Editing Psion Teklogix Key Equivalent VT220 Key lt F21 gt Find lt F22 gt Insert
324. ol Panel Euetoothconrds SAG 07 Figure 5 42 Bluetooth Properties Tab The Properties tab displays information about your 8525 and provides some port options The Device Name field shows the device name of your 8525 This name can be changed see the Note in this section for details Device Class shows the Class of Device e g desktop hand held which is always set to Handheld Local Bluetooth Address shows the address of your 8525 radio Port Prefix is used to set the port name to either BSP or COM Whent set to BSP BSP2 to BSP9 are available for activated services including When COM is chosen COM7 to COMO are available wu A 102 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual e 18 Nov 2004 Chapter 5 Configuration Active Conn Tab 5 6 3 1 Active Conn Tab Ele Vie HD F R Devices Server E E Bluetooth ard Device D Mouse ve ams Storage pem zy Start 1 TekTerm 2 Control Panel Bluetooth Controls 250 i 07 Figure 5 43 Bluetooth Active Conn Tab The Active Conn tab lists the Name Address and Type of the currently active connections The table is periodically updated while on display but it can take a few seconds before it reflects the actual list of connections The Type column of the table shows ACL or SCO The Connection list table shows the connections for scanning as well as the service connections SI Note You
325. on FKEYO 7 FKEY8 15 FKEYI6 23 FKEY24 31 And FKEY32 39 r 06 FKEYO 7 FKEYO ENTER FKEY1 F1 FKEY2 E2 FKEY3 E3 FKEY4 F4 EKEYS ES FKEY6 F6 FKEY7 E7 The sub menus attached to these parameters allow you to map the 8525 function keys 5250 Telnet Emulation r 05 Emulation Range gt WEC Advisory see text Remap Underline to None see text Intl EBCDIC N Y N Nulls in Fields Y Y N Term Type IBM 5251 11 see text Virtual Dev Enable N Y N Virtual Dev Prefix see text Features see text FKEYO 7 see text FKEY8 15 see text FKEY16 23 see text FKEY24 31 see text FKEY32 39 see text WEC Write Error Code This parameter determines the type of WEC used If set to advisory a TESS advisory message is generated when the host sends a WEC command to thev8525 ce Otherwise if set to screen text the 8525 locks the keyboard and displa the efor A host In this case the 8525 must be unlocked manually using the functi mapped to RESET 214 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Emulation Remap Underline To This parameter allows you to remap the underline cursor to blink bold reverse Or none Intl EBCDIC If this parameter is enabled set to Y the international EBCDIC character set is used swapping the positions of the and characters Null
326. ooth 30 C to 60 C 22 F to 140 F 35 C to 70 C 31 F to 158 F IEC 529 classification IP66 5 95 RH non condensing 1 5g RMS PSD 4 500 Hz 30g 11ms saw tooth UL 1950 CSA C22 2 No950 LVD FCC Part 15 Class B EMC Directi CAS Blov 2004 A E e 244 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 8 Specifications Radio Specifications 0 Radio Specifications 802 1 Ib Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum Compact Flash form factor Transmit Power Frequency Range Channels Range Rx Sensitivity Data Rates 32 mW 2 400 2 4835 to 13 50 115m 93dBm 1Mbps 1 2 5 5 and 11 Mbps auto fallback 802 1 1g Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum for future release Compact Flash form factor Transmit Power Frequency Range Channels Range RX Sensitivity Data Rates 32mW max 2 400 2 4835 1 to 13 30 115m 86dBm 6Mbps 54 48 36 34 18 12 9 6Mbps auto fallback 802 1 1a Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum for future release Compact Flash or PC Card form factor Transmit Power Frequency Range Channels Range Rx Sensitivity Data Rates 40mW max 5 15 5 35GHz 5 47 5 85GHz 1 to 20 50 115m 87dBm 6Mbps 54 48 36 24 18 1 2 9 and 6 Mbps auto fallback C 18 Nov 2004 x e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 245 Chapter 8 Specifications Bar Code Scanning RAI001 Narrow Band Radio Psion Teklogix Proprietary
327. or launch TEKLOGIX 8525 Exec E184c 81 Display Menu A Parameters 17 Type the name of a program folder or S document and Windows will open it for you Open H Cancel Browse Supervisor mmm 3 d S q st Tekem Gase FEIF EI Figure 4 14 Run Dialogue Box 4 4 1 Shutdown Choosing Shutdown displays a sub menu of options including Suspend Warm Reset and Cold Reset TEKLOGIX 8525 Exec H234n Figure 4 15 Shutdown Sub Menu aL A Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 57 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE NET Using A Dialogue Box L Note This menu varies slightly depending on the security level chosen When the 8525 is set to User level the Shutdown option is replaced by Suspend A sub menu is not available At Teklogix security level an additional option is available in the sub menu Bootloader This option behaves like cold reset except that the 8525 starts Bootloader rather than Windows CE NET Suspend The Suspend option suspends the 8525 immediately this is equivalent to turning the vehicle mount off Warm Reset The Warm Reset option resets the 8525 leaving all saved files and registry settings intact Any unsaved data is lost Cold Reset The Cold Reset option resets the 8525 Any files not stored in permanent memory are lost However the registry settings are saved 4 5 Using A Dialogue Box A dialogue box like the samples in Figure
328. ose Sos J am J sm J a 1 em 038 m TRST Fe 95621 9003444 e TE 2 480 20 1008 FLE 110 01 G DV A 16V ar 220 R191 97232 EN TDO_ASIC ASIC_TDO E e i Ld C e TNs TP566 7 22R1 un 0 063W e sv AC LINK ES TDI Aer moe 07282 Ae TDI ig e sv rW 22R1 11 0063W sv ACLINK_RESETB R189 97292 TP633 TDO CPU CPU mo ACLINK RESETB 5 ELE RESETS e TW TP558 22R1 TP627 19 ya ACLINK BITCLK ACLINK BITCLK BEE icik mok SE E 1 2 R619 97232 22R1 mi e TWW SEU TDI TP559 PESO ACLINK_SYNO ACLINK SYNC 41 0069W AGUNKCSYNO BAR o um oww me ES ACLINK_SDATAIN 8 See ACLINK SDATAIN AGUNKSDATARN i ACLINK SDATAOUT 9 AGUNKCEDATAGUT e TK TP561 ACLINK_SDATAOUT ise TP663 10 nb all miis TP556 ai TP244 97371 McN gt MIC IN 100P so 1 2 5 50V p GND e MIC GND b je asi MIC_GND R93 97244 m 68R1 GND 0 063W E 15 SPEAKER SPEAKER Se ue e 1 GND SPEAKER ar SPEAKER PWRAMPON gt 18 GND AUDIO EN 39 AUDIO_EN oy GND TDI TDO CPU TDO ASIC PXA250 Pa Po CON 2X1 CON 2x1 1 1 2 2 e e P5 PB CON 2X1 CON 2x1 Ja 1 o O e 2 2 ci gt e e 18 Nov 2004 IGNATURES DATE AWN AUG 4 2003 PSION TEKLOGIX IN d MISSISSAUGA ONTARIO ia Aa UE SCHEMATIC 8525 20 MAIN GIC BOARD AUDIO LITA RFACE ROJENG EE e 008014 E ECO We prer 22 FIN FE SHEET OF REL DATE 21 22
329. ost in place of standard mechanism used to send the system request key press to a host Telnet c 18 Nov 2004 A ly Y 7 212 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Emulation BRK for Attn When the attention key is pressed a Telnet Break command is generated This command is sent to the host in place of the standard mechanism used to send the attention key press to a host using Telnet LU Name Enabled If enabled set to Y this parameter allows the 8525 to negotiate a specific device name for itself LU Name The value assigned in this field is used when the LU Name Enabled parameter see above is set to Y The current terminal number is appended to the name to generate a unique device name for example LUA00001 Features 3274 Telnet r 06 Features Range Clear Entry Fields N Y N Passthru Printing N Y N AIAG Character 0 0 255 Barcode Character 0 0 255 Serial IO Character 0 0 255 Fixed Field Ovrhd 5 0 80 Enable Alarm N Y N Command Region Up 0 0 24 Command Region Down 0 0 24 Command Region Left 0 0 80 Command Region Right 0 0 80 These parameters are identical to those described for 2392 Telnet Refer to Features 2392 Telnet beginning on page 210 C 18 Nov 2004 x e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 213 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Emulati
330. otal Recall Total Recall This is a Psion Teklogix utility developed to maintain applications and setting over cold boots This utility is based on a backup and restore concept and is extended to incorporate powerful advanced features R IPv6 Support IPv6 Support Refers to a new Internet Protocol specification version 6 that has c 18 Nov 2004 gt 5 l e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 67 Chapter 5 Configuration Basic Setup Narrow Band Radio provides access the Narrow Band setup screens 5 5 Basic Setup 5 5 Display Properties In the Control Panel choose the Display icon This icon is displayed only if a Narrow Band radio is installed in the unit It File View 2 0 2 L 9 39 wm Bluetooth Certificates Date Time Dialing Display Internet IPv6 Device Options Support le e a amp 3 1 Mouse Narrow Band Network and Owner Password PC Power Radio Dial up Co Connection o O Ys ill Je Remove Storage System Teklogix Total Recall Volume amp jy Start ri Control Pane Figure 5 2 Choosing The Display Icon 5 5 1 1 Display Background The Background tab allows you to adjust the 8525 display backgroun In the Display Properties dialogue box open the Background tab Keyboard 9 Regional Settings d Ee wil SS 3 Display Properties D Background Appearance Backlight
331. ote number 52 Fujitsu Host 2 2 Full Ascii 177 Func Key Remap ANSI Telnet Settings 180 Function Keys 32 133 softkeys 134 Function keys 147 ANSI equivalents 147 auto reply mode 200 completing a data field 139 entering data 208 executing procedures from the local menu 45 FKEYO0 39 3274 Telnet 2 4 FKEYO0 39 5250 Telnet 2 6 Label F1 F10 changing 183 197 Open Fky Only 208 serial I O 204 G GATM Guarded Area Transfer Mode 187 Global Positioning System Unit 232 GPRS bluetooth 103 Index GPS Unit 232 Group ANSI Auto Term 177 194 H helpdesk 4 hidden fields match 799 H Match Chr 199 HOME 31 32 HOME Key 31 32 host multiple hosts 745 selecting a host 145 switching between hosts 207 Host ANSI Telnet Settings 178 Host TESS Connection Type 195 Host Char Set 193 Host Connection ANSI 177 TESS 195 Host echo mode 788 host select CTRL h 744 host terminal number of session tn 152 I I O fields 138 IATA 2of5 126 IBM 5250 Emulation Keys 139 ICD DCH controls displaying 797 IEEE radio configuring 5 Ign Bcode fld 208 Include Check 20 121 123 125 126 Include Check Discrete 2 of 5 symbology 25 Include Check Interleaved 2 of 5 symbology 25 Include Chk 777 122 124 Include Country 7 20 Include Number Sys 1722 123 Include Sym Code 128 119 incrementing parameters 154 156 Indicators 164 indicators LED functions 33 modifier keys 36 onscreen 35 power AC 36 radio signa
332. other key is pressed the modifier key becomes inactive and disappears from the taskbar 3 4 1 2 Locking Modifier Keys When a modifier key is pressed twice it is locked on A locked modifier key is displayed in uppercase letters in the taskbar For example pressing the lt BLUE gt key twice locks it on it is displayed as BLUE KEY in the taskbar at the bottom of the computer screen The locked modifier key will remain active until it is pressed a third time to unlock or turn it off Once a modifier key is unlocked pressed a third time the uppercase representation at the bottom of the screen is no longer displayed KI Note The locking function of the ORANGE and BLUE keys can be dis abled so that pressing either of these keys once will lock the keys on If you disable the One Shot function of either of these keys pressing the BLUE and or ORANGE key once will lock the key on Pressing the same key a second time will unlock or turn it off Refer to Keyboard One Shot Modes on page 72 for details 3 4 2 The Keys The lt BLUE gt And lt ORANGE gt Keys The BLUE and ORANGE modifier keys provide access to additional symbols and keys These additional symbols and keys are colour coded in blue and orange print above the keyboard keys Press the BLUE key to access functions or characters displayed in blue print on the keyboard Press the ORANGE key to access functions or cha
333. ou can run a session on the Server machine using the 8525 Windows CE NET device Refer to the following website for step by step information about setting up this connection http www microsoft com WindowsXP pro using howto gomobile remotedesktop default asp 5 2 Pocket PC Compatibility The 8525 supports the AYGShell API set that allows PocketPC compatible applications to run on the vehicle mount Microsoft Windows CE NET 4 2 is designed to include application programming interface API compatibility support for the Microsoft Windows Powered Pocket PC 2002 shell in 8525s running Windows CE NET 4 2 The website listed below describes the APIs exposed through AYGShell and the application compatibility between Windows Powered Pocket PC 2002 based applications and Windows CE NET 4 2 based devices http msdn microsoft com library default asp url library en us dncenet html WINCENET CEPCC App asp 5 3 The Control Panel The Windows CE NET Control Panel provides a group of icons through which you can set a variety of system wide properties such as mouse sensitivity network configuration and the desktop color scheme KI Note If you are uncertain how to move around a dialogue box and make selec tions review Using A Dialogue Box on page 58 When the 8525 boots up the startup desktop shell is displayed and any applications stored in the Startup folder start up immediately To access the Windows CE NET Control Panel
334. ound Trip Time is required The com puter uses the time assigned to the Initial RTT parameter as a starting value for round trip calculations Once the 8525 begins transmitting and receiving data this value will be adjusted to reflect the actual average round trip time between transmis sions and acknowledgements Protocol Type Protocol Type is used to identify the Ethernet packet frame type sent by the 8525 The default value 2457 assigned to this parameter identifies the Teklogix SO IO protocol Ethernet packet frame types The Protocol Type ID should only be altered if the default value is already being used to specify another application Ethernet frame type N Important If you change the value assigned to Protocol Type ID ensure that all 8525s and 9150s in your system use the same number 6 17 System Parameters 03 System Keyboard Audio Pwr Mgmt Ctrl Panel User Permissions Auto Start Y c 18 Nov 2004 A h X Y e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 163 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Keyboard 6 17 1 Keyboard r 04 Keyboard Macro Ctrl Panel Indicators Y Softkeys Ke Ctrl Panel 6 17 1 1 Macro Control Panel e Highlight Macro Ctrl Panel and press F1 to display the Macros tab in the Keyboard Properties dialogue box Keyboard Properties Repeat Backlight One
335. ov 2004 A fy T Ay e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 135 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application The Task Manager Switching Between Applications To pan the screen contents e Press the BLUE key twice to lock it on It will be displayed in upper case letters BLUE in the taskbar at the bottom of the screen Press the RIGHT LEFT UP or lt DOWN gt arrow key KI Note Pressing the LEFT arrow pans the screen to the right pressing the RIGHT arrow pans the screen to the left and so on Once you re done e Press the BLUE key a third time to unlock or turn it off 6 5 The Task Manager Switching Between Applications To display the Task Manager screen e Tapon Task Manager in the Start Menu Task Manager Ctrl Panel Active Tasks PTXWLAGS46B1 End Task Cancel L1tri Ajstmt TekTerm PTXWLAGS46B1 HEUTE Figure 6 1 Task Manager Screen Supervisor KI Note A shortcut to bypass the Start Menu and go directly to the Task Manager screen press ALT lt ESC gt To switch between applications Highlight the application with which you want to work e Tap on the Switch To button VA bit amp Nov 2004 To end or close an application Highlight the application you want to end and tap on the End Te 136 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application The Te
336. ows CE NET nor Tekterm use this LED Successful scan 3 6 2 Onscreen Indicators The taskbar at the bottom of the screen displays a variety of system status indicators Remote Computer Desktop J w Recycle Bin TekTerm ES A Internet Explorer Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 35 Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 8525 Onscreen Indicators This display changes dynamically and only those icons that are applicable are displayed For example if a radio is not installed in your 8525 the radio signal icon is not displayed in the taskbar Start Windows Start Button You can display the Start Menu by tapping on the Windows Start button in the taskbar blue key KEY Modifier Key Indicators lt SHIFT gt lt CTRL gt ALT BLUE and lt ORANGE gt are modifier keys that have onscreen indicators to show when a key is active or locked If a modifier key is pressed once to activate it the key is displayed in the taskbar in lowercase characters for example pressing the lt BLUE gt key once displays blue key in the taskbar If a modifier key is pressed twice it is locked on and the onscreen indicator is displayed in uppercase letters in the taskbar for example pressing lt BLUE gt twice displays BLUE KEY in the taskbar all 802 11 Radio Signal Quality Increasing radio signal quality is represented by longer filled bars within this icon al d A dd d d Y Go
337. ox The channel list is added to the selected channel in the Manual Switch Table dialogue box 5 5 1 3 Protocol Tab Narrow Band Radio OK x able Cellular Protocol equires warm reset to take effect C V Auto Manual Address Polling Sync Delay ms fiz m Polling Poll Time Out 1 605 22 values Late TX limit ms b Figure 5 35 Protocol Tab c 18 Nov 2004 E a e e 92 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Protocol Tab Enable Cellular Protocol The value assigned to this parameter must be identical to the value assigned to the corresponding parameter in the Psion Teklogix Network Controller Wireless Gateway or Base Station A warm reset of the 8525 is required before this parameter can take effect If Enable Cellular Protocol is disabled unchecked the options in the Cellular Radio Address frame are displayed in grey text indicating that they cannot be accessed Cellular Radio Address Auto Radio Address If Auto Radio Address is enabled V the 8525 requests an automatically assigned radio address Manual Radio Address is displayed in grey text indicating that it cannot be accessed Manual Radio Address The value entered in the Manual Radio Address parameter is used to identify the 8525 over the radio link A unique value from 1 to 3840 must be assigned for each unit KI Note This parameter is set to O an out of range value by
338. p ee i a yy yp ouo 12 amp jStart TekTerm 2 Control Panel IFA Stylus Properties Ji 55807 Figure 5 24 Disabling The Touchscreen e Tap the stylus on the checkbox next to V Disable the touch panel The touch screen will not accept screen taps 5 5 6 Certificate Assignment e n the Control Panel choose the Certificate icon File View x yh 2 Be Q M o B gt Y gt Bluetooth Certificates g Date Time Dialing Display Internet IPv6 Keyboard Device Options Support Py S d e 2 1 8 Si amp amp J Mouse Owner Password PC Power Regional i Connection Settings D a M b o Remove Storage System Teklogix Total Recall Volume amp Ls sar er ede y Start_ 3 Control Panel s uw will 5 E 3 Figure 5 25 Certificates Icon C 18 Nov 2004 x e 84 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Narrow Band Radio This dialogue box is used in conjunction with 802 1x authentication to enhance 8525 security Certificates 7 x p Stores Bluetooth Trusted Authorities board Device Class 3 Public Primary Certification Authority A Entrust net Certification Authority 2048 y Entrust net Secure Server Certification Authorit Lists the certificates Equifax Secure Certificate Authority Mouse i Bional d trusted by you GlobalSign Root CA tings Remove Storage Stylus
339. p on the checkbox next to Enable 802 1x authenti tion and press the SPACE key to enable V it EAP Type Extensible Authentication Protocol This dropdown menu lists the EAP types available on your system items i in this dropdown menu will vary depending on your net am d oOV 2004 20 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Assigning An IP Address a Certificate By selecting the Properties button you will be able to select a Certificate Certificate Assignment on page 84 provides a website that outlines how to create certificates for your network 6 Saving and exiting the radio setup Once you have completed your configuration press ENTER or tap on OK The connection you created will be listed in the Wireless Information tab as a preferred network The radio will search for the SSID and will compare the WEP and authentication information you specified If there is a match between your 8525 settings and the access point settings the 8525 will communicate on the network through the access point 2 2 3 Assigning An IP Address If your network is not using a DHCP server you will need to assign an IP address File Edit View Blo E a Le IP Information wireless Statistics wireless Information Make New Serial Cabld Internet Protocol TCP IP Connection on COM2 Address Type DHCP IP Address 10 132 100 5 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Defau
340. pervisor e In the Control Panel choose the Stylus icon Ele View gt 0 pat amp 9 w amp Bluetooth Certificates Date Time Dialing Display Internet IPv6 Keyboard Device Options Support e Ac 3 2 1 8 Si amp D PD Mouse Narrow Bandi Network and Owner Password PC Power Regional m E Dial up Co Connection Settings amp 2 Remove Storage Start G Control Panel Ge System y o Teklogix Total Recall Volume amp KC Figure 5 21 Stylus Icon C 18 Nov 2004 A S e 82 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Setting Double Tap Sensitivity 5 5 5 Setting Double Tap Sensitivity e In the Double Tap tab follow the directions to tailor the sensitivity of the stylus when you tap on the touchscreen Stylus Properties 7 x Double Tap Calibration Options la Bluetooth Double tap this grid to set the double tap sensitivity for both board Device the speed and physical distance between taps 5 Mouss Double tap this icon to test your double tap settings If this icon sim doesn t change adjust your settings using the grid above Remove Storage Stylus System Teklogi Total Recall Volume amp rzl amp Start TekTerm 2 Control Panel PA Stylus Properties wiz Figure 5 22 Setting Stylus Sensitivity 5 5 5 Touchscreen Calibration Touchscre
341. premises of RFI Global Services Ltd Ewhurst Park Ramsdell Basingstoke Hampshire RG26 5RG England VA 18 Nov 2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD TEST REPORT S No RFI EMCE1 RP46573JD02A Page 12 of 30 Issue Date 05 November 2004 Test Of Psion Teklogix Inc Vehicle Mount Terminal Model 8525 To 95 54 EC 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII 7 Measurements Examinations and Derived Results 7 1 General Comments 7 1 1 This section contains test results only Details of the test methods and procedures can be found in section 9 of this report 7 1 2 Measurement uncertainties are evaluated in accordance with current best practice Our reported expanded uncertainties are based on standard uncertainties which are multiplied by an appropriate coverage factor to provide a statistical confidence level of approximately 95 Please refer to Section 8 for details of measurement uncertainties VA 18 Nov 2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD TEST REPORT S No RFI EMCE1 RP46573JD02A Page 13 of 30 Issue Date 05 November 2004 Test Of Psion Teklogix Inc Vehicle Mount Terminal Model 8525 To 95 54 EC 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII 7 2 Radiated Narrowband Emissions 7 2 1 Electric Field Strength Measurements Frequency Range 30 to 1000 MHz 7 2 1 1 Plots of the initial scans can be found in Appendix 3 7 2 1 2 The following table lists frequencies at which emissions were measured using a peak de
342. r Range x origin y origin When enabled set to Y this parameter locks the display at a defined location on the screen preventing it from shifting when the cursor is moved The x origin and y origin coordinates specify where the screen origin the upper left corner of the screen will be fixed X origin and y origin The x origin parameter is used to specify the column to which the upper left corner of the screen will be anchored The y origin parameter is used to specify the row coordinate to which the screen will be anchored 6 20 2 9 Emulation KI Note These parameters are only accessible when one of the following TESS Host Conn options is selected 2392 Telnet 3274 Telnet or 5250 Telnet 2392 Telnet Emulation 05 Emulation Ranges Send CR with Fkey N Y N Features see text Send CR with FKEY A function key press generates a string of text to be sent back to the host If this parameter is enabled a carriage return is appended to the function key C 18 Nov 2004 x e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 209 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Emulation Features 2392 Telnet 06 Features Range Clear Entry Fields N Y N Passthru Printing N Y N AIAG Character 0 0 255 Barcode Character 0 0 255 Serial IO Character 0 0 255 Fixed F
343. r If the 8525 is drawing power from a battery this option is ignored and the other parameters defined in Display Properties dialogue box take affect 5 5 Keyboard Properties This icon displays the Keyboard Properties dialogue box in which you can adjust the repeat rate of the keys the intensity of the keyboard backlight and the behaviour of the BLUE and ORANGE modifier keys This dialogue box also allows you to define macro keys and Unicode characters e In the Control Panel choose the Keyboard icon File View Q O 2 b 94 9 K VO 4 Bluetooth Certificates Date Time Dialing Display Internet IPv6 Keyboard Device Options Support Ay a 5 1 Si amp amp PB Mouse Narrow Band Network and Owner Password PC Power Regional i Radio up Co Connection Settings o v Ys If 3o Remove Storage System Teklogix Total Recall Volume amp Stat Ir Control Panel Figure 5 6 Choosing The Keyboard Icon Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Key Repeat 5 5 Key Repeat e In the Keyboard Properties dialogue box open the Repeat tab d Bluetooth Device gt Mouse e Storage start Tekrem Control Panel Bars LAXE IZ Figure 5 7 Key Repeat Properties Keyboard Properties ok x Tap here and hold down a key to test Enable Character Repeat Tapping in the checkbox next to thi
344. r a number which either exceeds 10 or falls below 1 the incorrect value will be rejected the original value for this parameter if any will be displayed 6 11 2 3 Y N Parameters Y N parameters can only be enabled Y or disabled N To enable or disable a Y N parameter e Press the RIGHT or lt LEFT gt arrow key once or e Type y to enable or n to disable the parameter Some Y N parameters have sub menus For these parameters a double right arrow gt gt appears next to the Y or N 6 11 2 4 Alpha Parameters Alpha characters appear in reverse video in this type of parameter The allowable values for alpha parameters consist of a predetermined set of acceptable letters or words To cycle through the set e Press the lt RIGHT gt or lt LEFT gt arrow keys 6 11 2 5 String Entry Parameters Important For detailed information about using string entry fields to program macro keys refer to Macro Control Panel on page 164 WA A sequence or string of characters can be entered in this type of parameter er 8v 2004 string entry parameter contains data it is displayed in reverse video En pty are not displayed in reverse video The methods that can be used to ent r information in string entry parameters are described in this section v a A k n A 156 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application String Entry Parameters In string
345. ra tenn FAULTIS g d Ne EXT KVBD PWR EN J4 5 r eo KE c ECH 9002950 5V STANDBY ISL6121LIB T mws i GND use Y 9000515 e VIN our e Ti e NC7SZI25P5X A 3V3 STANDBY VIN2 omg gt 1 ss 4 8 R612 e Ours e 7 4K70 1 5 97288 ee Or TP130 0 063W 2 1 gt La L e TP506 TP534 3V3 STANDBY 3V3 STANDBY e e MTG TAB E BLMIOA121SPT a MTG TAB C453 1 e 25 97871 1 nea 100N 1m o Kin ep 97288 INT 32KHZ 15 5 nd TP505 See e iev 2 vec PES 32KHz s L47 96950 200MA e 2 Y INT KBD INT om Sa 2 o o o ROB BUFF KBD INT BLMIOA121SPT 3V3 STANDBY e i INT_TXRX_SCL d GND GND oe ja oue li TS Tix SCL 9000515 97871 NC7SZI25P5X 3 ani 100N INT_TXRX_SDA Ts BND TP519 H5 2 inc sk 16V 7 i y Y INT_EL_COMMAND in GND e e e EL COMMAND e T GND gt e 13 Qn 7 5V_STANDBY e T 3 3V SWITCHED e z TT 3 8V STANDBY 1 1 30 g T NC R320 R321 o BUS TP500 Dc cd wa e y SYSPWR 97288 97288 o 2 o3 1 1 98950 200MA SYSPWR R 4 GND RY_SCL e e e e tE e SYSPWR 120_SCL Jens TY scL BLMIOAIZISPT et 8 BANIR TP501 S 3 12C_SDA SX SDA RX SDA Las 96350 200MA 8 NC mu STANDBY s vec TXD_SDA e e hd 5V_SWITCHED e 9002929 BUMIOMEISPT S 5V SWITCHED P82B96TD u14 8 NC C423 e T 5V STANDBY se TP528 100N 15 L44 96350 200MA j ER 16V OY Y C278 0277 Ci61 c158 c155 CYYY C215 C210 C206 FH12 24S 0 5SH 3V3 e MAG e T To A eal CL carer r eet get Pp CST E REA CRISE BLMIOA121SPT Jen w 100P 100P 100P
346. racters displayed in orange print on the keyboard The lt SHIFT CAPS gt Key The lt SHIFT CAPS gt key is used to display uppercase alpha characters lt BLUE gt lt SHIFT gt turns the CAPS key on so that all alpha characters a in uppercase until the lt BLUE gt lt SHIFT gt sequence is pressed again 30 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 8525 The Keys The Arrow Keys The Arrow keys move the cursor around the screen in the direction of the arrow up down left and right The cursor is the flashing box or underline character that indicates where the next character you type will appear The lt INS gt Key The lt INS gt key inserts a character at the cursor position The lt DEL gt Key The lt DEL gt key erases the character at the cursor position The lt BKSP gt Key The lt BKSP gt key sometimes referred to as destructive backspace moves the cursor one character to the left erasing the incorrectly entered key stroke The lt CTRL gt And lt ALT gt Key The lt CTRL gt and lt ALT gt keys modify the function of the next key pressed and are application dependent The lt TAB gt Key Typically the TAB key moves the cursor to the next field to the right or downward The lt ESC gt Key Generally this key is used as a keyboard shortcut to close the current menu dialogue box or activity and return to the previous one The lt
347. rameter and press the RIGHT or LEFT arrow key to display the character set options e Press F4 to save your selection to memory N Important When a character sent from the host cannot be displayed a rectangular box is used as a substitute 6 20 1 8 Anchor View r 05 Anchor Range x origin 1 1 24 y origin 1 80 When enabled set to Y this parameter locks the display at a defined location on the screen preventing it from shifting when the cursor is moved The x origin and y origin coordinates specify where the screen origin the upper left corner of the screen will be fixed X origin and y origin The x origin parameter is used to specify the column to which the fppe left corner of the screen will be anchored The y origin parameter is ised MA the row coordinate to which the screen will be anchored c 18 Nov 2004 E a e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 193 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application TESS Settings 6 20 2 TESS Settings m 04 TESS L Range gt Auto Term N Terminal 1 see text Host Conn see text Screen see text Characters see text Tests see text Features see text Scanner see text Fields see text Anchor View N see text Emulation see text Each session you create has its own Settings pa
348. rameters Additional TESS information is documented in TESS Emulation on page 137 Auto Term KI Note Auto Term is available when 802 1Qv2 is assigned to the Host Conn parameter page 195 or when 802 10v1 is enabled in the Radio Menu see 802 10 v1 on page 162 When this parameter is set to Y a unique unit number is assigned for the current TESS session If Auto Term is set to Y any value assigned to the Terminal parameter is ignored Group Auto Term Range Group 1 de When Auto Term is set to Y the Group parameter is used to identify the group or pool of numbers from which an auto address is chosen Terminal zero and unique This parameter defines the terminal number for the TES si and uniquely identifies all transmissions to and from the 8525 18 Nov 2004 E e 194 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Host Conn Other applications running in the 8525 such as an ANSI session or another TESS session must each have a different number In addition each Psion Teklogix 8525 using the radio link must have a unique number 6 20 2 1 Host Conn Host Conn Range Conn Type 802 1Qv2 see text Settings see text Conn Type For TESS applications this parameter allows you to choose one of the following types of
349. rd is locked the function keys arrow keys and the ENTER key are still functional The 8525 emits an error beep if a character is rejected because the keyboard is locked Changes to this parameter take effect only after the unit is reset Remap Passthru When this parameter is set to Y passthru data is remapped from the host charset to the port charset Normally passthru data is sent as is to the port without any remapping Disable Beep Setting this parameter to y disables the beep generated by the o G and YPF TESS commands Keep in mind that Error and Scan beeps are not disabled C 18 Nov 2004 x e 202 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Features Serial r 06 Serial Range Serial Port Any Available see text Serial Out Y Y N Serial In N Y N SI mode see text SI prefix 10 03 255 SI suffix 13 0 5 2 DD SI CRC N Y N SI Fkey 0 019255 SO prefix 10 0 255 SO suffix 13 0 255 SO CRC N Y N Serial Port TESS print commands control the transfer of data to and from the serial and printer ports on the 8525 At the 8525 computer the value assigned at the Serial Port parameter ranks which port the TESS print command will identify and use as the first to fourth port The allowable options are Any Available 1st Serial 2nd Serial 3rd Serial 4th Serial and Disabled Serial Out This parameter ena
350. re is recorded to be in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of ninety 90 days from the date of original retail purchase Your exclusive remedy uhideiNiris patQ04 the product con po taining the Software or replacement of the Software which is reumed to MDC ora g Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual V License Agreement MDC authorized representative with a copy of the receipt THIS LIMITED WAR RANTY AND ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES ON THE MEDIA INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO NINETY 90 DAYS FROM THE DATE OF ORIGINAL RETAIL PURCHASE SOME JURIS DICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU THE LIMITED WARRANTY SET FORTH HEREIN IS EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHERS WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN EXPRESS OR IMPLIED LICENSOR SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY BY JURISDICTION Disclaimer of Warranty on Software You expressly acknowledge and agree that use of the Software is at your sole risk The Software is provided AS IS and without warranty of any kind and MDC and MDC s licensor s for the purposes of warranty and liability MDC and MDC s licensor s shall be collectively referred to as MDC EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES A
351. rem 11 Control Panel IER Figure 5 12 Unicode Mapping The Unicode Mapping tab is used to map combinations of virtual key values and lt CTRL gt and lt SHIFT gt states to Unicode values This tab shows the configured Unicode character along with the Unicode value For example the sample screen above shows a U 0061 indicating that the character a is represented by the Unicode value 0061 and so on Keep in mind that Unicode configurations are represented as hexidecimal rather than decimal values All user defined Unicode mappings are listed in the Unicode Mapping tab in order of virtual key value and then by order of the shift state If a Unicode mapping is not listed the Unicode mapping is mapped to the default Unicode value c 18 Nov 2004 E a e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 75 Chapter 5 Configuration Unicode Mapping Adding And Changing Unicode Values AY Important Changes to Unicode mappings are not saved until you exit the Keyboard Properties dialogue box e Tap on the Add Change button Bluetooth Device 9 Mouse e LU Storage Start 1 TekTerm Control Panel Keyboard Properties SXM 20 Figure 5 13 Adding And Change Unicode Values e Tap ona value in the Unicode mapping list in the sample screen above a value will be assigned to virtual key 0 VK 0 e Tap the stylus in the Unicode Mapping
352. ribes these function keys These softkeys can be reprogrammed to perform different functions within TESS and ANSI applications Important Tapping the stylus on the appropriate softkey label executes the function of the softkey providing that the labels are visible at the bottom of the 8525 screen See Softkeys on page 164 if they are not visible Function Key Softkey Function Fl NEXT Displays the next sub menu F2 PREV Displays the previous menu DEFLT Restores parameters to default settings even after F3 pressing F4 to save the changes F4 SAVE Saves a change to a parameter value LITRL Literal mode allows special characters to be F5 entered in a string parameter such as macro key strings Table 6 1 Softkeys KI Note The SAVE onscreen label only appears when a parameter value has been changed and has not yet been saved 6 2 2 Macro Keys Important Refer to Keyboard Macro Keys on page 73 for details about creating macros 8525 vehicle mounts are equipped with a twelve macro keys that can be programmed to replace frequently used keystrokes along with the functio executable keys like the ENTER key the lt BKSP gt key any function k arrow key and so on 18 Nov 2004 A h Y Ey 134 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Changing The Screen Font Size Macro Keys MI
353. rints Y jog Ft D8 SDCAS FE as pos LE D E e x Damo iz 5 __7_ TP50 E D7 1 pa CAS LATENCY Hi CAS latency 3 low CAS latency 2 G5 De DOMI Fi D8 pe ES i F1 unam pas 28 ZE R217 m ES C196 97296 gt 105 DOM2 8_ inom pas 09 oi DOMO E8 ibom pos 29 D o 1 97871 Ke m Se E PENES 100N 0 063W 104 Dos C Dos C8 116 H ava ava ji ENSE ava Gat e 08 LE Ds A23 pas C9 Dra LES A23 G7_ pao Das C9 D3 er E TP44 E m A24 A paz LP D e e A24 Ga lam poe D e TP41 Wee 5 x e o Vee i 3 le C340 cte7 C186 pi LP Di par B9 D C360 C361 C362 par LB 01 C370 can C372 a d N E 1 S772 1 97871 1 97871 1 97871 menu 97372 a een menu 97372 INE 5 i e E 10N 100N 100N A wssi wa St Do A22 la pao A8 Di 100N 100N 10N A22 St la pao 48 DO 100N 100N 10N e a 15 15 B Tesi B 15 E 15 15 15 PCM IN mu 2 ev 2 iw 2 iw y Ht vege A21 el 2 iv 2 tev 2 tev A21 el 2 tev 2 o 2 tev 3 gt H6 E6 e e 0 vs LOCKPRE A20 H9 Ato AP VDD as e A20 H9 Ato AP VDD A9 A9 e ma G3 ag VDD_E7 AIS G3_ ag vop_e7 E7 e NE Ais Ht ag Ob d Am ml we e wy RM E He inn VDDO_A7 Curs H2 inn vopa A7 AZ e e ES csl A16 H3 As VDDQ B3 AIR H3 Ag VDDpa_B3 E3 e A15 32 tas VDDQ_C7 e AIS Bas vopa c7 E7 e e W Au Ja D3 C363 C364 C373 C365 Au Ja D3 C66 C367 C368 C369 M opens 97871 1 97871 1 97871 1 97972 bd Von 1 STi 1 97871 1 97871 1 97372 NAND FLASH 1 Am anc 100N 100N 100N 10N Am Ela 100N 100N 100N 10N 115 115 15 15 115
354. rminal Model 8525 To 95 54 EC 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII Table of Contents 1 GHOEME INTOFMATION EE 4 2 Equipment Under Test BUT secitsicicientecuscutsanpiiainitaesicetvaschvascunmnnendssaoiieneisiwteaneiddesteasunnslenunidi inr dE 5 3 Test Specification Methods amp Procedures EEN EEE NEEN EEN EEEEEEEEEEEEEEE NEEN EENEG 8 4 Deviations from the Test Specification cccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 9 5 Operation of the EUT During Testi 10 6 Summary of Test Results cuicos ia ERN EC Ra x xa au EE FER YR ERAER EMI NR RSRER LN VI VARNRE EE RR DAR UE CAE 11 7 Measurements Examinations and Derived Results ee 12 8 Measurement Uncertainty Liceo iustius ntmennaa isis dE is Ck dion lans E Enea DT RR 17 9 Measurement Methods iio 18 Appendix 1 Test Equipment Used pp 20 Appendix 2 Test Configuration Drawinggs eeeeseeeeeeeeeeeee nennen enne nennen nnn nnns 21 Appendix 3 Graphical Test Results ps 24 Appendix 4 Photographs of EUT pp 26 VA 18 Nov 2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD TEST REPORT S No RFI EMCE1 RP46573JD02A Page 4 of 30 Issue Date 05 November 2004 Test Of Psion Teklogix Inc Vehicle Mount Terminal Model 8525 To 95 54 EC 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII 1 Client Information Company Name Psion Teklogix Inc Address 2100 Meadowvale Boulevard Mississauga
355. rrow key after entering data e Filling an auto tab field 18 Nov 2004 gt x Y e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 139 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application TESS Edit Modes And Cursor Movement 6 7 5 1 TESS Edit Modes And Cursor Movement The TESS editing modes and cursor movements in each type of mode are described in the table below Press lt CTRL gt f to enter field mode In this mode once data entry into a field has been completed the entry cannot be changed without retyping the entire field In field mode the lt RIGHT gt and lt LEFT gt arrow keys do not perform any functions Pressing the UP or DOWN arrow key completes the entry field and then moves the cursor to the previous or next field Field mode Press lt CTRL gt u to enter fcursor mode In this mode once data entry into a field has been completed the entry cannot be changed Fcursor mode without retyping the entire field In fcursor mode the UP DOWN LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys move the cursor between fields Press lt CTRL gt i to enter insert mode In this mode data can be entered between two characters that have been previously entered In insert mode the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys move the cursor right and left within a field The UP and DOWN arrow keys complete the entry field and move the cursor to the previous or next field Insert mode Press lt CTRL gt r to enter
356. rs see page 161 Security Supervisor see page 160 Display see page 160 e To open the More Parameters menu press F1 02 Parameters Radio System Scanner Ctrl Panel View Manager Applications Ports Network 6 16 Radio Parameters Important Radio parameters should not be changed from their factory settings without a clear understanding of your system The 8525 is equipped with an 802 1 1b radio VA c 18 Nov 2004 H h Y e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 161 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Radio Parameters e Press F1 to display the Radio sub menu 03 Radio 802 11 e Press F1 to access the 802 11 sub menu 04 802 11 DS SS 802 19 1 N gt e Set 802 10 v to Y to activate these parameters and press F1 to display 802 IQ v1 parameters 05 802 10 vl Range Auto Radio Addr Y Y N Radio Address 0 1 3840 Initial RTT 0 0 1000 Protocol Type 2457 1501 65535 802 10 vl When 802 IQ v1 is set to Y the attached sub menu of parameters is enabled Auto Radio Addr If this parameter is enabled set to Y a request is sent to the network controller to assign a radio address to the vehicle mount computer radio
357. s e a 9000559 x ER JI TPa03 mae Z ho vo 2 o Pe bem A E Th Ween S TP220 97272 97634 Wey P fo e TP239 Zu d 1K00 E cam 0 063W zl sev ED i pa 1 18V 225MW 3 ao Tp2o2 25V_350MW SS WE Tress 1 i v i S 9004282 E Bid A m 1 E E 12 PWM e TP233 SST5485 v TP236 9000926 1 92525 1 s e e ACP TP766 N E e e tatoo e z WE e R81 i TR a 0063wW 40V_225MW 1 ACSEL 97320 1 16 Tom al R374 xo X I pens heper zm e e e ee S SE dm EY e 7 0 063 1 C35 97453 ORO 1 97371 1K00 a TEN H or 9003429 ch 100P 0063w 5 bk 100 s 1 2 R2 al E E BH 2 4 e DEPLETED BAT 19 SEH 2 8094 209 1 45 R130 0 063W 9001574 R80 DIT 2 sov SZ SRN 1 Y e TP238 JE 97320 7 92642 wy mam TP252 e i ACPRES a 0 063W 100K MMBD914 e e as m 0 063W 7OV_225MA 9 3 1 46 E SVREF 1 1 AOSEL BAT 18 e ei 2 s Te KR e CHARGE WDO al naire WV pP e CHARGE CURRENT MC ike x R263 BATTDRV e e 2931 el ser Kn 87296 Ee 10K0 uss DPM gt 2A56 TOES A TP267 e e 1 eum E 9001558 enn SRSET al at sT e gp 16V el MER ADMIDSAR SVREF Tu 97707 9003433 9003433 E Vee 1 12v 2U2 2U2 7 1 12V_ 350MW 3 age 2 10 1 H e e e e WER 50V 50V TP242 O MR RESET TP265 Se a Tpaa e el Rao 97320 1 CB4 7 m Seier A TP241 O 4 pri PFo 5 TP266 100K 900942 BATSET s e TP259 Me 576K gt 0 063W R275 100 EES S E 97296 2 802 20 4 gt e e i HE SS P BATDEP 1 11 CHARGE_EN wo BER a BER 9001579 l vs 2 e
358. s sorg e bk omm ke b Roe o RO OR B oy a 198 0 20 24 Test 200 6 20 2 5 Features 6 comer EN EEN de NEE y EO a 201 6 20 2 0 SCanner sos soporta a ae a CUR rts cti ae 205 6202 7 Fields es REL E Re RR UE 206 6 20 2 8 Anchor VIEW ecu eR ee pex SR Rs 209 6 20 2 9 Emulation 2 4 e 8 badd ER Rv ee ees 209 6 21 Ports Tether And Console 0 000000 ee eee 217 6 21 1 Tether And Console Port Peripheral Options 217 6 21 2 Tether Serial And Console Port Parameter Settings 218 6 21 3 Tether And Console Port Scan See Parameters 221 6 21 3 1 Scan See Sub Menu Mapping The Viewport 221 6 21 3 2 Scan See Keyboard Mapping 6 0 22 NEWWO ar a the Sa 4 a Be ee e ada d 6 22 1 Network Ctrl Panel Settings 6 22 2 80210 Y2 e e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 131 c 18 Nov 2004 A k z d e Chapter 6 Tekterm Application The Tekterm Application 6 1 The Tekterm Application Tekterm is a powerful emulation application ideally suited for real time data transaction applications associated with mainframes and servers The 8525 includes unique features that support Tekterm a Psion Teklogix application that has the ability to maintain multiple simultaneous sessions with a variety of host computers 6 Additional Keyboard Functions In addition to the standard keyboard functions see The Keyboard on page 29 Tekterm supports function keys softkeys a
359. s the 8525 cannot be switched on without turning the vehicle key on However if the operator switches the key off repeatedly for long periods during a shift it may make more sense to wire the 8525 before the switch Keep in mind that the 8525 will continue to operate with or without vehicle power as long as its back up battery has sufficient charge If an unfused power source must be used a fuse assembly PN 19440 must be added to the extension power cable the fuse and instructions are supplied with the cable Use only a 10A slow blow UL approved fuse in the fuse assembly The fuse assembly must be located as close as practical to the DC supply and shall connect to the positive side of the DC supply C 18 Nov 2004 A e 240 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual SPECIFICATIONS 8 1 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer Specifications 243 8 2 Radio Specifications 245 ie 240 8 3 1 External Scanners 20 46 8546 be eid ee RE RT 246 8 4 External Scanner Specifications 246 8 4 1 PowerScan LR and XLR Industrial Scanner Specs 246 8 4 2 PowerScan Standard Range Scanner Specs 248 8 5 Internal Lithium Ion Battery aoaaa e 250 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 241 Chapter 8 Specifications 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer Specifications KI Note Performance specifications are nominal and subject to change without notice 8 1
360. s In Fields Setting this parameter to Y allows null characters e g hyphens or periods to fill in empty entry fields Term Type The value assigned for this parameter IBM 5555 001 or IBM 5251 11 indicates the type of terminal to report during the Telnet negotiations It determines how the AS 400 host treats the terminal IBM 5251 11 is a standard 5250 terminal IBM 5555 001 is a Korean language terminal Virtual Dev Enabled If enabled set to Y this parameter allows the 8525 to negotiate a specific device name for itself Virtual Dev Prefix The prefix assigned in this field is used when the Virtual Dev Enabled parameter see above is set to Y The current terminal number is appended to the prefix to generate a unique device name You can assign up to 9 upper case alphanumeric characters in this field C 18 Nov 2004 x e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 215 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Emulation Features 5250 Telnet m 06 Features Range Clear Entry Fields N Y N Passthru Printing N Y N AIAG Character 0 0 255 Barcode Character 0 0 255 Serial IO Character 0 0 255 Fixed Field Ovrhd 5 0 80 Enable Alarm N Y N Command Region Up 0 0 24 Command Region Down 0 0 24 Command Region Left 0 0 80 Command Region Right 0 0 80 These parameters are identical to those described for 2392 Telnet Refer t
361. s depending on whether or not a value is assigned in the Click Data parameter When a value is not assigned for the Click Data double clicking the scanner trigger overrides the target dot delay set in the Dot Time parameter and initiates a normal scan sweep If a value is assigned for the Click Data parameter double clicking the scanner trigger inserts the Click Data value rather than initiating a scan Click Data For both integrated and external scanners this parameter determines which character is sent to the application installed in your 8525 following a double click A dialogue box appears asking that you press the key you want to insert The ASCII Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed Pressing the lt ESC gt key in this dialogue box resets the data to zero Options Dot Time msec The value selected for Dot Time msec determines in milliseconds how long the targeting dot remains on before the scanner switches to a normal scan sweep The allowable values are 0 0 1 0 5 1 0 1 5 2 0 2 5 and 3 0 seconds A value of 0 zero disables the target dot Short Code When enabled set to ONT this parameter allows scanning of short I 2 of 5 bar codes 2 characters When disabled these short bar codes are rejected ES Enabling Short Code may reduce the robustness of the decoding since the WC A 8525 must decode more potential bar codes it is therefore not recommefided for general purpo
362. s option enables V the key behaviour you specify in this dialogue box Repeat Delay The repeat delay chosen for this parameter determines the delay in milliseconds between repeat characters Sliding the Repeat Delay bar to the left increases the delay between key repeats while sliding the bar to the right shortens the repeat delay time Repeat Rate The value assigned for the Repeat Rate parameter determines how quickly the key you press repeats and is measured in characters per second cps Sliding the bar to the left slows the repeat rate and sliding the bar to the right increases the repeat rate A Note Use the field at the bottom of this dialogue box to test the repeat delay and rate settings you ve chosen Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 71 Chapter 5 Configuration Keyboard Backlight 5 5 2 2 Keyboard Backlight e In the Keyboard Properties dialogue box open the Backlight tab Keyboard Properties d Options pea On For fis seconds y D n When using external power keep the backlight always ON Mouse Storage v Zi Start 1 TekTerm Control Panel Keyboard Properties SXM 207 Figure 5 8 Keyboard Backlight Properties Intensity This parameter is used to adjust the light intensity of the 8525 keyboard backlight Sliding the bar to the left darkens the keyboard backlight intensity and sliding it to the right lightens the intensity ON For Th
363. s string to the host when it receives a DA or DECID control The example shown in the Xmit Modes screen sample on page 184 is the device attribute sent to a VAX identifying the Psion Teklogix vehicle mount computer as a VT220 terminal This parameter may or may not be set depending on the requirements of the host computer Auto Answer This string can be up to 30 characters long and is sent by the 8525 as a reply to an ENQ character from the host The Auto Answer string is programmable in the same manner as the keyboard macros For example this string can be used automatically send the username and password when logging into thefiost Refer to Macro Control Panel beginning on page 164 for additional details about A macros c 18 Nov 2004 A ly Y Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 185 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Xmit Modes bit When this parameter is disabled set to N the vehicle mount computer transmits 8 bit controls When enabled set to Y the vehicle mount transmits 7 bit controls This parameter applies to character mode block mode and media copy mode Block Mode 06 Block Mode Kbd lock Xmit key FETM GATM MATM SATM TTM EOL chars EOB chars KK GGG GG All modes in this section affect the data stream sent to the host computer the serial port and the console port These modes apply to the Block mode Local E
364. se bar codes with 4 or more characters c 18 Nov 2004 h X Y 4 116 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Bar Codes Verify The value entered for this parameter determines the number of correct additional decodes required after the initial decode before a bar code is accepted Higher values significantly increase the time it takes to decode a bar code but also improve the reliability of the decoded bar code Security This parameter controls the tolerance for decoding edge to edge bar codes Code 93 Code 128 UPC EAN Lower values have a lower tolerance for misreads but they also increase the time it takes to decode the bar code The default value of 30 is generally a good compromise setting 5 9 Bar Codes File View Properties OK ES H x o 0 gt Options Barcodes Translations GA Bluetooth Certificates Date T IPv6 Keyboard ei tA Qu EAN 13 Ba Z EAN 8 Mouse Network and Ownd UPC EAN Regional Remove Dial up Co UPC A Settings Programs CH UPCE e B Y Storage Stylus Syste 7 stat pct Figure 5 68 Bar Code Selection Codabar disabled sl M Cada na ficas dr All the available bar code symbologies can be selected from this tab A Important To improve the decode speed and performance enable set to ON only those codes that are required by the application C 18 Nov 2004 A S e Psio
365. sed approval mark which comprises a capital letter E followed by the number 11 within a circle together with the approval number allocated by the Secretary of State for Transport 3 4 The holder of this approval shall be prepared at any time to satisfy Department for Transport officials or agents of the Department that Motor Vehicles of the type approved which have been produced and marked or that are intended to be marked by him conform in all material respects with the type of vehicle approved 3 5 The holder of this approval undertakes to admit duly authorised officials or agents of the Department at all reasonable times to any premises in which the Motor Vehicles of the type approved which have been or are intended to be marked are manufactured assembled or stored and to permit any such official or agent to inspect the Motor Vehicles and all records relating to them and their production processes 3 6 This approval may be suspended or withdrawn by the Secretary of State for Transport at any time without any particular length of notice given and in the event of that being done the holder will absolve the Secretary of State from any claim for damages or compensation en 1 The Eastgate Office Centre E Switchboard 44 0 117 951 5151 Eastgate Road Main Fax 44 0 117 952 4103 Bristol BS5 6XX E mail general vca gov uk United Kingdom Web Site www vca gov uk VEHICLE CERTIFICATION AGENCY THE UNITED KINGDOM VEHICLE APPRO
366. sing The Internet 108 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration Total Recall 5 7 Total Recall Total Recall is a Psion Teklogix utility developed to maintain applications and setting over cold boots This utility is based on a backup and restore concept and is extended to incorporate power advanced features e Inthe Control Panel choose the Total Recall icon File View H x H D 2 b 9 9 B amp F Bluetooth Certificates Date Time Dialing Display Internet IPv6 Keyboard Device Options Support A 8 ag 9 d ES Be 5 1 amp w amp rrow Band Network and Owner Password PC Power Regional Radio iDial up Co Connection Settings 1234 o o y Remove Storage System Teklogix y Start rr Control Panel 1 TEE Figure 5 56 Total Recall Icon 5 7 1 Creating A Backup Profile Total Recall PsionTeklogix Press the forward backward buttons to view instructions on using PsionTeklogix Total Recall BACK FORWARD amp jStart TekTerm 2 Control Panel Ip Total Recall PsionT gt SRA 1 107 Figure 5 57 Backup Profile In the dropdown menu you can choose from four options Create Backup Profile Selected Profile Restore Selected Profile and Delete Selected Profile Keep in mind be until a profile is created the only available option is Create Backup Profile Help Files BACK And FORWARD Buttons The BACK
367. size of their 8525s Exit If this parameter is set to Y an operator with user level security can exit Tekterm by pressing ALT F4 If Exit is set to N the operator cannot exit Tekterm 6 17 5 Auto Start Auto Start determines whether or not Tekterm is automatically launched when the 8525 is reset If this parameter is set to N Tekterm will not be launched when the terminal resets 6 18 Scanner Control Panel This menu item displays a Scanner Properties dialogue box in which you can set up the particulars of your unit s scanner performance choose the bar codes which will be decoded and so on File View Scanner Properties LOK pe als Q BP optons Barcodes Transitions e e E VO ECH IPv6 Keyboard Double Click Support E Options Ba Z Mouse Network and Owner Regional Remove Dial up Co Settings Programs e H y Storage Stylus Systerr Figure 6 11 Scanner Properties Dialogue Box N Important Refer to Scanner Properties Setup beginning on page 114 for details about setting up your scanner C 18 Nov 2004 x e 168 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application View Manager 6 19 View Manager View Manager Range Display Shift Y Y N Block Cursor Y Y N Use Increment N Y N 5 5 X increment 40 Y increment 12 Split Screen see text Custom Chars see text Font Overr
368. ssigned for each 8525 Initial RIT Round Trip Time Round trip time is the elapsed time between an 8525 vehicle mount computer trans mission and an access point acknowledgement Each 8525 continuously adjusts the acceptable round trip time calculating the average elapsed time over a number of transmissions If an acknowledgement takes longer to receive than the average round trip time calculated the 8525 will send the transmission again Because 8525s cannot calculate an average round trip time without a number of transmissions a starting point or Initial Round Trip Time is required The 8525 uses the time assigned to the Initial RTT parameter as a starting value for round trip calculations Once the 8525 begins transmitting and receiving data this value will be adjusted to reflect the actual average round trip time between transmissions and acknowledgements C 18 Nov 2004 x e 228 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual PERIPHERAL DEVICES A lods 7 1 External Bar Code Reader 231 7 1 1 PowerScan Standard LR and XLR Bar Code Scanners 231 7 1 2 Entering Data With The Bar Code Reader 231 7 2 Bluetooth Peripherals len 231 E GPRS Unit zx a dod ues xen om Mom Wu e OUS dee ES 232 7 4 Mounting Accessories 232 7 4 1 8525 Mounting Recommendations 233 7 4 2 Installing The Cradle And Cradle Mounting Plate 234 7 4 3 Installing The Dual Ball And Socket Moun
369. st Of Psion Teklogix Inc Vehicle Mount Terminal Model 8525 To 95 54 EC 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII Radiated Broadband Emissions Continued Frequency Line Quasi Peak Margin MHz Level dB dBuV 450 000 31 30 31 70 EE Complied 450 000 31 30 31 70 EE Complied Vert zw cmi m L map Cw map L cm m mee zw mm mm eme am come 4o come 14 Compton WA 18 Nov 2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD TEST REPORT S No RFI EMCE1 RP46573JD02A Page 17 of 30 Issue Date 05 November 2004 Test Of Psion Teklogix Inc Vehicle Mount Terminal Model 8525 To 95 54 EC 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII 8 Measurement Uncertainty 8 1 No measurement or test can ever be perfect and the imperfections give rise to error of measurement in the results Consequently the result of a measurement is only an approximation to the value of the measurand the specific quantity subject to measurement and is only complete when accompanied by a statement of the uncertainty of the approximation 8 2 The expression of uncertainty of a measurement result allows realistic comparison of results with reference values and limits given in specifications and standards 8 3 The uncertainty of the result may need to be taken into account when interpreting the measurement results 8 4 The reported expanded uncertainties belo
370. station sends an authentication management frame that contains the identity of the sending station The receiving station then sends back a frame that indicates whether it recognizes the identity of the sending station Using Shared authentication each wireless station is assumed to have received a secret shared key over a secure channel that is independent from the 802 11 wireless network communications channel WPA Wi Fi Protected Access uses the Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP to provide strong data encryption and offers two user authentica tion and key management methods The first method of user authentication is intended for environments using a centralized Authentication Server such as RADIUS User authentication is based on IEEE 802 1X and mutual authentication based EAP In environments where a centralized Authentication Server or EAP frame work is not available user authentication is based on a Pre Shared Key method WPA PSK If you are using Pre Shared Key authentication you will need to manually enter a password Master Key in the Access Point or Wireless Router and enter the same password in each client device that accesses the wireless network The manually configured WPA password Master Key automatically starts the TKIP data encryption proce h X Y e c 18 Nov 2004 A Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 19 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Configuring An IEEE 802 11 Radio
371. t 237 7 4 4 Wiring Guidelines aoaaa a 237 7 4 5 8525 Installation in High Voltage Vehicles 238 7 4 6 8525 Installation In Vehicles llle 230 7 4 7 Wiring Vehicle Power To The 8525 ooo 239 VA 18 Nov 2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 229 c 18 Nov 2004 A k z d e Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories External Bar Code Readers 7 1 External Bar Code Readers 7 1 1 PowerScan Standard LR and XLR Bar Code Scanners The 8525 supports Psion Teklogix PowerScan industrial bar code scanner with standard long range and extra long range options To connect this scanner to the 8525 attach the device to the tether port Before using the bar code reader you may need to change some parameters For details review Scanner Properties Setup on page 114 and Bar Codes on page 117 1 1 2 Entering Data With The Bar Code Reader KI Note For helpful scanning tips refer to Scanning Techniques on page 38 When a label is scanned successfully the 8525 will beep if configured appropriately and the scan LED will flash Occasionally the bar code labels are poorly printed or damaged and cannot be read properly In this case use the keyboard to enter data from the label 1 2 Bluetooth Peripherals If the 8525 is equipped with a Bluetooth radio it is possible to communicate with a variety of Bluetooth peripherals includ
372. t c 18 Nov 2004 ty E p Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 7 Chapter 1 Introduction The 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer 1 3 2 The 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer DESI PS ION TEKLOGIX WindowsCE nst ee RS SSE 0000000000000 oooooooooococmooQ oe EE 2 a 0 a O O dE 0 0 Figure 1 1 8525 With Qwerty Keyboard WA 18 Nov 2004 C H A b n A 8 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction 8525 Ports 1 3 3 8525 Ports Auxiliary Port Tether Port RS232 Serial Port Figure 1 2 Ports 1 3 4 Regulatory Labels e Warning Using controls or adjustments or performing procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure PSION Teklogix Inc This product contains Psion Teklogix Model RA2020 a N 5 53 FCC ID GM3RA2020M IC 2739D RA2020 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules ation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and FOR HOME OR i 2 this device must accept any interference received OFFICE USE including interference that may cause undesired operation Figure 1 3 FCC Label c 18 Nov 2004 E a di e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 9 Chapter 1 Introduction Regulatory Labels PSION Teklogix Inc This product contains Psion Teklogix Model RA2020 CE 5
373. t Bold ULIN see text Reverse REV see text Blink The value assigned to this parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the Blink TESS attribute that is BLNK blink ULIN underline REV reverse or NONE normal Bold The value assigned to this parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the Bold TESS attribute that is BLNK blink ULIN underline REV reverse or NONE normal Reverse The value assigned to the Reverse parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the Reverse TESS attribute that is BLNK blink ULIN underline REV reverse or NONE normal All Fld Video Usually the video attributes apply only to the text that is in an entry parameter is enabled set to Y the entire field including blank reverse video Nii ata X h X Y e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 207 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Fields Default font This parameter determines the default font that appears when the memory is reset e Use the RIGHT or LEFT arrow key to scroll through the options Entry Mode Entry Mode parameters allow you to select a data entry mode The modes are insert replace field and fcursor TESS Edit Modes And C
374. t parameter is disabled and the AIAG Strip parameter is enabled set to ON the label data is not accepted Mod Checks Mod 43 Check If this parameter is enabled set to ON the Mod 43 check digit is calculated Mod 10 Check If this parameter is enabled set to ON the Mod 10 check digit is calculated None If you choose None a check is not executed Field Size Chars Field Size The field size is the length of the field after the first character is stripped and the prefix and suffix characters are added If the field size is non zerog6nl bar codes of that length are passed through Prefix Char This character if non zero is added before a successfully decod the key you want to insert in the dialogue box attached to this pa ASCII Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 119 Chapter 5 Configuration Code 128 Settings Pressing the lt ESC gt key in this dialogue box resets the data to zero Suffix Char EL Note The appended character is treated as any other keyboard character For example if lt BKSP gt is pressed the usual action for that key is performed If your unit is operating with the Psion Teklogix ANSI emulation application the 8525 transmits the escape sequence associated with the function immediately after the bar code data This character if non zero is added after a successfully decoded bar code Press the k
375. t Time 5 double click 715 one dimensional 1D internal scanner 38 parameters for TESS Setti safety warnings 37 Scan Bad 1 4 Scan Good 114 Scan Log File 774 Scan Result Time 4 target dot duration 715 c 18 Nov 2004 E a e 12 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual techniques scanning 37 TESS Scanner parameters 205 troubleshooting tips 38 warning message 114 scanning AIAG 206 aiming target dot duration 7 5 Append Enter 205 Append F0 205 appending characters 71 5 119 121 check digit 120 123 124 125 Click Data appending data 715 Click Time 5 Cont Nxt Fld 205 country code 720 Dot Time 5 double click 715 Input translate 127 locked 8525 206 number system digit 22 123 Output translate 127 prefix character 1 8 121 removing characters 779 121 Rit if Alpha 206 safety instructions 37 Scan Bad 174 Scan Good 7 74 Scan Indicator 114 Scan Log File 4 Scan Result 774 Scan Result Time 774 Scan See 217 Security 716 Short Code 1 5 suffix character 119 121 symbologies 7 6 target aiming dot duration 1 5 TESS Scanner parameters 205 Verify 116 Scan Result 774 Scan Result Time 4 Scan See keyboard mapping 226 parameters setting 22 226 port settings 217 serial number 225 viewport mapping 22 Scan Tone and Scan Time 766 screen stylus using to navigate 45 Index touch pen using 45 Windows CE navigating 45 Screen parameters ANSI 181 TESS 196 screens of Cols
376. t be running BooSt Press and hold down the lt SCAN gt BLUE ENTER keys for a minimum of 6 seconds to launch the Boost program Keep in mind that a device running BooSt has a dif ferent hardware ID than when it is running Windows CE NET Post Installation Done Dialogue Box This dialogue box indicates the success or failure of the installation To view the log file tap on the Log File button To exit the program tap on the Exit button C 18 Nov 2004 A e Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual C 5 of Cols ANSI 182 of Cols TESS 196 of Pages ANSI 181 of Rows ANSI 1 82 of Rows TESS 196 A accents adding Custom Characters 172 accessories bar code readers connecting 237 acknowledged host number ah 752 acknowledged remote number ar 152 acknowledgements transmitted xa 151 acknowledgements received 151 AC powericon 36 AcQ 1t of messages sent but not acknowl edged by cellular master 52 Active Conn Tab 702 ActiveSync ASync profile 99 Addendum 720 122 123 addresses network See also Network addresses 226 Ad Hoc network 78 Advanced wireless connection 23 ah acknowledged host number 152 AIAG AIAG Character 2 0 AIAG Strip 118 Mixed AIAG 206 AIAG Character 2 0 AIAG Strip 1 8 aiming dot duration of 115 All Fld Video 207 Alpha parameters 155 156 ALT Key 3 anchor viewport 22 Anchor Column 222 Anchor Line 222 Anchor View x or
377. t to Y this parameter disallows scanner use when the current session is in LOCK H mode 6 20 2 7 Fields 05 Fields Rang Field Order Y Y N Enter To FO Y Y N Enter On Arrow Y Y N Video see text All Fld Video Y Y N Default Font 16x30 see text Entry Mode field see text Open Fky Only N Y N Ign Bcode fld N Y N Enh Edit Mode N Y N Valid Numerics see text Field Order This parameter determines the mode of cursor movement between fields The next field can be defined by location on the screen or by the assignment of field numb When enabled set to Y the cursor moves according to field location Itzdisa set to N the cursor moves according to the numeric order of the fields C 18 Nov 2004 x e 206 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Fields Enter To FO The lt ENTER gt key normally enters data into a field and moves the cursor to the next field However some applications require that the lt ENTER gt key start a transmission from the 8525 When enabled set to Y this parameter causes the ENTER key to be interpreted as F0 which starts a transmission Enter On Arr When this parameter is enabled set to Y the arrow keys can be used to complete data entry into a field Video 06 Video Range Blink BLNK see tex
378. talled applications e g Open Tekterm Remote Desktop Connection and Windows Explorer Active ynce This option allows you to connect to another device using ActiveSync Command Prompt Command Prompt is used to access the DOS command prompt At the prompt you can type DOS commands such as dir to display all the directories in the drive Internet Explorer The 8525 is equipped with Microsoft Internet Explorer consistent with all Windows CE NET devices on the market You can access the Internet Options icon through the Start Menu under Sett ings gt Control Panel or by double tapping on the desktop icon labelled My Computer and then double tapping on the Control Panel icon Remote Desktop Connection Remote Desktop Connection is an 8525 application used to connect to a Windows Terminal Server so that you can run a session on the Server machine using the 8525 Windows CE NET device Remote Desktop Connection on page 63 provides a website with details about this option Windows Explorer Windows Explorer installed on your 8525 is consistent with all Windows CE NET 4 2 devices You can access this option either from the Start Menu under Programs Windows Explorer c 18 Nov 2004 E a e 54 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE NET Shortcuts 4 4 4 Shortcuts TEKLOGIX 8525 Exec H234n 1 Display Menu j T rs 4 Desktop Lal E B Security kel
379. talling The Cradle And Cradle Mounting Plate 1 4 2 Installing The Cradle And Cradle Mounting Plate Mounting Kit PN 1008424 Cradle Mounting Plate and Quick Release Adaptor Plate Adaptor Plate Figure 7 1 Quick Release Mount Installed First the 8525 must be attached to the cradle Figure 7 2 on page 235 To do this e Place the terminal in the cradle so that the display side of the terminal is on the same side as the quick release fasteners The keyboard side of the termi nal should be on the same side as the tabs c 18 Nov 2004 E a e 234 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Installing The Cradle And Cradle Mounting Plate e Match the side screw holes on the 8525 with the appropriate pairs of holes on the cradle and screw them together The choice of holes determines the angle at which the terminal tilts Screw Holes o leet SCH Quick Release e 1 a l Fasteners i Ss Ss A Figure 7 2 Mounting Cradle And Quick Release Installing The Cradle Mounting Plate Next the cradle mounting plate must be attached to the vehicle The cradle mounting plate shown in Figure 7 3 holds the 8525 and cradle in place e Screw the cradle mounting plate onto the vehicle using the four 1 4 holes Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 235 KI Note The bolts used for all installations are SAE 1 4 20 Post Figure 7 3 The Cr
380. tector at a test distance of 1 meter results incorporate antenna factors and cable losses Results e MHz dBuV dBhV dB 2500 226 Complei ss m zm comme m zem comm o am came a m comes w a come w m RER x mo Comptes w wo Come sy 205 Comptes s m Come 190 000 iz E a ao oome s ae Comptes s mm Come m am comptes 280 000 ai mm comptes EE EN E 18 Nov 2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD TEST REPORT S No RFI EMCE1 RP46573JD02A Page 14 of 30 Issue Date 05 November 2004 Test Of Psion Teklogix Inc Vehicle Mount Terminal Model 8525 To 95 54 EC 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII Radiated Narrowband Emissions Continued Frequency Line Peak Level Limit Margin MHz dBuV dBuV dB 450 000 3800 60 1940 40 Complied 450 000 MEC 20 30 a Complied 600 000 36 90 16 10 L9 Complied 600 000 37 60 15 40 EE Complied 750 000 40 10 12 90 EE Complied 750 000 40 40 1260 Complied Note s 1 The measured result is within the test standard limit by a margin less than the measurement uncertainty it is therefore not possible to state compliance based on the 95 level of confidence However the result indicates that compliance is more probable than non compliance VEA 18 Nov 2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD TEST REPO
381. ter specifies a string of up to 8 characters that are sent after each block transmission 6 20 1 4 Kbd Modes r 05 Kbd Modes Range Arrow mode cursor cursor field Echo mode Smart Smart Local Host DEL key DEL BS CLEAR BKSP key BS DEL CLEAR PrintScreen key 16 1 255 Xmit Enter Y Y N Insert N Y N Newline N Y N Disable kbd N Y N DEC Cursor Keys cursor mode see text Arrow mode This parameter determines whether arrow keys move the cursor within a field or between fields When set to field pressing an arrow key causes the cursor to move to the next field in the direction of the arrow When set to cursor pressing the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys move the cursor within the current field Echo Mode This parameter selects echo mode for the 8525 The available modes are Local Host and Smart Local Host Smart In this mode any character entered using the keyboard is displayed before being sent to the host Certain keys cause additional action at the 8525 as shown in Table 6 4 on page 189 eig In this mode the vehicle mount computer sends all keyb ard VA entries to the host and displays only data received fro e host 188 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Kbd Modes screen before sending them to the host The vehicle mount com pares the characters
382. ters Unicode MD oo o 172 620 Applications e 175 6 20 1 ANSI Settings ccs ee 176 62020 TESS Settings 194 6 21 Ports Tether And Console 217 6 21 1 Tether And Console Port Peripheral Options 217 6 21 2 Tether Serial And Console Port Parameter Settings 218 6 21 3 Tether And Console Port Scan See Parameters 221 6 22 NeDWOIK istud Ho ee E wu eR EA Rom Eo EO DAL us AL s 226 6 22 1 Network Ctrl Panel Settings 226 6 22 2 502 10 V2 ertt Goss he BOS teal Gy oer De Ghana Byte alk ats 227 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories 7 1 External Bar Code Readers 231 7 1 1 PowerScan M Standard LR and XLR Bar Code Scanners 231 7 1 2 Entering Data With The Bar Code Reader 231 7 2 Bluetooth Peripherals 22e 231 7 3 GPS Unit o uos ox ae er REESE SU ea CEDERE UE a 232 7 4 Mounting Accessories 2 2222 4 7 4 1 8525 Mounting Recommendations 7 4 2 Installing The Cradle And Cradle Mounting Plate 4 7 4 3 Installing The Dual Ball And Socket Mount 744 Wiring Guidelines A c LO INO V 7 4 5 8525 Installation in High Voltage Vehicles yoke ms 7 4 6 8525 Installation In Vehicles DEER Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 5 Contents 7 4 7 Wiring Vehicle Power To The 8525 239 Chapter 8 Specifications 8 1 85
383. the Radio Test Application 5 6 Bluetooth Setup Bluetooth is a global standard for wireless connectivity for digital devices and is intended for Personal Area Networks PAN The technology is based on a short range radio link that operates in the ISM band at 2 4 GHz When two Bluetooth equipped devices come within a 2 meter range of each other they can establish a connection Because Bluetooth utilizes a radio based link it does not require a line of sight connection in order to communicate KI Note The Bluetooth radio card uses an internal antenna e In the Control Panel choose the Bluetooth Device Properties icon to display the Bluetooth Manager screen D D L 9 9 e Bluetooth ertificates Date Time Dialing Display Internet IPv6 Keyboard Device Options Support 1 amp amp amp PD Network and Owner Password PC Power Regional Dial up Co Connection Settings D co y IW k Ae Remove Storage System Teklogix Total Recall Volume amp Fy Start ff Control Pan 2 ffl v Figure 5 39 Bluetooth Icon The Bluetooth Manager dialogue box is used to display the other Bluetooth device which you can communicate C 18 Nov 2004 A e 98 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5 Configuration The Devices Tab 5 6 1 The Devices Tab File viel Bluetooth Controls gt x Devices servers Active Conn Properties E
384. the character set you want to use is displayed You can create up to 20 Unicode characters in the custom characters table To create a Unicode value e Replace the 0000 value with a hex value that represents the Unicode character you want to use Press the DOWN arrow key to accept the value and move the cursor to the next field When you have finished creating the Unicode characters you want to use e Press F4 to save your changes Reset the 8525 press and hold down the ENTER and BLUE key simultaneously for a minimum of six seconds 6 19 22 Displaying The Unicode V Pop up Window The Unicode values you create are stored in a pop up window that yo from any application To display the pop up window within any application Press lt CTRL gt ALT lt A gt c 18 Nov 2004 KI Note Unicode characters that cannot be displayed on your h Teen with the d Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 173 Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Displaying The Unicode Pop up Window font you are currently using are displayed as rectangles in the pop up window See the sample menu on page 174 However the actual Uni code value you created will be sent to the host Select item with arrow keys Press ENTER when done Press ESC to cancel 0 000 Use the LEFT or RIGHT arrow key to position the cursor on the Unicode value you want
385. tication enabled and does not have a required PIN set an Authentication Request dialogue box appears e Enter the PIN and tap on OK to connect the devices 5 6 2 The Server Tab Bluetooth Controls 2 x Servers Active Conn Properties Bluetooth ema E Device Storage zy Start 1 TekTerm 2 Control Panel Bluetooth Controls Figure 5 41 Bluetooth Servers Tab Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 101 Chapter 5 Configuration The Properties Tab The Bluetooth connection is initiated from your 8525 to the remote device therefore the 8525 is called the client and the remote is called the server The Servers tab displays the server profiles that can be activated in your 8525 There is currently one server profile available Serial e Tap on the checkbox to activate V the server and it will display the associated port name beside the server name Once you activate a server profile it is recommended that the 8525 be rebooted before you try to bond from a server KI Note You do not need to reboot if you are deactivating a server 5 6 3 The Properties Tab File Viel Bluetooth Controls Devices l Servers l Active Conn Bluetooth Device Name Device Device Class y Local Bluetooth 2 Manufacturer Mouse HCI Version LMP Version ev Port Prefix Storage Start Tekterm contr
386. top 47 4 3 1 The Desktop Icons 4 529 ee km eses 48 4 3 2 The Taskb t o ss ee sk 9 9 Be ee TA 8 44 The Start Menu o 4 4 1 The Desktop 4 4 2 Security Levels e E 4 4 3 Progr ms NN o ee mm ete t 44 4 Shortcuts len 445 Seumgs uas ooo mw NR o ee n 2 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Contents 44 0 Rites se aie hea da a hee RR RA ERU RR Ss 57 4 4 7 Shutdown o o 57 4 5 Using A Dialogue BOX 58 Chapter 5 Configuration 5 1 Remote Desktop Connection a 63 5 2 Pocket PC Compatibility to ocios a e NET ER 63 25 9 The Control Panel sore 2a wag eal a EA S wade RO RE A 63 5 4 Control Panel con 64 5 Basic Setup i xo xo eR Re uox uen eds om OTRAS RUE e 68 5 5 1 Display Properties ens 68 5 5 2 Keyboard Properties se sreo Gee RR sek e 70 5 5 3 Volume And Sound Properties e 79 5 5 4 Power Management Properties e 80 2 5 Stylus Properties e 2 2446 ae koe ow o ox RU XR 82 5 5 6 Certificate Assignment 84 5 5 7 Narrow Band Radio 85 5 6 Bluetooth Setup coe wr e a we ewe os 97 25 6 1 The Devices Tab cuca e ada 98 3 6 2 The Server Tabs s xas x RR xo RR X EUER EE 101 5 6 3 The Properties ab E Ro coe Hae a 101 5 6 4 The Bluetooth GPRS Phone aoaaa aaa 103 57 Total Recall EE ENN 3 Ro EE E s 108 5 7 1 Creating A Backup Profile o s se s soos conma saci mioa 108 25 7 2 Restonng A Profile ess eae ga daa ea 111 58
387. ttributes to mark entry fields Upper Case When this parameter is enabled set to Y lowercase input is converted to uppercase 620 24 Tests 05 Tests Range AutoRep Fn 7 0 63 AutoRep T O 5 0 42255 AutoRep Fn This parameter determines which function key is sent to the host in auto reply mode The value represents the number of the function key not the ASCII decimal equivalent After sending this key the unit locks and waits for the host to unlock the 8525 To disable AutoRep Fn set the AutoRep T O parameter to zero AutoRep 1 0 This parameter determines the time in seconds between the 8525 unlocking and the next transmission of the function key specified by the above parameter A value of zero disables auto reply mode C 18 Nov 2004 x e 200 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Features 6 20 2 5 Features r 05 Features Range Printer Any Available Y N Binary print N Y N Queuing Y Y N Lcl Process Y see text Send Mile N Y N Next X N Y N Kbd Locked N Y N Remap Passthru N Y N Disable Beep N Y N Serial see text Printer The value assigned for the Printer parameter determines which port the print command will use The allowable options are Any Available 1st printer 2nd printer 3rd printer 4th printer and Disabled Binary pri
388. ue of 0 zero disables the parameter NA Note To remove the scan result from the screen before the Result Time has expired point the scanner away from the bar code and press the trigger Scan Good This parameter determines whether or not the 8525 emits an audible scanner beep when a good or successful scan is performed Set this parameter to either ONT to enable the beeper or OFF to disable it can Bad This parameter determines whether or not the 8525 emits an audible scanner beep when a bad or unsuccessful scan is performed Set this parameter to either ON to enable the beeper or OFF to disable it Scan Log File If this parameter is enabled the input barcode and the modified translated output bar code are logged in the file Flash Disk ScanLog txt Keep in mind that if the Scan Log File is enabled there is a slight performance effect when performinganultip scans since the log file is written to persistent storage Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 115 Chapter 5 Configuration Scanner Options Double Click Parameters Click Time msec This parameter controls the maximum gap time in milliseconds for a double click If the time between the first and second clicks of the scanner trigger is within this time it is considered a double click The allowable range is 0 to 1000 A value of zero disables this feature A double click produces different result
389. uptime that users expect from Psion Teklogix devices Rated at IP66 the 8525 is protected against dust and sprays of strong jets of water all at temperatures as low as 30 C 22 F The 8525 can also withstand substantial shock and vibration transferred from vehicles as they work in rugged indoor and outdoor applications Flexibility amp Integration Class leading flexibility and integration is achieved through the use of standards based software and hardware components combined with robust expansion capabilities Based on Windows CE NET and Intel XScale architecture the 8525 enables seamless application development and integration capabilities Compact Flash SD MMC and Type Ill PC Card along with external port options enable a variety of scanners imagers WLAN 802 1 I and Narrowband WWAN GSM GPRS CDMA etc to combine to make the 8525 as flexible as the application requires even in intense and cold environments Ergonomic The 8525 has been developed to ensure maximum viewing angle and efficiency of use The 8525 has a logical control layout and an extremely crisp bright easy to read display 8525 08 04 A4 UK Specifications PROCESSOR amp MEMORY Intel XScale PXA 255 400MHz 32KB instruction 32KB data cache On board RAM 128 MByte SDRAM On board ROM 32 MByte FLASH OPERATING SYSTEMS Windows CE NET 4 2 PROGRAMMING ENVIRONMENT HTML XML CE NET SDK
390. ured for queuing mode see the Queuing parameter on page 201 Additional information on queuing can be found in the TESS Teklogix Screen Subsystem Manual 6 8 ANSI Emulation The Psion Teklogix 8525 in ANSI mode operates like most other ANSI terminals This means software that supports ANSI terminals requires little or no changes 6 8 1 Configuration To configure the 8525 for ANSI mode the Name and Type of session in this case ANSI must be specified in the Applications menu This menu is described in the section titled Applications on page 175 Next a unique number must be assigned using the Terminal parameter number should be unique across the entire system that is each 8525 and application session in each 8525 across your system must have a unique assigned This parameter is described in the section titled ANSI Setti page 176 LE Is on c 18 Nov 2004 h startup L 0 A Once the 8525 is configured an ANSI operation can be selected from t Display Menu 146 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Sending Data To The Host 6 8 Sending Data To The Host 8525 vehicle mounts running ANSI sessions transmit characters to the host as soon as they are typed The 8525 provides parameters that determine when the computer transmits characters to the host The 8525 can be configured to transmit after a number
391. ures 3 1 Test Specification Reference 95 54 EC 31 October 1995 Commission Directive 95 54 EC of 31 October 1995 adapting to technical progress Council Directive 72 245 EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the suppression of radio interference produced by spark ignition engines fitted to motor vehicles and amending Directive 70 156 EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the type approval of motor vehicles and their trailers Purpose of Test To determine whether the equipment complies with the requirements of the relevant annexes of the specification 3 2 Methods and Procedures The methods and procedures used for parts of 95 54 EC 1995 were as detailed in Annex VII Method of Measurement of Broadband Electromagnetic Emissions From Electrical Electronic Sub Assemblies Annex VIII Method of Measurement of Narrowband Electromagnetic Emissions From Electrical Electronic Sub Assemblies 3 3 Definition of Measurement Equipment The measurement equipment used complied with the requirements of the annexes referenced in the Methods amp Procedures section above Appendix 1 contains a list of the test equipment used VEA 18 Nov 2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD TEST REPORT S No RFI EMCE1 RP46573JD02A Page 9 of 30 Issue Date 05 November 2004 Test Of Psion Teklogix Inc Vehicle Mount Terminal Model 8525 To 95 54 EC 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and
392. ursor Movement on page 140 describes these modes in detail Open Fky Only When this parameter is enabled set to Y the screen is open for function keys only and the cursor is not positioned When this parameter is disabled the screen is open for data entry and the cursor is placed in the first field if it exists lgn Bcode fld When this parameter is enabled set to Y fields that were defined as bar code only accept data from the keyboard as well as the bar code reader In effect they behave as data entry fields Enh Edit Mode This mode provides extended enhanced functions to users of Psion Teklogix IBM 5250 terminal emulation When this parameter is enabled set to Y the arrow keys move the cursor anywhere on the screen unrestricted by fixed or entry fields Certain 5250 emulation keys e g Field Exit that were originally available only when Enh Edit Mode was set to Y are now active at all times in TESS applications Refer to IBM 5250 Emulation Keys on page 139 for details about these keys Valid Numerics This parameter is used to configure valid characters for numeric fields to a maximum of 39 characters Since this field is numeric numbers 0 bru d dos need to be configured The default values for this parameter are 208 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application Anchor View 6 20 2 8 Anchor View r 05 Ancho
393. uter User Manual 1 Contents 34 1 Moditier Keys 2 444 2 2s aw ele RR GL enge dus 29 3 442 Th Keys 5 x ae e be eh ade a eh gk a A 30 3 4 3 The Keypad Backlight llle 32 35 The Display eee sG0 de o OR Hee EGER X X Yr 32 3 5 1 Calibrating The Touchscreen o o 32 3 6 8525 Indicators se soete marea os css ERR RS 33 2 6 1 LEDS ouem e re UP sce beet de ox e 33 3 62 OnscreenIndicators e 35 3 63 AudioIndicators s e s 2 o o eee 37 3 4 SCANNING s o e ik ew a sod ma eae he OE S 37 3 7 1 Scanning Techniques o o o ooo oo o 37 3 7 2 Scan LED Indicators s ati 4 4 sree Gee a ad e 37 3 73 Troubleshooting 0 000000 02 eee 38 3 7 4 Operating One Dimensional 1D Laser Scanners 38 3 8 Connecting amp Disconnecting Tethered Peripherals 39 3 9 Monitoring The Network Connection 0 39 3 10 Connecting An8525 TOAPC oe cca oce o o n 40 3 10 1 Using Microsoft ActiveSync To Work With Files 41 3 11 General Maintenance o e e 41 3 11 1 Caring For The Touchscreen o o 41 311 2 Cleanme The 8525 2 s Som mx a ds Aer E 42 Chapter 4 Working With Windows CE NET 4 1 Navigating In Windows CE NET And Applications 45 4 1 1 Navigating Using A Touchscreen And Stylus 45 4 1 2 Navigating Using The Keyboard 46 4 2 Working With Files Folders And Programs 47 43 The Startup Desk
394. utes the unit will shut off to preserve the contents of RAM The backup battery is not user accessible It must be replaced by authorized Psion Teklogix personnel 3 3 Switching The 8525 Vehicle Mount On And Off Switching On The 8525 e Press the lt ENTER ON gt key When all four LEDs flash orange release the lt ENTER ON gt button A splash screen displaying the Psion Teklogix logo and the Microsoft Windows CE NET logo appears followed by the startup desktop KI Note Ifthe 8525 is in suspend state pressing lt ENTER ON gt key gd BpMov 2004 i h unit from this state The screen in which you were working be ore the computer entered suspend state is displayed A E my 28 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 8525 The Keyboard Switching Off The 8525 Important Keep in mind that turning off the 8525 does not result in a complete reboot rather the unit enters a power saving suspend state When the 8525 is turned on from suspend state operation resumes within a few seconds To switch off the 8525 e Press the BLUE key and then press the lt ENTER ON gt key Important Ifthe word BLUE is displayed in uppercase in the taskbar area at the bottom of the screen this key is locked on the 8525 will not switch off Press the BLUE key again to unlock it then press BLUE lt ENTER ON gt to switch the 8525 off If ho
395. v 2004 E e e All trademarks are the property of their respective holders Return To Factory Warranty Psion Teklogix warrants a return to factory warranty for a period of one year from shipment The warranty on Psion Teklogix manufactured equipment does not extend to any product that has been tampered with altered or repaired by any person other than an employee of an authorized Psion Teklogix service organization See Psion Teklogix terms and conditions of sale for full details Service When requesting service please provide information concerning the nature of the failure and the manner in which the equipment was used when the failure occurred Type model and serial number should also be provided Before returning any products to the factory call the Customer Services Group for a Return Authorization number Support Services Psion Teklogix provides a complete range of product support services to its custom ers In North America these services can be accessed through the Psion Teklogix Helpdesk The Helpdesk coordinates repairs and training helps you to troubleshoot problems over the phone and arranges for technicians or engineers to come to your site For contact information and a listing of worldwide offices please refer to Appendix A Support Services And Worldwide Offices Disclaimer Every effort has been made to make this material complete accurate and up to date Teklogix Inc reserves the right to make
396. va Vee AREA 143 FL a aig 25V 350MW n un 20 9000989 6A 97634 p i NFE31PT222Z1E9 FDV303N a i TP302 m ee TRACEWIDTH 80 1 TP321 E zoo Sage ee GE e vin sw P i od d a e e n out 2 e e SIE 10K0 FDV303N o RB 1 SLF6028T 100M1R3 e R278 ID GND imei 021 0 063W w 7 25V 350MW 97256 N 97296 1 97848 C125 1 1 97634 Tp an 3 221 1oko 120P 1 9000520 LOW ENERGY LATCH e 1 e d pie elo tro ap PWR SYNC CLK z we pon E E 25V 350MW 1 El H e SYNG_MODE S aa 2 sv 10 3 1 2 eva wy E s ry e e e X MIS Geh oe OSVTYP 084 074 e PE 4 JA sto C156 C126 ENSWERAR e e i 2 SB 9002925 POWER LED 1 97372 1 9000520 R89 M 10N 22U as Me enn 28 e POWER GND NET e 97320 15 10 o 400K y 2 tev 2 as E 3 3V 5V SWITCHED meas ems ec 53261 0290 R_SETI R_SET2 di Ww MOLEX ee TP298 97296 B 9 cu a ma a R347 se gt mm 4 1 9000528 p299 9003414 9000958 o 063W e 220P lt 40k2 lt 267 E 15 oe wem 0063W e Rtas 2 25V 1 97634 11 ED 97200 062 e FDV303N PRI ava 1 9001581 25V 350MW Q 063W se 33P R7 3 kz E 3 3V STANDBY REG R E ELM 9mm q 50V 15K0 SCH 2 0 0 063W a JA D aes E e e ava cv MBROSSOT D32 1 30V_500MA R279 TP310 TP317 TP318 e E i 94543 T 97296 E A R282 ais MBR0530T E Poe 3V3 STANDBY om 97296 97634 SSC Zenn d 2 OR Sie e 5 Jun vout H TRAGEWIDTH 30 3V3 STANDBY gt dl E S ie LINE e tro eu 150mA MAX w 25V 350MW tak 1 cia l 1 TYP
397. val mark described in the Motor Vehicles Designation of Approval Marks Regulations 1979 as amended only on Motor Vehicle Parts that a have been manufactured assembled or completed in factories under his control and b conform in all material respects with the samples which were tested before this approval was issued 2 2 The holder of this approval shall mark his products in the manner set out in the relevant Regulation Directive as given in the Motor Vehicles Designation of Approval Marks Regulations 1979 as amended together with a the approval number allocated by the Secretary of State for Transport his name or trademark c any other markings specified in the appropriate International Regulation 2 3 The holder of this approval shall be prepared at any time to satisfy Department for Transport officials or agents of the Department hat the quality of the part being produced and marked or intended to be by him with the approval marking conforms in all material respects with that of the samples tested as the International Regulation requires 2 4 The holder of this approval undertakes to admit duly authorised officials or agents of the Department at all reasonable times to any premises in which parts marked or intended to be marked are being manufactured assembled or stored and to permit any such official or agent to inspect parts and all records relating to them and their production processes 2 5 This approval may be
398. verbatim e The CLR key forces a sign on message and display refresh This only occurs when CLR is pressed and the CLR key on the display is pressed then released e The three F keys are mapped to Fl F2 and F3 respectively e The ENT key is mapped to the carriage return W character e The two arrow keys are handled locally and control the brightness and the line and column offsets as described on page 224 e Bar code data is stripped off any identifying headers symbology etc and passed verbatim The Scan See is capable of displaying only a subset of the default PC 8 ASCII character set Any characters that cannot be displayed are currently translated mo 6 22 Network r 03 Network Ctrl Panel 802 10v2 6 22 1 Network Ctrl Panel Settings This option displays a Windows CE NET screen where you can set up your radio launch an existing network connection or create a new connection Bs ar ye est LE ei E S 9 Serial Cable USB Cable PTXWLAG on COM2 Make New Connection 7 Start_ TekTerm TE Connections Figure 6 12 Network Settings 226 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6 Tekterm Application 802 IQ v2 N Important Follow the steps outlined in Configuring An IEEE 802 11 Radio Installed In The 8525 on page 15 for details about configuring your radio 6 22 2 802 10 v2 N Important For setup information about 802 10 v2
399. w are based on a standard uncertainty multiplied by an appropriate coverage factor such that a confidence level of approximately 95 is maintained For the purposes of this document approximately is interpreted as meaning effectively or for most practical purposes Confidence Level Calculated Uncertainty Type Radiated Emissions 30 MHz to 1000 MHz 9596 6 32 dB Electric Field Strength 1 m 8 5 The methods used to calculate the above uncertainties are in line with those recommended within the various measurement specifications Where measurement specifications do not include guidelines for the evaluation of measurement uncertainty the published guidance of the appropriate accreditation body is followed VA 18 Nov 2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD TEST REPORT S No RFI EMCE1 RP46573JD02A Page 18 of 30 Issue Date 05 November 2004 Test Of Psion Teklogix Inc Vehicle Mount Terminal Model 8525 To 95 54 EC 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII 9 Measurement Methods 9 1 Radiated Narrow Band Emissions Annex VIII 9 1 1 These measurements were performed in accordance with the standard against appropriate limits for narrow band emissions using an average detector 9 1 2 Initial scans covering the entire band in a shielded enclosure were performed in order to identify frequencies on which the EUT was generating interference This determined the frequencies on which the EUT should be re measure
400. wever you ve disabled the Blue Key in the One Shot dia logue box see Keyboard One Shot Modes on page 72 the 6525 can be turned off even when the BLUE key is locked on 3 4 The Keyboard The 8525 offers three keyboard layouts Qwerty ABC and Azerty Most of the keys on these keyboards operate much like a desktop computer Where a key or key function is not consistent with the PC keyboard the differences are noted 3 4 1 Modifier Keys The lt SHIFT gt lt CTRL gt ALT BLUE and ORANGE keys are modifier keys Pressing a modifier key changes the function of the next key pressed For example a square bracket is printed in orange print above the 4 key Pressing the ORANGE key followed by the 4 key displays a square bracket rather than the number 4 The lt SHIFT gt lt CTRL gt and ALT keys operate much like a desktop keyboard except that they are not chorded two keys held down simultaneously Thegnodi ef key must be pressed first followed by the key whose function you want modified w Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 29 Chapter 3 Getting To Know Your 8525 Activating Modifier Keys 3 4 1 1 Activating Modifier Keys When a modifier key is pressed once it is displayed in lowercase letters in the taskbar at the bottom of the 8525 screen For example if the lt CTRL gt key is pressed ctrl key is displayed at the bottom of the unit screen Once an
401. you need to rearrange this list of networks move networks up and down in the list e In the networks list tap on the network you want to move up or down in the list To move the highlighted item upward or downward in the list tap the Up or Down button and press ENTER 2 25 Deleting A Preferred Network To delete a network from this list e Tap on the network in the list to highlight it e Tap the Delete button and press ENTER c 18 Nov 2004 I Y 7 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle Mount Computer User Manual 23 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Changing Network Properties 22 5 3 Changing Network Properties To change the properties of an existing preferred network Highlight the network that you want to modify e Tap the Properties button and press lt ENTER gt e Make any necessary changes in the Wireless Properties dialogue box and press lt ENTER gt to save the changes 2 3 Calibrating The Touchscreen Before using your 8525 you will need to calibrate the touchscreen Refer to Calibrating The Touchscreen on page 32 for details 2 4 Resetting The 8525 Vehicle Mount A Important Because Psion Teklogix cannot guarantee what has been saved registry after a reset this should be considered as a last resort To reset the 8525 e Press and hold down the BLUE key and the lt ENTER ON gt key simulta neously for a minimum of six seconds A reset results in a complete reboot of the unit

Mrs S Boyle Psion Teklogix Incorporated C/o RFI

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents